ACS180 FW.

book Page 1 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

—
ABB MACHINERY DRIVES

ACS180 machinery control program

Firmware manual
ACS180 [Link] Page 2 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

—
List of related manuals

Drive hardware manuals and guides Code (English)

Drive/converter/inverter safety instructions 3AXD50000037978
ACS180 Hardware manual 3AXD50000467945
Drive firmware manuals and guides
ACS180 Firmware manual 3AXD50000467860
ACS180 Quick installation and start-up guide 3AXD50000510344
ACS180 User interface guide 3AXD50000606696
Option manuals and guides
ACS-AP-x Assistant control panels user’s manual 3AUA0000085685
ACS-BP-S Basic control panel user’s manual 3AXD50000032527
Tool and maintenance manuals and guides
Drive composer PC tool user’s manual 3AUA0000094606
Converter module capacitor reforming instructions 38FE64059629
Adaptive Programming Application guide 3AXD50000028574

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the
Internet. See section Document library on the Internet on the inside of the
back cover. For manuals not available in the Document library, contact your
local ABB representative.

The code below opens an online listing of the manuals applicable to the
product.
ACS180 [Link] Page 3 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Firmware manual
ACS180 standard control program

Table of contents

3. Start-up, ID run and use

3AXD50000467860 rev A
EN
EFFECTIVE: 2020-09-08
ACS180 [Link] Page 4 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM
ACS180 [Link] Page 5 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Table of contents 5

Table of contents
1. Introduction to the manual
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Cybersecurity disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Safety
2. Control panel
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Home view and Message view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Options menu and Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3. Start-up, ID run and use

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Do the identification (ID) run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Background information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ID run steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Start and stop the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Change the rotation direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Set the speed or frequency reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Set the drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Open Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Change the units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

4. Control macros
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Default control connections for the ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Hand/PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Default control connections for the Hand/PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Modbus RTU macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Default control connections for the Modbus macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Default control connections for the Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ACS180 [Link] Page 6 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

6 Table of contents

Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PID macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Default control connections for PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5. Program features
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Local and external control locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operating modes of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Speed control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Torque control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Frequency control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Special control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Drive configuration and programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Programming via parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Motor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Motor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Scalar motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Constant speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Critical speeds/frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Speed controller autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Rush control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Autophasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Speed control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Torque control performance figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Flux braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DC magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Energy optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Speed compensated stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Application control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Control macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
PID trim function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
ACS180 [Link] Page 7 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Table of contents 7

DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Voltage control and trip limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Settings and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Safety and protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fixed/Standard protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic fault resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Other programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fault and warning messages, data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Energy saving calculators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Backup and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Data storage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Parameter checksum calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
User lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

6. Parameters
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Summary of parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Short parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Long parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
03 Input references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
04 Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
05 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
06 Control and status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
07 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10 Standard DI, RO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
12 Standard AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
13 Standard AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
19 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
20 Start/stop/direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
21 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
22 Speed reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
23 Speed reference ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
24 Speed reference conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
25 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
26 Torque reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
28 Frequency reference chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
ACS180 [Link] Page 8 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

8 Table of contents

30 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
31 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
32 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
35 Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
36 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
37 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
40 Process PID set 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
41 Process PID set 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
44 Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
45 Energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
46 Monitoring/scaling settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
47 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
49 Panel port communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
58 Embedded fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
71 External PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
95 HW configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
96 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
97 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
98 User motor parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
99 Motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency settings . . . 296
Parameters supported by Modbus backwards compatibility with 550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

7. Additional parameter data

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Parameter groups 1…9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Parameter groups 10…99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

8. Fault tracing
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Warnings and faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Pure events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Warning/fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Viewing warning/fault information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
QR Code generation for mobile service application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

9. Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Embedded fieldbus and external control panel mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
ACS180 [Link] Page 9 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Table of contents 9

Connecting the fieldbus to the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (Modbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Setting the drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Data input/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Register addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
About the control profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Control Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Control Word for the DCU Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
State transition diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Modbus holding register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Modbus function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Coils (0xxxx reference set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Error code registers (holding registers 400090…400100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

10. Control chain diagrams

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Frequency reference selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Frequency reference modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Speed reference source selection I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Speed reference source selection II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Speed reference ramping and shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Speed error calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Torque reference source selection and modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Reference selection for torque controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Torque limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Process PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
External PID setpoint and feedback source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
External PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Direction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
ACS180 [Link] Page 10 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

10 Table of contents
ACS180 [Link] Page 11 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Introduction to the manual 11

1
Introduction to the manual
What this chapter contains
• Applicability
• Safety instructions
• Target audience
• Terms and abbreviations
• Related manuals

Applicability
The manual applies to the ACS180 standard control program 2.13 or later.
To check the version of the control program, see parameter 07.05 Firmware version.

Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions.
• Read the complete safety instructions in the Hardware manual of the drive before
you install, commission, or use the drive.
• Read the firmware function-specific warnings before changing parameter values.
Chapter Parameters lists the relevant parameters and related warnings.
ACS180 [Link] Page 12 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

12 Introduction to the manual

Target audience
The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical
components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
ACS180 [Link] Page 13 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Introduction to the manual 13

Terms and abbreviations

Term/abbreviation Explanation
ACS-AP-x Assistant control panel, advanced operator keypad for
communication with the drive.
The ACS180 support types ACS-AP-I, ACS-AP-S and ACS-AP-
W (with a Bluetooth interface).
ACS-BP-S Basic control panel, basic operator keypad for communication
with the drive.
AI Analog input; interface for analog input signals
AO Analog output; interface for analog output signals
AsynM Asynchronous motor
BCBL-01 Optional USB to RJ45 cable
Capacitor bank See DC link capacitors.
Control board Circuit board in which the control program runs
DC link DC circuit between rectifier and inverter
DC link capacitors Energy storage which stabilizes the intermediate circuit DC
voltage
DI Digital input; interface for digital input signals
DO Digital output; interface for digital output signals
Drive Frequency converter for controlling AC motors
EFB Embedded fieldbus
Frame (size) Refers to the drive physical size, for example R0 and R1. The
type designation label attached to the drive shows the frame of
the drive, see the hardware manual of the drive.
ID run Motor identification run. During the identification run, the drive
will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor
control.
Hexadecimal Describes binary numbers using a numbering system that has 16
sequential numbers as base units. The hexadecimal numbers
are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
Intermediate circuit See DC link.
Inverter Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and
voltage.
I/O Input/Output
LSW Least significant word
Macro Pre-defined default values of parameters in a drive control
program. Each macro is intended for a specific application. See
chapter Control macros.
NETA-21 Optional remote monitoring tool
Parameter User-adjustable operation instruction to the drive, or signal
measured or calculated by the drive
ACS180 [Link] Page 14 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

14 Introduction to the manual

PID controller Proportional–integral–derivative controller

PLC Programmable logic controller
PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motor
PM Permanent magnet
R0, R1,… Frame (size)
RCD Residual current device
Rectifier Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and
voltage.
RFI Radio frequency interference
RO Relay output; interface for a digital output signal. Implemented
with a relay.
SIL Safety integrity level. See chapter Safe torque off function in the
drive hardware manual.
STO Safe torque off. See chapter Safe torque off function in the drive
hardware manual.

Related manuals
The related manuals are listed behind the front cover under List of related manuals.

Cybersecurity disclaimer
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information and
data via a network interface. It is Customer's sole responsibility to provide and
continuously ensure a secure connection between the product and Customer network
or any other network (as the case may be). Customer shall establish and maintain
any appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls,
application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti-virus
programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system and the interface
against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for
damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access,
interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
See also section User lock (page 116).
ACS180 [Link] Page 15 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control panel 15

2
Control panel
What this chapter contains
• Control panel
• Home view and Message view
• Options menu
• Main menu
• Submenus

Control panel
By default, ACS 180 has an integrated panel. If required, you can use external control
panels such as assistant control panel or a basic panel. For more information, refer
ACX-AP-x assistant control panel’s user’s manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]) or
ACS-BP-S basic control panel’s user’s manual (3AXD50000032527 [English])

1. Display - shows the Home view as default.

2. Main menu.
9
1 3. OK button - open the Main menu, select and save settings.
8 2
4. Start button - start the drive.
7 3 5. Menu navigation buttons - move in the menus and set
values.
6 5 4 6. Stop button - stop the drive.
7. Back button - open the Options menu, and move back in
the menu.
8. Options menu.
9. Status light - green and red colors indicate the state and
potential problems.
ACS180 [Link] Page 16 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

16 Control panel

Home view and Message view

The Home view is the main view. Open the Main menu and Options menu from the
Home view.
Home view
1. Control selection - local or remote
2. Local start/stop control - enabled
3. Rotation direction - forward or reverse
4. Local reference setting - enabled
5. Speed - target
6. Speed - current
7. Main menu - menu list
8. Options menu - quick access menu

The Message view shows fault and warning messages. If there is an active fault or
warning, the panel shows the Message view directly.
You can open the Message view from the Options menu or Diagnostics submenu.
Message view: Fault
Fault messages require your immediate attention.

Check the code in the Fault messages table on page 358 to

troubleshoot the problem.

Message view: Warning

Warning messages show possible problems.

Check the code in the Warning messages table on

page 350 to troubleshoot the problem.
ACS180 [Link] Page 17 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control panel 17

Options menu and Main menu

Options menu Main menu
1. To open: press the Back 2. To open: press the OK
button in the Home view. button in the Home view.

1 2

 Options menu
The Options menu is a quick access menu.

1. Control location - set to local or remote control

2. Rotation direction - set to forward or reverse
3. Active faults - view possible faults
4. Reference speed - set the reference speed
5. Active warnings - view possible warnings

 Main menu
The Main menu is a scroll menu. The menu icons represent specific groups. The
groups have submenus.
Note: You can define which Main menu items are visible (see parameter 49.30).

1. Motor data - motor parameters

2. Motor control - motor settings

3. Control macros

4. Diagnostics - faults, warnings, fault log and connection status

5. Parameters - parameters

Submenus
The Main menu items have submenus. Some submenus also have menus and/or option lists.
ACS180 [Link] Page 18 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

18 Control panel

The content of the submenus depend on the drive type.

Motor Data

1. Motor type - AsynM, PMSM

2. Control mode - Scalar, Vector
3. Nominal power
4. Nominal current
5. Nominal voltage
6. Nominal frequency
7. Nominal speed
8. Nominal torque
9. Phase order - U V W, U W V
[Link] Cosphi
[Link] selection - SI or US units

Motor Data: Motor type

1. AsynM
2. PMSM

Motor Data: Control mode

1. Scalar
2. Vector

Motor Data: Phase order

1. U V W
2. U W V

Motor Data: Unit selection

1. SI units
2. US units
ACS180 [Link] Page 19 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control panel 19

Motor Control

1. Start mode - Const time, Automatic

2. Stop mode - Coast, Ramp, DC hold
3. Acceleration time
4. Deceleration time
5. Maximum allowed speed
6. Maximum allowed current
7. Minimum allowed speed

Motor Control: Start modes

1. Const time
2. Automatic

Motor Control: Stop modes

1. Coast
2. Ramp
3. DC hold

Control macros
1. ABB standard
2. Hand/Auto
1 Hand/Auto 2 3. Hand/PID
4. Modbus RTU
Modbus 5. Alternate
3 Hand/PID 4 6. Motor potentiometer
RTU
7. PID
5 6

7 PID
ACS180 [Link] Page 20 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

20 Control panel

Diagnostics

1. Active Fault - shows the fault code

2. Fault History - list of latest fault codes (newest first)
3. Active Warnings - shows the warning code
4. Connection Status - Fieldbus and I/O signals

Parameters

1. Complete parameter list - groups menu with complete

parameters and parameter levels
2. Modified parameter list
3. Parameter restore - reset to factory default parameters
ACS180 [Link] Page 21 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Start-up, ID run and use 21

3
Start-up, ID run and use
What this chapter contains
• Start up the drive
• Do the identification (ID) run
• Start and stop the drive
• Change the rotation direction
• Set the speed or frequency reference
• Set the drive parameters
• Open Diagnostics
• Change the units
Note: In this chapter the drive uses an integrated panel to perform the start-up, ID
run, and other actions. You can also perform these functions using an external control
panel or a drive composer PC tool.

Start up the drive

1. Power up the drive.
2. Select the unit (international or US) and press OK.
3. In the Motor data view, set the motor type:
AsynM: Asynchronous motor
PMSM: Permanent magnet motor
4. Set the motor control mode:
Vector: Speed reference. This is suitable for most cases. The drive does an
automatic stand-still ID run.
Scalar: Frequency reference.
Use this mode when:
ACS180 [Link] Page 22 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

22 Start-up, ID run and use

- The number of motors can change.

- The nominal motor current is less than 20% of the nominal drive current.
Scalar mode is not recommended for permanent magnet motors.
5. Set the nominal motor values:
• Nominal power
• Nominal current
• Nominal voltage
• Nominal frequency
• Nominal speed
• Nominal torque (optional)
• Nominal cosphi (optional)
6. Examine the direction of the motor.
If it is necessary, set the motor direction with the Phase order setting or with the
phase order of the motor cable.
7. In the Motor control view, set the start and stop mode.
8. Set the acceleration time and the deceleration time.
Note: The speed acceleration and deceleration ramp times are based on the
value in parameter 46.01 Speed scaling/46.02 Frequency scaling.
9. Set the maximum and minimum speed or frequency. For more information, see
parameters 30.11 Minimum speed /30.13 Minimum frequency and 30.12
Maximum speed/30.14 Maximum frequency on page 216.
10. In the Control macros view, select the applicable macro.
11. Tune the drive parameters to the application. You can use the Assistant control
panel (ACS-AP-x), or the Drive Composer PC tool with the drive.

Do the identification (ID) run

 Background information
The drive automatically estimates motor characteristics using Standstill ID run when
the drive is started for the first time, and after any motor parameter (group 99 Motor
data) is changed. This is valid when:
• parameter 99.13 ID run requested selection is Standstill and
• parameter 99.04 Motor control mode selection isVector.
ACS180 [Link] Page 23 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Start-up, ID run and use 23

In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID run. Select the ID run
for demanding motor control connections. For example:
• permanent magnet motor (PMSM) is used
• drive operates near zero speed references, or
• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed
range is needed.
Note: If you change the motor parameters after the ID run, you need to repeat the
run.
Note: If you have already parameterized your application using scalar motor control
mode and you need to change to vector:
• Set parameter 99.04 Motor control mode selection to Vector.
• for I/O controlled drive, check parameters in groups 22 Speed reference
selection, 23 Speed reference ramp, 12 Standard AI, 30 Limits and 46
Monitoring/scaling settings.
• for torque controlled drive, check also parameters in group 26 Torque reference
chain.

 ID run steps

Warning! Make sure it is safe to run the procedure.

1. Open the Main menu.

2. Select the Parameters submenu.
3. Select All parameters.
4. Select 99 Motor data and press OK.
5. Select 99.13 ID run requested, select the wanted ID mode and press OK.
An AFF6 Identification run warning message is shown before you press Start.
The panel LED starts to blink green to indicate an active warning.
6. Press Start to start the ID run.
Do not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. If you need to stop the ID
run, press Stop.
After the ID run is completed, the status light stops blinking.
If the ID run fails, the panel shows the fault FF61 ID run.
ACS180 [Link] Page 24 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

24 Start-up, ID run and use

Start and stop the drive

1. Press the Start button to start the drive.

2. Press the Stop button to stop the drive.

2 1

Change the rotation direction

1. On Home view, press Back button to get Options

1 menu.
2. In the Options menu, move to the rotation direction
item and press OK. Then use the arrow buttons to
change the rotation direction selection.
3
3. Press the OK button to change the rotation
direction.
2

Set the speed or frequency reference

1. On Home view, press Back button to get Options

menu.
2. In the Options menu, move to the speed or
1 frequency reference item and press OK.
3
3. Press the arrow buttons to edit the value.
4. Press the OK button to confirm the new value.

2
ACS180 [Link] Page 25 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Start-up, ID run and use 25

Set the drive parameters

1. Select the Main menu from the Home view (by pressing
OK button).
2. Scroll to Parameters, and press the OK button to open
the submenu.
3. Select the complete parameters list with the arrow button
and press the OK button, or
4. Select the modified parameters list with the arrow button
and press the OK button.
5. Select the parameter and press the OK button to adjust
the value.
The parameters are shown in respective groups. The
first two digits of the parameter number represent the
parameter group. For example, parameters starting with
30 are in the Limits group.

See chapter Parameters for more information.

Open Diagnostics

1. Select the Main menu from the Home view (by pressing
OK button).
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and press the OK button to open
the submenu.
3. Select the warning or fault with the arrow button and
press the OK button.

See chapter Fault tracing for more information.

ACS180 [Link] Page 26 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

26 Start-up, ID run and use

Change the units

1. Select the Main menu from the Home view (by pressing
OK button).
2. Scroll to Motor data and press the OK button to open the
submenu.
3. Scroll to the unit selection item and press the OK button.
4. Select the unit set with the arrow button, then press the
OK button.
ACS180 [Link] Page 27 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 27

4
Control macros
Contents
• ABB standard macro
• Hand/Auto macro
• Hand/PID macro
• Modbus RTU macro
• Alternate macro
• Motor potentiometer macro
• PID macro
Control macros are sets of default parameter values that apply to a specific control
configuration. They make it faster and easier to set up a drive for use.
By default, macro is set as ABB standard macro.

ABB standard macro

ABB standard macro is suitable for an I/O-controlled drive. Digital inputs control
start/stop (2-wire), direction and constant speed selection (3 speeds).
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter
96.04 Macro select to value ABB standard.
This is the default macro for drive ACS180-04.
ACS180 [Link] Page 28 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

28 Control macros

 Default control connections for the ABB standard macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
9 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
10 DI3 Constant speed selection1)
11 DI4 Constant speed selection1)
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
NRKP
14 AI1/DI5 Speed reference (0…10V)3)
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Not used3)
0D[RKP 16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20mA)3)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
2)
Safe torque off (STO)
1 S+
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected
3 S1 at the factory. Drive starts only when
4 S2 both circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination
ACS180 [Link] Page 29 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 29

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

Notes:
1)
In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04
Motor control mode.

DI3 DI4 Operation/Parameter

Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1
1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1
0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 22.27 Constant speed 2
1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3 22.28 Constant speed 3

2) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the

grounding shelf for the control cables.

3) Select voltage or current for inputs AI1 and AI2 and output AO with parameters
12.15, 12.25 and 13.15, respectively.

Input signals
• Analog frequency reference (AI1)
• Start/stop selection (DI1)
• Direction selection (DI2)
• Constant frequency selection (DI3)
• Constant frequency selection (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: No fault [Fault (-1)]
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 30 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

30 Control macros

Hand/Auto macro
This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is
needed. Both have their own control and reference signals. One signal is used to
switch between these two. You can activate the macro from the Control macros view,
or set parameter 96.04 Macro select to Hand/Auto.

 Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Stop / Start (Hand)
9 DI2 Hand(1) / Auto(0)
10 DI3 Stop / Start (Auto)
11 DI4 Fault reset
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
NRKP
14 AI1/DI5 Speed reference (Hand) (0...10V)2)
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Speed reference (Auto) (4...20mA)2)
0D[RKP 16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20mA) 2)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
Safe torque off (STO)
1 S+
1)
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected at
3 S1 the factory. Drive starts only when both
4 S2 circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination
ACS180 [Link] Page 31 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 31

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

Notes:
1)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the
grounding shelf for the control cables.
2)
Select voltage or current for inputs AI1 and AI2 and output AO with parameters
12.15, 12.25 and 13.15, respectively.

Input signals
• Speed analog reference, Hand (AI1)
• Speed analog reference, Auto (AI2)
• Start/stop selection, Hand (DI1)
• Hand(1)/Auto(0) selection (DI2)
• Start/stop selection, Auto (DI3)
• Fault reset (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: Fault(-1)
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 32 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

32 Control macros

Hand/PID macro
This macro controls the drive with the built-in process PID controller. In addition this
macro has a second control location for the direct speed/frequency control mode. You
can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or set parameter 96.04 Macro
select to Hand/Auto.

 Default control connections for the Hand/PID macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Start/Stop (Hand)
9 DI2 Hand(1)/PID(0)
10 DI3 Start/Stop (PID)
11 DI4 Constant speed selection 13)
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
NRKP
14 AI1/DI5 Hand mode speed ref. (AI1,0...10V)1),5)
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Process feedback (4...20mA)1),2),5)
0D[RKP 16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20mA)5)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
Safe torque off (STO)
1 S+
4)
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected at
3 S1 the factory. Drive starts only when both
4 S2 circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

ACS180 [Link] Page 33 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 33

Notes:
1)
Hand: 0…10 V -> frequency reference.
PID: 4…20 mA -> 0…100% PID Process feedback.
2)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To
use sensors supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see chapter Electrical
installation, section Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors in the
Hardware manual of the drive.
3) In scalar control (default): See the Control macros view or parameter group 28
Frequency reference chain.
DI4 Operation (parameter)
Scalar control (default)
0 Set frequency through AI1
1 28.26 Constant frequency 1

4) Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on the

grounding shelf for the control cables.

5) Select
voltage or current for inputs AI1 and AI2 and output AO with parameters
12.15, 12.25 and 13.15, respectively.

Input signals
• Hand mode speed analog reference (AI1)
• Process feedback (AI2)
• Start/Stop selection, Hand (DI1)
• Hand(1)/PID(0) selection (DI2)
• Start/Stop selection, PID (DI3)
• Constant speed selection 1 (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: Fault(-1)
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 34 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

34 Control macros

Modbus RTU macro

Modbus macro is suitable for a Modbus-controlled drive.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter
96.04 Macro select to value Modbus RTU.

 Default control connections for the Modbus macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Start/Stop (Hand)
9 DI2 Forward/Reverse (Hand)
10 DI3 Hand(1)/Modbus (0)
11 DI4 Fault reset
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
Constant speed selection 11)
NRKP
14 AI1/DI5
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Speed reference (Hand, 0...10 V)1)
0D[RKP 16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20V mA1)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
2)
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
Safe torque off (STO)
1 S+
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected
3 S1 at the factory. Drive starts only when
4 S2 both circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

ACS180 [Link] Page 35 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 35

Notes:
Set the communication mode jumper to Modbus Mode. EIA-485 Modbus RTU can't
be used together with external panel.
1)
Select voltage or current for inputs AI1 and AI2 and output AO with parameters
12.15, 12.25 and 13.15, respectively.
2)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on
the grounding shelf for the control cables.

Input signals
• Constant speed selection 1 (AI1)
• Speed reference, Hand (AI2)
• Start/stop selection, Hand (DI1)
• Forward/Reverse selection, Hand (DI2)
• Hand(1)/Modbus(0) selection (DI3)
• Fault reset (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: Fault(-1)
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 36 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

36 Control macros

Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration where one signal starts the motor in the
forward direction and another signal starts the motor in the reverse direction.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter
96.04 Macro select to value Alternate.

 Default control connections for the Alternate macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Start forward
9 DI2 Start reverse
10 DI3 Constant speed selection 11)
11 DI4 Constant speed selection 21)
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
Fault reset3)
NRKP
14 AI1/DI5
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Speed reference (0...10 V)3)
0D[RKP
16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20 mA)3)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
2)
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
Safe torque off (STO)
1 S+
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected
3 S1 at the factory. Drive starts only when
4 S2 both circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

ACS180 [Link] Page 37 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 37

Notes:
1)
In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.
In vector control: See parameter group 22 Speed reference selection.
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04
Motor control mode.

DI3 DI4 Operation/Parameter

Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1
1 0 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1
0 1 28.27 Constant frequency 2 22.27 Constant speed 2
1 1 28.28 Constant frequency 3 22.28 Constant speed 3
2)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on
the grounding shelf for the control cables.
3) Selectvoltage or current for input AI2 and output AO with parameters 12.25 and
13.15, respectively.

Input signals
• Fault reset (DI5)
• Speed analog reference (AI2)
• Start forward (DI1)
• Start reverse (DI2)
• Constant speed selection 1 (DI3)
• Constant speed selection 2 (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: Fault(-1)
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 38 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

38 Control macros

Motor potentiometer macro

This macro provides a way to adjust the speed with the help of two push buttons, or a
cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital
signals.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter
96.04 Macro select to value Motor potentiometer.
For more information on the motor potentiometer counter, see section Motor
potentiometer on page115.
ACS180 [Link] Page 39 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 39

 Default control connections for the Motor potentiometer macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Start / Stop
9 DI2 Forward / Reverse
10 DI3 Speed reference up1)
11 DI4 Speed reference down1)
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
14 AI1/DI5 Constant speed selection 1(DI5)2), 4)
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Not used 4)
0D[RKP 16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20mA)4)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
3)
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
Safe torque off (STO)
1 S+
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected
3 S1 at the factory. Drive starts only when
4 S2 both circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

Notes:
1)
When the input signal is on, the speed/frequency increase or decrease along a
parameter-defined change rate. See parameters22.75, 22.76, and 22.77. If DI3 and
DI4 are both active or inactive, the frequency/speed reference is unchanged. The
existing frequency/speed reference is stored during stop and power down.
2) In scalar control (default): See parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain.

In vector control: See parameter group 23 Speed reference ramp.

ACS180 [Link] Page 40 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

40 Control macros

Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04
Motor control mode.

AI1/DI5 Operation/Parameter
Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1
1 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1

3)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on
the grounding shelf for the control cables.
4) Selectvoltage or current for inputs AI1 and AI2 and output AO with parameters
12.15, 12.25 and 13.15, respectively.

Input signals
• Constant speed selection 1 (DI5)
• Not used (AI2)
• Start/stop selection (DI1)
• Forward/Reverse selection (DI2)
• Speed reference up (DI3)
• Speed reference down (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: Fault(-1)
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 41 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control macros 41

PID macro
This macro is suitable for applications where the drive is always controlled by PID
and the reference comes from analog input AI1.
You can activate the macro from the Control macros view, or by setting parameter
96.04 Macro select to value PID.

 Default control connections for PID control macro

Terminals Descriptions
Digital I/O connections
21 24 V Aux. +24 V DC, max 200 mA
22 DGND Aux. voltage output common
8 DI1 Start/Stop
9 DI2 Internal setpoint selection 11)
10 DI3 Internal setpoint selection 21)
11 DI4 Constant speed selection(1)2)
12 DCOM Digital input common
18 DO Running
19 DO COM Digital output common
20 DO SRC Digital output auxiliary voltage
Analog I/O
NRKP
14 AI1/DI5 PID set point(AI1, 0…10V)3),6)
13 AGND Analog input circuit common
15 AI2 Process feedback(4...20mA)4),6)
0D[RKP 16 AGND Analog output circuit common
17 AO Output frequency (0...20mA),6)
23 10V Ref. voltage +10 V DC
24 SCREEN Signal cable shield (screen)
Safe torque off (STO)
5) 1 S+
2 SGND Safe torque off function. Connected
3 S1 at the factory. Drive starts only when
4 S2 both circuits are closed.
Relay output
5 NC
6 COM No fault [Fault (-1)]
7 NO
EIA-485 Modbus RTU
25 B+
26 A-
27 AGND Embedded Modbus RTU (EIA-485)
28 SHIELD
Termination

Terminal sizes: 0.5 mm² … 1 mm²

ACS180 [Link] Page 42 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

42 Control macros

Notes:
1)
See parameters 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1and 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint
sel2 source table.
Source defined Source defined
by par. 40.19 by par. 40.20 Internal setpoint active
DI2 DI3
0 0 Setpoint source: AI1 (par.40.16)
1 0 Internal setpoint 1 (par. 40.21)
0 1 Internal setpoint 2 (par. 40.22)
1 1 Internal setpoint 3 (par.40.23)

2)
Select the correct control mode from the Motor data view or with parameter 99.04
Motor control mode.
DI4 Operation/Parameter
Scalar control (default) Vector control
0 Set frequency through AI1 Set speed through AI1
1 28.26 Constant frequency 1 22.26 Constant speed 1

3)
PID: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint.
4)
The signal source is powered externally. See the manufacturer’s instructions. To
use sensors supplied by the drive aux. voltage output, see connection examples of
two-wire and three-wire sensors in the hardware manual of the drive.
5)
Ground the outer shield of the cable 360 degrees under the grounding clamp on
the grounding shelf for the control cables.
6) Select
the unit for analog input AI1 in the parameter 12.15 and for AI2 in the
parameter 12.25.

Input signals
• PID set point (AI1)
• Process feedback (AI2)
• Start/stop selection (DI1)
• Internal setpoint selection 1 (DI2)
• Internal setpoint selection 2 (DI3)
• Constant speed selection 1 (DI4)

Output signals
• Digital output: Running
• Relay output: Fault(-1)
• Analog output AO: Output frequency
ACS180 [Link] Page 43 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 43

5
Program features
What this chapter contains
• Local and external control locations
• Operating modes of the drive
• Drive configuration and programming
• Control interfaces
• Motor control
• Application control
• DC voltage control
• Safety and protections
• Diagnostics
• Miscellaneous
ACS180 [Link] Page 44 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

44 Program features

Local and external control locations

There are two main control locations: local and external. Select the control by
pressing the Loc/Rem key on the panels, or from the Drive composer PC tool.

Drive
External control

PLC
Local control I/O (= Programmable
logic controller)

Embedded fieldbus
interface

Integrated panel, Assistant

control panel (optional) or Drive
composer PC tool (optional)

M
3~
MOTOR

 Local control
The control commands are given from the integrated/external control panel or from a
PC equipped with Drive composer when the drive is in local control. Local control is
mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The control panel always
overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control.
Changing the control location to local can be prevented by parameter 19.17.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 19.16 Local control mode, 19.17 Local control disable and 49.05
Communication loss action.
Events: -

 External control
When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through:
• the I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs)
• the fieldbus interface (via the embedded fieldbus interface)
• external panel (assistant/basic panel).
ACS180 [Link] Page 45 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 45

Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. You can select the
sources of the start and stop commands separately for each location by setting
parameters 20.01...20.10. The operating mode can be selected separately for each
location, which enables quick switching between different operating modes, for
example speed and torque control. Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is done via
any binary source such as a digital input or fieldbus control word by a parameter
19.11. You can also select the source of reference for each operating mode
separately.
Events: -

Block diagram: Run enable source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for run enable for
external control location EXT1.

Off Select
0
Selected
1
DI1 DI1
EXT1
DI5 Run enable
DI5

EFB MCW bit 3

Embedded fieldbus 20.12
Supervision 1…6
Supervision
Other [bit]
A bit in a parameter

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection and 20.01…20.10.
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 46 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

46 Program features

Operating modes of the drive

The drive can operate in several operating modes with different types of reference.
The operating mode is selectable for each control location (Local, EXT1 and EXT2)
when the motor control mode is Vector (99.04). If the motor control mode is Scalar,
the drive operation mode is fixed to frequency control mode.
An overview of the control hierarchy and different reference types and control chains
is shown below.

Process PID

Torque reference Speed reference Frequency reference

Parameter group 26 Refer to group 22 Speed Refer to group 28
Torque reference chain reference selection Frequency reference chain

Vector motor control mode Scalar motor control mode

Torque controller Frequency controller

 Speed control mode

In speed control mode, the motor follows a speed reference given to the drive.
Speed control mode is available in both local and external control locations. It is
supported in vector motor control only.
Speed control uses speed reference chain.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group: 22 Speed reference selection
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 47 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 47

 Torque control mode

In torque control mode, the motor torque follows a torque reference given to the drive.
Torque control mode is available in both local and external control locations. It is
supported in vector motor control only.
Torque control uses torque reference chain.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group: 26 Torque reference chain
Events: -

 Frequency control mode

In frequency control mode, the motor follows the drive output frequency reference.
Frequency control is available in both local and external control location. It is
supported in scalar motor control only.
Frequency control uses frequency reference chain.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group: 28 Frequency reference chain (page 201)
Events: -

 Special control modes

In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, the following special operating
modes are available:
• Process PID control. For more information, see section Process PID control on
page 86.
• Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3: Drive stops along the defined
deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops.
• Jogging mode: Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the
jogging signal is activated. For more information, see section Jogging on page 74.
• Pre-magnetization: DC magnetization of the motor before start. For more
information, see section Pre-magnetization on page 82.
• DC hold: Locking the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of normal operation.
For more information, see section DC hold on page 82.
• Pre-heating (motor heating): Keeping the motor warm when the drive is stopped.
For more information, see section Pre-heating (Motor heating) on page 83.

 Settings and diagnostics

Parameter groups: 06 Control and status words, 20 Start/stop/direction, 22 Speed
reference selection, 23 Speed reference ramp and 40 Process PID set 1.
ACS180 [Link] Page 48 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

48 Program features

Events: -

Drive configuration and programming

The drive control program is divided into two parts:
• firmware program
• application program
Drive control program

Application program Firmware

Function block Speed control

Torque control
program Frequency control
Drive logic
Parameter
interface
I/O interface
Fieldbus interface
M
Standard block Protections
library

The firmware program performs the main control functions, including speed, torque
and frequency control, drive logic (start/stop), I/O, feedback, communication and
protection functions. Firmware functions are configured and programmed with
parameters.

 Programming via parameters

ACS180 has two parameter list mode: short or long list mode. By default, ACS180
only show short parameter list which includes basic functions. In order to show full
parameter list, enter password "2" into parameter 96.02 Pass code.
Parameters configure all of the standard drive operations and can be set via
• the integrated panel, as described in chapter Control panel
• an external panel
• the Drive composer PC tool, as described in Drive composer PC tool user’s
manual (3AUA0000094606 [English]), or
• the fieldbus interface, as described in chapters Fieldbus control through the
embedded fieldbus interface (EFB).
All parameter settings are stored automatically to the permanent memory of the drive,
except the parameters which are modified by fieldbus.
ACS180 [Link] Page 49 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 49

If necessary, the default parameter values can be restored by parameter 96.06

Parameter restore.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters: 96.06 Parameter restore...96.07 Parameter save manually.
Events: -

Control interfaces
 Programmable analog inputs
There are two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can be independently
set as a voltage (0/2…10 V) or current (0/4…20 mA) input by parameter. Each input
can be filtered, inverted and scaled. AI1 can be configured as DI5 by parameter.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 12 Standard AI and 11.21 DI5 configuration.
Events: -

 Programmable analog outputs

There is one analog output voltage (0/2…10 V) or current (0/4…20 mA) output (can
be set by parameter). The output can be filtered, inverted and scaled.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 13 Standard AO.
Events: -

 Programmable digital inputs and outputs

There are four digital inputs, and one digital outputs. In addition, the analog input AI1
can be configured as digital input DI5 by a parameter.
Digital inputs DI3 and DI4 can be used as frequency input.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter groups 10 Standard DI, RO and 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO.
Events: -

 Programmable relay outputs

There is one relay output. The signal indicated by the output can be selected by a
parameter.
ACS180 [Link] Page 50 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

50 Program features

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 10.22...10.24 RO1 source.
Events: -

 Fieldbus control
The drive can be connected to an automation systems through its fieldbus interface.
See chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB).

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 58 Embedded fieldbus.
Events: -

Motor control
 Motor types
The drive supports the following motor types:
• Asynchronous AC induction motors
• Permanent magnet (PM) motors
Settings and diagnostics
Parameter 99.03 Motor type.
Events: -

 Motor identification
In scalar motor control mode (99.04), the drive performs no motor identification. The
performance of vector control is based on an accurate motor model determined
during the motor start-up.
A motor Identification magnetization is automatically performed the first time the start
command is given. During this first start-up, the motor is magnetized at zero speed
for several seconds to allow the motor model to be created. This identification method
is suitable for most applications in vector control mode.
In demanding applications a separate Identification run (ID run) can be performed.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 99.13 ID run requested (page 309).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 51 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 51

 Scalar motor control

Scalar motor control is the default motor control method. It is suitable for applications
which do not require the control accuracy available in vector control. In scalar control,
you control the drive output frequency reference, and you do not need to do any
motor identification at the first start.
ABB also recommends to activate scalar motor control mode in the following special
situations:
• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
motor identification (ID run)
• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
Note: Do not activate the motor phase loss fault (31.19 Motor phase loss) as the
drive cannot measure the motor current accurately.
• If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example, for test purposes)
• If the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up transformer.
In scalar control, some features are not available.
See also section Operating modes of the drive on page 62.

IR compensation for scalar motor control

IR compensation (also known as
Motor voltage
voltage boost) is available only when
the motor control mode is scalar. When
IR compensation
IR compensation is activated, the drive
gives an extra voltage boost to the
motor at low speeds. IR compensation
is useful in applications that require a
high break-away torque. No compensation
In vector control, no IR compensation is
f (Hz)
possible or needed as it is applied
automatically.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 28 Frequency reference chain (page 201).
Paramters 97.13 IR compensation (page 302) and 99.04 Motor control mode (page
306).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 52 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

52 Program features

 Vector control
Vector control is the motor control mode which is intended for applications where high
control accuracy is needed. It offers better control over the whole speed range, in
particular in applications where slow speed with high torque is needed. It requires a
motor identification at startup. Vector control cannot be used in all applications, e.g.
there are multiple motors connected to single drive.
The switching of the output semiconductors is controlled to achieve the required
stator flux and motor torque.
Motor control requires measurement of the DC voltage and two motor phase
currents. Stator flux is calculated by integrating the motor voltage in vector space.
Motor torque is calculated as a cross product of the stator flux and the rotor current.
By utilizing the identified motor model, the stator flux estimate is improved. Actual
motor shaft speed is not needed for the motor control.
The best motor control accuracy is achieved by activating a separate motor
identification run (ID run).
See also section Speed control performance figures on page 78.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 99.04 Motor control mode (page 306) and 99.13 ID run requested (page
309).
Events: -

 Reference ramping
Acceleration and deceleration ramping times can be set individually for speed, torque
and frequency reference.
With a speed or frequency reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for
the drive to accelerate or decelerate between zero speed or frequency and the value
defined by parameter (46.01 or 46.02). The user can switch between two preset ramp
sets using a binary source such as a digital input. For speed reference, also the
shape of the ramp can be controlled.
With a torque reference, the ramps are defined as the time it takes for the reference
to change between zero and nominal motor torque (01.30).

Special acceleration/deceleration ramps

The acceleration/deceleration times for the jogging function can be defined
separately; see section Jogging on page 74.
The change rate of the motor potentiometer function (page 115) is adjustable. The
same rate applies in both directions.
A deceleration ramp can be defined for emergency stop (“Off3” mode).
ACS180 [Link] Page 53 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 53

Settings and diagnostics

• Speed reference ramping - Parameters 23.11…23.15, 23.32 Shape time 1, 23.33
Shape time 2 and 46.01 Speed scaling.
• Torque reference ramping - Parameters 01.30 Nominal torque scale, 26.18
Torque ramp up time and 26.19 Torque ramp down time.
• Frequency reference ramping - Parameters 28.71…28.75 and 46.02 Frequency
scaling.
• Jogging - Parameters 23.20 Acc time jogging and 23.21 Dec time jogging.
• Motor potentiometer - Parameter 22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time.
• Emergency stop (“Off3” mode) - Parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time.
Events: -

 Constant speeds/frequencies
Constant speeds and frequencies are predefined references that can be quickly
activated, for example, through digital inputs. It is possible to define up to 7 speeds
for speed control and 7 constant frequencies for frequency control.

WARNING! Speeds and frequencies override the normal reference

irrespective of where the reference is coming from.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter groups 22 Speed reference selection and 28 Frequency reference chain.
Events: -

 Critical speeds/frequencies
Critical speeds (sometimes called “skip speeds”) can be predefined for applications
where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of, for
example, mechanical resonance problems.
The critical speeds function prevents the reference from dwelling within a critical band
for extended times. When a changing reference enters a critical range, the output of
the function freezes until the reference exits the range. Any instant change in the
output is smoothed out by the ramping function further in the reference chain.
When the drive is limiting the allowed output speeds/frequencies, it limits to the
absolutely lowest critical speed (critical speed low or critical frequency low) when
accelerating from standstill, unless the speed reference is over the upper critical
speed/ frequency limit.
ACS180 [Link] Page 54 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

54 Program features

Example
A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm and 1180 to 1560 rpm. To make
the drive avoid these speed ranges,
• enable the critical speeds function by turning on bit 0 of parameter 22.51, and
• set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.

22.01 Speed ref unlimited (rpm)

(output of function)
1 Par. 22.52 = 540 rpm
2 Par. 22.53 = 690 rpm
1560
3 Par. 22.54 = 1180 rpm
1180
4 Par. 22.55 = 1560 rpm
690
540

1 2 3 4 22.87 Speed reference act 7 (rpm)

(input of function)

Settings and diagnostics

• Critical speeds - Parameters 22.51…22.57.
• Critical frequencies - Parameters 28.51…28.57.
• Function input (speed) - Parameter 22.01 Speed ref unlimited.
• Function output (speed) - Parameter 22.87 Speed reference act 7.
• Function input (frequency) - Parameter 28.96 Frequency ref act 7.
• Function output (frequency) - Parameter 28.97 Frequency ref unlimited.
Events: -

 Speed controller autotune

The speed controller of the drive can be automatically adjusted using the autotune
function. Autotuning is based on an estimation of the mechanical time constant
(inertia) of the motor and machine.
The autotune routine will run the motor through a series of acceleration/deceleration
cycles, the number of which can be adjusted by parameter 25.40. Higher values will
produce more accurate results, especially if the difference between initial and
maximum speeds is small.
The maximum torque reference used during autotuning will be the initial torque (that
is, torque when the routine is activated) plus 25.40, unless limited by the maximum
torque limit (parameter group 30 Limits) or the nominal motor torque (99 Motor data).
ACS180 [Link] Page 55 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 55

The calculated maximum speed during the routine is the initial speed (that is, speed
when the routine is activated) + 25.39, unless limited by parameter 30.12 or 99.09.
The diagram below shows the behavior of speed and torque during the autotune
routine. In this example, 25.40 is set to 2.

Initial torque + [25.38]

Initial torque

t
Initial speed + [25.39]

Initial speed

Notes:
• If the drive cannot produce the requested braking power during the routine, the
results will be based on the acceleration stages only, and not as accurate as with
full braking power.
• The motor will exceed the calculated maximum speed slightly at the end of each
acceleration stage.

Before activating the autotune routine

The prerequisites for performing the autotune routine are:
• The motor identification run (ID run) has been successfully completed
• Speed and torque limits (parameter group 30 Limits) have been set
• The drive has been started and is running in speed control mode.
After these conditions have been fulfilled, autotuning can be activated by parameter
25.33 (or the signal source selected by it).

Autotune modes
Autotuning can be performed in three different ways depending on the setting of
parameter 25.34. The selections Smooth, Normal and Tight define how the drive
torque reference should react to a speed reference step after tuning. The selection
Smooth will produce a slow but robust response; Tight will produce a fast response
ACS180 [Link] Page 56 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

56 Program features

but possibly too high gain values for some applications. The figure below shows
speed responses at a speed reference step (typically 1…20%).

n
%
nN

A B C D

t
A: Undercompensated
B: Normally tuned (autotuning)
C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D: Overcompensated speed controller

Autotune results
At the end of a successful autotune routine, its results are automatically transferred
into parameters
• 25.02 (proportional gain of the speed controller)
• 25.03 (integration time of the speed controller)
• 25.37 (mechanical time constant of the motor and machine).
Nevertheless, it is still possible to manually adjust the controller gain, integration time
and derivation time.
ACS180 [Link] Page 57 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 57

The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.

Derivative
acceleration
compensation

Proportional,
Speed integral + Torque
+ Error +
reference - value + reference

Derivative
Actual speed

Warning indications
A warning message AF90, will be generated if the autotune routine does not
complete successfully. See chapterFault tracing (page 347) for further information.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters groups: 25 Speed control (page 191), 30 Limits (page 213) and 99 Motor
data (page 306).
Parameters: 25.02 Speed proportional gain (page 192), 25.03 Speed integration
time (page 193), 25.33 Speed controller autotune…25.40 Autotune repeat times
(page 196), 30.12 Maximum speed (page 215) and 99.09 Motor nominal speed(page
308).
Events: AF90 Speed controller autotuning (page 491).

 Rush control
Rush control is automatically on when the operation mode is torque. In torque control,
the motor could potentially rush if the load were suddenly lost. The control program
ACS180 [Link] Page 58 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

58 Program features

has a rush control function that decreases the torque reference whenever the motor
speed exceeds the set minimum speed or maximum speed.

Motor speed
Overspeed trip level

31.30 Overspeed trip margin

30.12

0
Time
Rush control active
30.11

31.30 Overspeed trip margin

Overspeed trip level

The function is based on a PI controller. The program sets the proportional gain to
10.0 and integration time to 2.0 s.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 30.11 Minimum speed (page 215), 30.12 Maximum speed (page 215)
and 31.30 Overspeed trip margin (page 227).
Events: -

 Jogging
The jogging function enables the use of a momentary switch to briefly rotate the
motor. The jogging function is typically used during servicing or commissioning to
control the machinery locally.
Two jogging functions (1 and 2) are available, each with their own activation sources
and references. The signal sources are selected by parameters 20.26 and 20.27.
When jogging is activated, the drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging
speed along the defined jogging acceleration ramp. After the activation signal
switches off, the drive decelerates to a stop along the defined jogging deceleration
ramp.
The figure and table below provide an example of how the drive operates during
jogging. In the example, the ramp stop mode is used (21.03 Stop mode).
ACS180 [Link] Page 59 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 59

Jog cmd = State of source set by 20.26 or 20.27

Jog enable = State of source set by 20.25
Start cmd = State of drive start command.

Jog cmd

Jog enable

Start cmd

Speed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 t

Jog Jog Start

Phase Description
cmd enable cmd
1-2 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
2-3 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
3-4 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
4-5 0 1 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
6-7 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
7-8 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
8-9 0 1->0 0 Drive is stopped. As long as the jog enable signal is on, start
commands are ignored. After jog enable switches off, a fresh
start command is required.
9-10 x 0 1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected
acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15).
10-11 x 0 1 Drive follows the speed reference.
11-12 x 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the selected
deceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15).
12-13 x 0 0 Drive is stopped.
13-14 x 0 1 Drive accelerates to the speed reference along the selected
acceleration ramp (parameters 23.11…23.15).
ACS180 [Link] Page 60 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

60 Program features

Phase Jog Jog Start Description

cmd enable cmd
14-15 x 0->1 1 Drive follows the speed reference. As long as the start
command is on, the jog enable signal is ignored. If the jog
enable signal is on when the start command switches off,
jogging is enabled immediately.
15-16 0->1 1 0 Start command switches off. The drive starts to decelerate
along the selected deceleration ramp (parameters
23.11…23.15).
When the jog command switches on, the decelerating drive
adopts the deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
16-17 1 1 0 Drive follows the jog reference.
17-18 0 1->0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.

Notes:
• Jogging is not available when the drive is in local control.
• Jogging cannot be enabled when the drive start command is on, or the drive
started when jogging is enabled. Starting the drive after the jog enable switches
off requires a fresh start command.

WARNING! If jogging is enabled and activated while the start command is on,
jogging will activate as soon as the start command switches off.

• If both jogging functions are activated, the one that was activated first has priority.
• Jogging function can only be used in Speed control mode.
• The inching functions activated through fieldbus (06.01 bits 8…9) use the
references and ramp times defined for jogging, but do not require the jog enable
signal.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 20.25 Jogging enable (page 166), 20.26 Jogging 1 start source (page
167), 20.27 Jogging 2 start source (page 167), 22.42 Jogging 1 ref (page 183), 22.43
Jogging 2 ref (page 183), 23.20 Acc time jogging (page 188), 23.21 Dec time jogging
(page 188), 28.42 Jogging 1 frequency ref (page 208), and 28.43 Jogging 2
frequency ref(page 208).
Events: -

 Autophasing
Autophasing is an automatic measurement routine to determine the angular position
of the magnetic flux of a permanent magnet synchronous motor. The motor control
ACS180 [Link] Page 61 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 61

requires the absolute position of the rotor flux in order to control motor torque
accurately.
The autophasing routine is performed at every start.
Note: The motor always turns when it is started as the shaft is turned towards the
remanence flux.
Bit 4 of 06.21 Drive status word 3 indicates if the rotor position has already been
determined.

Autophasing modes
ACS180 uses turning mode of Autophasing.
The turning mode is the most robust and accurate method. In turning mode, the
motor shaft is turned only in one direction and the angle is small.
The drive is capable of determining the rotor position when started into a running
motor.
An autophasing fault (3385 Autophasing) could be caused by, for example, the
following:
• The motor is already turning before the autophasing routine is started
• The motor shaft is locked
• The wrong motor type is selected in 99.03 Motor type
• Motor ID run has failed.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 06.21 Drive status word 3 and 99.13 ID run requested.
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 62 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

62 Program features

 Speed control performance figures

The table below shows typical performance figures for speed control.
T (%)
TN
Tload
100
Speed control Performance
Static accuracy 20% of motor
nominal slip
Dynamic accuracy < 1% s with 100% t (s)
torque step
nact-nref Area < 10% s
nN
TN = rated motor torque
nN = rated motor speed
nact = actual speed
nref = speed reference

 Torque control performance figures

The drive can perform precise torque control without any speed feedback from the
motor shaft. The table below shows typical performance figures for torque control.

T (%)
TN Tref
Torque control Performance 100
Tact
Non-linearity ± 5% with nominal 90
torque
(± 20% at the most
demanding operating
point)
Torque step rise time < 10 ms with nominal
torque

10 t (s)

< 5 ms
TN = rated motor torque
Tref = torque reference
Tact = actual torque
ACS180 [Link] Page 63 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 63

 User load curve

The User load curve provides a supervisory function that monitors an input signal as
a function of frequency or speed, and load. It shows the status of the monitored signal
and can give a warning or fault based on the violation of a user defined profile.
The user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve, or just one of
them. Each curve is formed by five points that represent the monitored signal as a
function of frequency or speed.
In the example below, the user load curve is constructed from the motor nominal
torque to which a 10% margin is added and subtracted. The margin curves define a
working envelope for the motor so that excursions outside the envelope can be
supervised, timed and detected.

Motor torque / Nominal torque

1.2

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2
1
2
0.0 3

-0.2
0 10 20 30 40 50
Output frequency (Hz)
1 = Overload curve (five points)
2 = Nominal process load curve
3 = Underload curve (five points)

An overload warning and/or fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays
continuously over the overload curve for a defined time. An underload warning and/or
fault can be set to occur if the monitored signal stays continuously under the
underload for a defined time.
Overload can be for example used to monitor for a saw blade hitting a knot or fan
load profiles becoming too high.
Underload can be for example used to monitor for load dropping and breaking of
conveyer belts or fan belts.
ACS180 [Link] Page 64 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

64 Program features

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 37 User load curve.
Events: A8BE ULC overload warning, A8BF ULC underload warning, 8001 ULC
underload fault, 8002 ULC overload faul

 U/f ratio
The U/f function is only available in scalar motor control mode, which uses frequency
control.
The function has two modes: linear and squared.
In linear mode, the ratio of voltage to frequency is constant below the field weakening
point. This is used in constant torque applications where it may be necessary to
produce torque at or near the rated torque of the motor throughout the frequency
range
In squared mode, the ratio of the voltage to frequency increases as the square of the
frequency below the field weakening point. This is typically used in centrifugal pump
or fan applications. For these applications, the torque required follows the square
relationship with frequency. Therefore, if the voltage is varied using the square
relationship, the motor operates at improved efficiency and lower noise levels in
these applications.
The U/f function cannot be used with energy optimization; if parameter 45.11 Energy
optimizer is set to Enable, parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is ignored.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 97.20 U/F ratio (page 303).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 65 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 65

 Flux braking
The drive can provide greater deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the
motor. By increasing the motor flux, the energy generated by the motor during
braking can be converted to motor thermal energy.

Motor TBr
(%) TBr = Braking torque
speed
= 100 Nm
No flux braking 60

40 Flux braking

20
Flux braking No flux braking
t (s) f (Hz)

The drive monitors the motor status continuously, also during flux braking. Therefore,
flux braking can be used both for stopping the motor and for changing the speed. The
other benefits of flux braking are:
• The braking starts immediately after a stop command is given. The function does
not need to wait for the flux reduction before it can start the braking.
• The cooling of the induction motor is efficient. The stator current of the motor
increases during flux braking, not the rotor current. The stator cools much more
efficiently than the rotor.
• Flux braking can be used with induction motors and permanent magnet motors.
Two braking power levels are available:
• Moderate braking provides faster deceleration compared to a situation where flux
braking is disabled. The flux level of the motor is limited to prevent excessive
heating of the motor.
• Full braking exploits almost all available current to convert the mechanical braking
energy to motor thermal energy. Braking time is shorter compared to moderate
braking. In cyclic use, motor heating may be significant.

WARNING! The motor needs to be rated to absorb the thermal energy

generated by flux braking.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 97.05 Flux braking (page 301).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 66 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

66 Program features

 DC magnetization
The drive has different magnetization functions for different phases of motor
start/rotation/stop: pre-magnetization, DC hold, post-magnetization and pre-heating
(motor heating).

Pre-magnetization
Pre-magnetization refers to DC magnetization of the motor before start. Depending
on the selected start mode (vector or scalar) pre-magnetization can be applied to
guarantee the highest possible breakaway torque, up to 200% of the nominal torque
of the motor. By adjusting the pre-magnetization time, it is possible to synchronize the
motor start and, for example, the release of a mechanical brake.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 21.01 Start mode (page 168), 21.19 Scalar start mode (page 173) and
21.02 Magnetization time (page 169).
Events: -

DC hold
The function makes it possible to lock the rotor at (near) zero speed in the middle of
normal operation. DC hold is activated by parameter 21.08. When both the reference
and motor speed drop below a certain level, the drive will stop generating sinusoidal
current and start to inject DC into the motor. The current is set by parameter 21.10.
When the reference exceeds parameter 21.09, normal drive operation continues.

Motor speed DC hold

Reference
t

21.09 DC hold speed

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 21.08 DC current control (page 172), 21.09 DC hold speed (page 172)
and 21.10 DC current reference (page 172).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 67 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 67

Post-magnetization
The function keeps the motor magnetized for a certain period after stopping. This is to
prevent the machinery from moving under load, for example before a mechanical
brake can be applied. Post-magnetization is activated by parameter 21.08. The
magnetization current is set by parameter 21.10.
Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected stop mode.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 21.01 Start mode (page 168), 21.02 Magnetization time (page 169),
21.03 Stop mode (page 169), 21.08 DC current control (page 172), 21.09 DC hold
speed (page 172) and 21.11 Post magnetization time (page 172).
Events: -

Pre-heating (Motor heating)

The pre-heating function keeps the motor warm and prevents condensation inside the
motor by feeding it with DC current when the drive has been stopped. The heating
can only be activated when the drive is in the stopped state, and starting the drive
stops the heating.
When pre-heating is activated and the stop command is given, pre-heating starts
immediately if the drive is running below the zero speed limit (see bit 0 in parameter
06.19 Speed control status word). If the drive is running above the zero speed limit,
pre-heating is delayed by the time defined by parameter 21.15 Pre-heating time delay
to prevent excessive current.
The function can be defined to be always active when the drive is stopped or it can be
activated by a digital input, fieldbus or supervision function. For example, with the
help of signal supervision function, the heating can be activated by a thermal
measurement signal from the motor.
The pre-heating current fed to the motor can be defined as 0…30% of the nominal
motor current.
Notes:
• In applications where the motor keeps rotating for a long time after the modulation
is stopped, it is recommended to use ramp stop with pre-heating to prevent a
sudden pull at the rotor when the pre-heating is activated.
• The heating function requires that STO is not triggered.
• The heating function requires that the drive is not faulted.
• Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 21.14 Pre-heating input source (page 172), 21.15 Pre-heating time delay
and 21.16 Pre-heating current (page 173).
ACS180 [Link] Page 68 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

68 Program features

Events: -

 Energy optimization
The Energy optimization function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy
consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the
nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1…20%
depending on load torque and speed.
Note: With a permanent magnet motor, energy optimization is always enabled.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 45.11 Energy optimizer (page 271).
Events: -

 Switching frequency
The drive has two switching frequencies: reference switching frequency and
minimum switching frequency. The drive tries to keep the highest allowed switching
frequency (= reference switching frequency) if thermally possible, and then adjusts
dynamically between the reference and minimum switching frequencies depending
on the drive temperature. When the drive reaches the minimum switching frequency
(= lowest allowed switching frequency), it starts to limit output current as the heating
up continues.
For derating, see the hardware manual of the drive.
Example 1: If you need to fix the switching frequency to a certain value as with some
external filters, e.g. with EMC C1 filters (see the hardware manual), set both the
reference and the minimum switching frequency to this value and the drive will retain
this switching frequency.
Example 2: If the reference switching frequency is set to 12 kHz and the minimum
switching frequency is set to 1.5 kHz (or 1 kHz), the drive maintains the highest
possible switching frequency to reduce motor noise and only when the drive heats it
will decrease the switching frequency. This is useful, for example, in applications
where low noise is necessary but higher noise can be tolerated when the full output
current is needed.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 97.01 Switching frequency reference (page 300) and 97.02 Minimum
switching frequency (page 300).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 69 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 69

 Speed compensated stop

Speed compensation stop is available for example for applications where a conveyer
needs to travel a certain distance after receiving the stop command. At maximum
speed, the motor is stopped normally along the defined deceleration ramp, after the
application of a user defined delay to adjust the distance traveled. Below maximum
speed, stop is delayed still more by running the drive at current speed before the
motor is ramped to a stop. As shown in the figure, the distance traveled after the stop
command is the same in both cases, that is, area A + area B equals area C.

Motor speed D1 = Delay defined by parameter

21.31
Stop
command D2 = Additional delay calculated by
Max. speed compensated stop
speed
D1

A B Area A + Area B = Area C

Used
speed
D2
C

t (s)

Speed compensation does not take into account shape times (parameters 23.32
Shape time 1 and 23.33 Shape time 2). Positive shape times lengthen the distance
traveled.
ACS180 [Link] Page 70 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

70 Program features

Speed compensation can be restricted to forward or reverse rotating direction. Speed

compensation is supported in both vector and scalar motor control.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 21.30 Speed compensated stop mode (page 175), 21.31 Speed comp
stop delay (page 176) and 21.32 Speed comp stop threshold (page 176).
Events: -

Application control
 Control macros
Control macros are predefined parameter edits and I/O configurations. See chapter
Control macros.

 Process PID control

There is a built-in process PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to
control process such as pressure or flow in the pipe or fluid level in the container.
In process PID control, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive
instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought
back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep
the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (setpoint). This
means that user does not need to set a frequency/speed/torque reference to the drive
but the drive adjust its operation according to the process PID.
The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control.

Setpoint
Limitation
Process Speed, torque or
Filter PID frequency
reference chain
AI1
Process
AI2 actual
••• values
FBA

The drive contains two complete sets of process PID controller settings that can be
alternated whenever necessary; see parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2 selection.
ACS180 [Link] Page 71 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 71

Note: Process PID control is only available in external control; see section Local and
external control locations on page 60.

Sleep and boost functions for process PID control

The sleep function is suitable for PID control applications where the consumption
varies, such as clean water pumping systems. When used, it stops the pump
completely during low demand, instead of running the pump slowly below its efficient
operating range. The following example visualizes the operation of the function.
Example: The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption falls at
night. As a consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor speed.
However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal
pump at low speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep function detects
the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has
passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping
resumes when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wake-
up delay has passed.
The user can extend the PID sleep time by the boost functionality. The boost
functionality increases the process setpoint for a predetermined time before the drive
enters the sleep mode.
ACS180 [Link] Page 72 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

72 Program features

Setpoint Sleep boost time (40.45)

Sleep boost step (40.46)

Time
Actual value Wake-up delay
(40.48)
Non-inverted
(40.31 = Not inverted (Ref - Fbk))

Wake-up level
(Setpoint - Wake-up deviation [40.47])
Time
Actual value

Wake-up level
(Setpoint + Wake-up deviation [40.47])

Inverted (40.31 = Inverted (Fbk - Ref))

Time
Motor speed

tsd = Sleep delay (40.44) Sleep mode

t < tsd tsd

Sleep level
(40.43)

Time
STOP START
ACS180 [Link] Page 73 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 73

Tracking
In tracking mode, the PID block output is set directly to the value of parameter 40.50
(or 41.50).The internal I term of the PID controller is set so that no transient is allowed
to pass on to the output, so when the tracking mode is left, normal process control
operation can be resumed without a significant bump.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 96.04 Macro select (page 292).
Parameter groups 40 Process PID set 1(page 250) and 41 Process PID set 2 (page
265).
Events: -

 PID trim function

The PID trim function is used to maintain the set tension either by trimming the drive
main speed reference or torque reference (speed controller output).

WARNING! Make sure that the drive acceleration and deceleration time is set
to 0 when using the PID trim function. This is required to do quick tension
control by speed correction.

PID trim is implemented as one of the Process PID functions (parameter groups 40
Process PID set 1 and 41 Process PID set 2). Both PID set 1 and PID set 2 can be
used for this functionality.
The trimmed output is calculated from parameter40.01 Process PID output actual or
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. In most cases 40.01 Process PID output actual is
used. This is based on the selection in parameter40.56 Set 1 trim source (for process
PID set 1) or 41.56 Set 2 trim source (for process PID set 2). In most of the use
cases, the value of parameter 40.56 or 41.56 is set as PID output.
PID trim functionality in Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) is used in applications
where tension control of the material is essential. For example, auxiliary drives in
ACS180 [Link] Page 74 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

74 Program features

metal process industries, infeed and outfeed of rotogravure printing machines, and
surface winders.

Speed controlled conveyor line

Drive rollers (pull)

Tension measurement

The examples provided in this chapter are based on PID set 1. You can set the
desired values for the PID trim function parameters to get the expected result.
When PID trim is activated, bit 5 Trim mode is set to 1 in parameter 40.06 Process
PID status word.
See the speed, torque and frequency reference chains in chapter 10 Control chain
diagrams for more information on the PID trim addition to the respective reference
chains.
The following PID trim modes are available:
• Direct
• Proportional
• Combined.

Direct
The direct method is suitable when you need tension control at fixed rpm/line speed.
In this mode, the PID trim output (parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act) is
relative to the maximum speed (parameter 30.12 Maximum speed), torque (30.20
Maximum torque 1) or frequency (30.14 Maximum frequency). You can make the
selection with parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection.
The calculated trimmed output actual is the same throughout the speed range with
respect to the stable PID output.
The 40.05 Process PID trim output act value is calculated using the following formula:
Par40.01
Par40.05 =  ------------------------   Par30.12 or 30.20 or 30.14   Par40.55
100
ACS180 [Link] Page 75 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 75

The graph below shows the PID trim output in direct mode throughout the speed
range. A fixed trim speed reference is added throughout the speed range.

40.05 Process PID trim output act

40.55 Set 1 trim adjust

0 Drive speed reference

Note: In the above graph, it is assumed that the PID output is limited or stable at 100.
This is for clarity only. In real life scenarios, the PID output can vary based on the
setpoint and the actual value.
Example:
If:
parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed
parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output
parameter 30.12 Maximum speed = 1500 rpm
parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual= 100 (limited to 100)
parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 0.5,
then:
100
Par40.05 =  ----------  1500  0.5
 100
Par40.05 = 750

Proportional
The proportional method is suitable for applications where tension control is required
throughout the speed range but not near zero speed.
In this mode, the PID trim output actual (parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act
) is relative to the reference selected by parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer
and with 40.01 Process PID output actual or 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual.
It is recommended that the speed reference selected in 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref
pointer and the reference source in 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1are equal. This is required
to make the proportional mode active.
In most of the use cases, the process speed reference is connected in 40.53 Set 1
trimmed ref pointer. For example, if EXT1 control mode is used and the reference
ACS180 [Link] Page 76 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

76 Program features

source is AI scaled, then 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 and 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer
should be configured to AI1 scaled.
Parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act is calculated using the following
formula:
Par40.01
Par40.05 =  ------------------------  Par40.53  Par40.55
100
The below graph shows the PID trim output in proportional mode throughout the
speed range. Here, the trimmed output is directly proportional to the value of
parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.

40.05 Process PID trim output act

40.55 Set 1 trim adjust

0 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer

Note: In the above graph, it is assumed that the PID output is limited or stable at 100.
This is for understanding purpose only. In real case scenario, PID output can vary
based on the setpoint and actual.
Example:
If:
parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed
parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output
parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer = AI1 scaled
parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled
parameter 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500
parameter 12.12 AI1 scaled value= 750 (AI1 actual scaled value)
parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100)
parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 0.5,
then:
100
Par40.05 =  ----------  750  0.5
 100
Par40.05 = 375
ACS180 [Link] Page 77 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 77

At zero speed, the 40.05 Process PID trim output act value depends on both the
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust and 40.54 Set 1 trim mix parameter values. However,
adjusting 40.54 Set 1 trim mix near to zero speed will give quick correction.
Example:
If,
parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed
parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output
parameter 30.12 Maximum speed = 1500 rpm
parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer = AI1 scaled
parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled
parameter 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500
parameter 12.12 AI1 scaled value = 750 (AI1 actual scaled value)
parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100)
parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix = 0.1
parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 0.5
then
100
Par40.05 =  ----------  750  0.5
100
Par40.05 = 375

Combined
The combined mode is suitable for applications where the user needs to maintain
tension from zero speed to maximum speed. The combined mode is a combination of
direct and proportional modes. Here, the trim for zero speed is defined by parameter
40.54 Set 1 trim mix and the trim for speed greater than zero speed is defined by
parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. The trim value is directly proportional to the value
of parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer.
The process speed reference is connected in parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref
pointer. For example, if EXT1 control mode is used and the reference source is AI1
scaled, then 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 and 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer shall be
configured to AI1 scaled.
The 40.05 Process PID trim output act is calculated using the following formula:
ACS180 [Link] Page 78 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

78 Program features

The following graph shows the trim increase in combined mode.

40.05 Process PID trim output act

40.55 Set 1 trim adjust

40.54 Set 1 trim mix
Par 40.55
Par 40.54
0 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer

Note: In the above graph, it is assumed that the PID output is limited or stable at 100.
This is for clarity only. In real life scenarios, PID output can vary based on the setpoint
and actual.
At zero speed, the 40.05 Process PID trim output act value depends on both
parameters 40.54 Set 1 trim mixand 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. However, adjusting
40.54 Set 1 trim mixnear to zero speed will give quick correction.
Example:
If:
parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection = Speed
parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source = PID output
parameter 30.12 Maximum speed = 1500 rpm
parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer = AI1 scaled
parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 = AI1 scaled
parameter 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max = 1500
parameter 12.12 AI1 scaled value = 750 (AI1 actual scaled value)
parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual = 100 (limited to 100)
parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix = 0.1
parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust = 1
Then:
If 12.12 AI1 scaled value is 0:
Par40.05 = (100/100) x {(1500 × 0.1) + [(1 – 0.1) × 0]} × 1
Par40.05 = 150
If 12.12 AI1 scaled value is 750:
Par40.05 = (100/100) x {(1500 × 0.1) + [(1 – 0.1) × 750]} × 1
Par40.05 = 825
ACS180 [Link] Page 79 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 79

If 12.12 AI1 scaled value is 1500:

Par40.05 = (100/100) x {(1500 × 0.1) + [(1 – 0.1) × 1500]} × 1
Par40.05 = 1500

Pid trim auto connection

Parameter40.65 Trim auto connection activates the connection of PID trim output
actual (parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act) to the respective speed, torque
and frequency reference chains. The respective reference chains can be selected
with parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection (for PID set 1) or 40.52 Set 1 trim selection
(for PID set 2).
Parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is also taken into consideration while passing
the PID trimmed output actual (40.05 Process PID trim output act) to the speed,
torque and frequency reference chains. In scalar control mode, the speed trim and
torque trim values are zero and in vector control mode, the frequency trim value is
zero.

Speed trim connection

Speed trim is added at 23.02 Speed ref ramp output and 24.11 Speed correction and
the final speed reference after the trim addition is available in parameter 24.01 Used
speed reference.

23.02 Speed ref ramp output

24.01 Used speed reference

24.11 Speed correction

+
speed trim
ACS180 [Link] Page 80 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

80 Program features

Torque trim connection

Torque trim is added at 26.75 Torque reference act 5and the final torque reference
after the trim addition is available in parameter 26.76 Torque reference act 6.

26.75 Torque reference act 5

+ 26.76 Torque reference act 6

torque trim

Frequency trim connection

Frequency trim is added at 28.02 Frequency ref ramp out and the final frequency
reference is generated after the trim addition. At the moment, no parameter is
available to see the final frequency reference after adding frequency trim.

28.02 Frequency ref ramp out

+ final frequency reference

frequency trim

Note: PID trim output auto connection is disabled in the firmware when the drive is
stopped with the 21.04 Emergency stop mode value Ramp stop (Off1) or value Eme
ramp stop (Off3). In other words, PID trim output actual (40.05 Process PID trim
output act) will not be added to the respective speed, torque and frequency reference
chains during ramp stop or emergency stop.

 Mechanical brake control

A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered. The brake control logic observes
the settings of parameter group 44 Mechanical brake control as well as several
external signals, and moves between the states presented in the diagram on
page 97. The tables below the state diagram detail the states and transitions. The
timing diagram on page 99 shows an example of a close-open-close sequence.

Inputs of the brake control logic

The start command of the drive (bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1) is the main control
source of the brake control logic.
ACS180 [Link] Page 81 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 81

Outputs of the brake control logic

The mechanical brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status.
This bit should be selected as the source of a relay output (or a digital output) which is
then wired to the brake actuator through a relay. See the wiring example on page
100.
The brake control logic, in various states, will request the drive control logic to hold
the motor, or ramp down the speed. These requests are visible in parameter 44.01
Brake control status.

Brake state diagram

(from any state) (from any state)

1 2

BRAKE DISABLED BRAKE CLOSED BRAKE OPENING

3 BRAKE OPENING WAIT

6

10
4

BRAKE OPENING
DELAY

3
8 5

6
BRAKE CLOSING BRAKE OPEN

BRAKE CLOSING
DELAY

BRAKE CLOSING WAIT 6

9

State descriptions

State name Description

BRAKE DISABLED Brake control is disabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable = 0, and 44.01
Brake control status b4 = 0). The open signal is active (44.01 Brake control
status b0 = 1).
BRAKE OPENING: Brake has been requested to open. (44.01 Brake control status b2 = 1). Open
signal has been activated (44.01 Brake control status b0 is set). The load is
held in place by the speed control of the drive until 44.08 Brake open delay
elapses.
ACS180 [Link] Page 82 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

82 Program features

State name Description

BRAKE OPEN The brake is open (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). Hold request is removed
(44.01 Brake control status b2 = 0), and the drive is allowed to follow the
reference.
BRAKE CLOSING
BRAKE CLOSING WAIT Brake has been requested to close. The drive logic is requested to ramp down
the speed to a stop (44.01 Brake control status b3 = 1). The open signal is kept
active (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this
state until the motor speed is below 44.14 Brake close level.
BRAKE CLOSING DELAY Closing conditions have been met. The open signal is deactivated (44.01 Brake
control status b0 → 0). The ramp-down request is maintained (44.01 Brake
control status b3 = 1). The brake logic will remain in this state until 44.13 Brake
close delay has elapsed.
At this point, the logic proceeds to BRAKE CLOSED state.
BRAKE CLOSED The brake is closed (44.01 Brake control status b0 = 0). The drive is not
necessarily modulating.

State change conditions ( n )

1 Brake control disabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable → 0).
2 06.11 Main status word, bit 2 = 0.
3 Brake has been requested to open.
4 44.08 Brake open delay has elapsed.
5 Brake has been requested to close.
6 Motor speed is below closing speed 44.14 Brake close level.
7 44.13 Brake close delay has elapsed.
8 Brake has been requested to open.
9 Brake control enabled (parameter 44.06 Brake control enable → 1).
ACS180 [Link] Page 83 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 83

Timing diagram
The simplified timing diagram below illustrates the operation of the brake control
function. Refer to the state diagram above.

Start command
(06.16 b5)
Modulating (06.16 b6)
tmd
Ready ref (06.11 b2)

Speed reference
ncs

Brake control signal

(44.01 b0) tod

Hold stopped request

(44.01 b2)
Ramp to stopped
request (44.01 b3)

BRAKE BCW BCD BRAKE

State CLOSED BRAKE OPENING BRAKE OPEN CLOSED
BRAKE CLOSING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

tmd Motor magnetization delay

tod Brake open delay (parameter 44.08 Brake open delay)
ncs Brake close speed (parameter 44.14 Brake close level)
tcd Brake close delay (parameter 44.13 Brake close delay)
BCW BRAKE CLOSING WAIT
BCD BRAKE CLOSING DELAY
ACS180 [Link] Page 84 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

84 Program features

Wiring example
The figure below shows a brake control wiring example. The brake control hardware
and wiring is to be sourced and installed by the customer.

WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake
control function is integrated fulfills the personnel safety regulations. Note that
the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as
defined in IEC/EN 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the
European Machinery Directive and related harmonized standards. Thus, the
personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific
frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be
implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.

The brake is controlled by bit 0 of parameter 44.01 Brake control status. In this
example, parameter 10.24 RO1 source is set to Brake command (ie. bit 0 of 44.01
Brake control status).

Brake control Drive control unit

hardware

115/230 VAC
5 NC
6 COM
7 NO

Emergency
brake

Motor Mechanical brake

ACS180 [Link] Page 85 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 85

DC voltage control
 Overvoltage control
Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is typically needed when the motor is
in generating mode. The motor can generate when it decelerates or when the load
overhauls the motor shaft, causing the shaft to turn faster than the applied speed or
frequency. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit,
the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the generating torque when the
limit is reached. The overvoltage controller also increases any programmed
deceleration times if the limit is reached; to achieve shorter deceleration times, a
brake chopper and resistor may be required (ACS180 drives have no brake chopper
support).

 Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue
operation after the break if the main contactor (if present) remained closed.
Note: Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit (e.g.
UPS) to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.

Uinput power
TM fout UDC
(N·m) (Hz) (Vdc) UDC
160 80 520

120 60 390

fout
80 40 260

TM
40 20 130

t (s)
1.6 5.8 8 11.2 15.4

UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive,

fout = Output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque.
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage
drops to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input
power is switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but
the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
ACS180 [Link] Page 86 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

86 Program features

Implementing the undervoltage control (power loss ride-through)

Implement the undervoltage control function as follows:
• Check that the undervoltage control function of the drive is enabled with
parameter 30.31 Undervoltage control.
• Parameter 21.01 Start mode must be set to Automatic (in vector mode) or
parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode to Automatic (in scalar mode) to make flying
start (starting into a rotating motor) possible.
If the installation is equipped with a main contactor, prevent its tripping at the input
power break. For example, use a time delay relay (hold) in the contactor control
circuit.

WARNING! Make sure that the flying restart of the motor will not cause any
danger. If you are in doubt, do not implement the undervoltage control function.

 Voltage control and trip limits

The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative to the
supply voltage as well as drive/inverter type. The DC voltage (UDC) is approximately
1.41 times the line-to-line supply voltage, and is displayed by parameter 01.11 DC
voltage.
The following table shows the values of the selected DC voltage levels in volts. Note
that the absolute voltages vary according to drive/inverter type and AC supply voltage
range.
When adaptive voltage limit is enabled in parameter 95.02:
DC voltage level [V] 95.01 Supply Voltage
Supply voltage range Supply voltage Automatic /
See 95.01 Supply voltage.
[V] 180…415 range [V] 440…480 Not selected
Overvoltage fault limit 842 842 842
Overvoltage control limit 779 779 779
Overvoltage warning limit 745 745 745
0.85×1.41× par 95.03 0.85×1.41×par 95.03 0.85×1.41× par 95.03
Undervoltage warning limit
value 1) value 1) value 1)
0.85×1.41×440 = 527
0.85×1.41×180 = 455 2) 2)

0.78×1.41×par 95.03 0.78×1.41×par 95.03 0.78×1.41×par 95.03

Undervoltage control limit
value 1) value 1) value 1)
0.78×1.41×440 = 484
0.78×1.41×180 = 418 2) 2)

0.78×1.41×par 95.03 0.78×1.41×par 95.03 0.78×1.41×par 95.03

Charging relay closing limit
value 1) value 1) value 1)
0.78×1.41×440 = 484
0.78×1.41×180 = 418 2) 2)
ACS180 [Link] Page 87 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 87

DC voltage level [V] 95.01 Supply Voltage

Supply voltage range Supply voltage Automatic /
See 95.01 Supply voltage.
[V] 180…415 range [V] 440…480 Not selected
0.73×1.41×par 95.03 0.73×1.41 ×par 95.03 0.73×1.41×par 95.03
Charging relay opening limit
value 1) value 1) value 1)
0.73×1.41×440 = 453
0.73×1.41×180 = 391 2) 2)

DC voltage at upper bound of

560 648
supply voltage range (UDCmax)
DC voltage at lower bound of
513 594
supply voltage range (UDCmin)
0.73×1.41×par 95.03 0.73×1.41×par 95.03 0.73×1.41×par 95.03
Charging activation/standby limit
value 1) value 1) value 1)
0.73×1.41×440 = 453
0.73×1.41×180 = 391 2) 2)

0.45×1.41×par 95.03 0.45×1.41×par 95.03 0.45×1.41×par 95.03

Undervoltage fault limit 3)
value 1) value 1) value 1)
0.45×1.41×440 = 279
0.45×1.41×180 = 241 2) 2)

1)
If parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is set to Automatic / not selected and 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits is
set to Enable, the value of parameter 95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage is used, 2) otherwise the lower
limit of the range selected with parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is used.
3)
The system throws an undervoltage fault when parameter 21.18 (Auto restart time) elapses or the value
of parameter 21.18 is 0. In that case the standby limit is used as the undervoltage trip level. The system
throws the undervoltage fault only if the drive is modulating when the DC voltage drops below the
undervoltage trip level.
ACS180 [Link] Page 88 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

88 Program features

When adaptive voltage limit is disabled in parameter 95.02:

DC voltage level [V] 95.01 Supply Voltage
Supply voltage Supply voltage Automatic /
See 95.01 Supply voltage.
range [V] 180…415 range [V] 440…480 Not selected
if 95.03 if 95.03
< 456AC > 456AC
Overvoltage fault limit 842 842 842
Overvoltage control limit 779 779 779
Overvoltage warning limit 745 745 745
Undervoltage warning limit 0.85×1.35×440 = 0.85×1.35×180 0.85×1.35×440
0.85×1.35×180 = 436
504 = 436 = 505
0.78×1.35×440 = 0.78×1.35×180 0.78×1.35×440
Undervoltage control limit 0.78×1.35×180 =400
463 = 400 = 463
Charging relay closing limit 0.78×1.35×440 = 0.78×1.41×par
0.78×1.35×180 = 400
463 95.03 value 1)
0.73×1.41×par
Charging relay opening 0.73×1.41×par 95.03 0.78×1.41 ×par
95.03 value 1)
limit value 1) 95.03 value 1)

DC voltage at upper bound

of supply voltage range 560 648
(UDCmax)
DC voltage at lower bound
of supply voltage range 513 594
(UDCmin)
Charging 0.73×1.41×par 95.03 0.73×1.41×par 0.73×1.41×par
activation/standby limit value 1) 95.03 value 1) 95.03 value 1)
0.45×1.41×par 95.03 0.45×1.41×par 0.45×1.41×par
Undervoltage fault limit 3)
value 1) 95.03 value 1) 95.03 value 1)
1) If parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is set to Automatic / not selected and 95.02 Adaptive voltage limits
is set to Enable, the value of parameter 95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage is used, 2) otherwise the
lower limit of the range selected with parameter 95.01 Supply voltage is used.
3)
The drive trips on the undervoltage fault when parameter 21.18 (Auto restart time) elapses or the value
of parameter 21.18 is 0. In that case the standby limit is used as the undervoltage trip level. The
undervoltage fault occurs only if the drive is modulating when the DC voltage drops below the
undervoltage trip level.

 Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 01.11 DC voltage (page 124), 30.30 Overvoltage control (page 219),
30.31 Undervoltage control (page 219), 95.01 Supply voltage (page 289) and 95.02
Adaptive voltage limits (page 290).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 89 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 89

Safety and protections

 Fixed/Standard protections
Overcurrent
If the output current exceeds the internal overcurrent limit, the IGBTs are shut down
immediately to protect the drive.

DC overvoltage
See section Overvoltage control on page 101.

DC undervoltage
See section Undervoltage control (power loss ride-through) on page 101.

Drive temperature
If the temperature rises high enough, the drive first starts to limit the switching
frequency and then the current to protect itself. If it is still keeps heating up, for
example because of a fan failure, an overtemperature fault is generated.

Short circuit
In case of a short circuit, the IGBTs are shut down immediately to protect the drive.

Earth (Ground) fault detection

Note that
• an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection
• in a grounded supply, the protection activates within 2 milliseconds
• in an ungrounded supply, the supply capacitance must be 1 microfarad or more
• the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 meters will not
activate the protection
the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.

 Emergency stop
The emergency stop signal is connected to the input selected by parameter 21.05
Emergency stop source. An emergency stop can also be generated through fieldbus
(parameter 06.01 Main control word, bits 0…2).
ACS180 [Link] Page 90 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

90 Program features

The mode of the emergency stop is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop
mode. The following modes are available:
• Off1: Stop along the standard deceleration ramp defined for the particular
reference type in use
• Off2: Stop by coasting
• Off3: Stop by the emergency stop ramp defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency
stop time.
With Off1 or Off3 emergency stop modes, the ramp-down of the motor speed can be
supervised by parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33 Emergency
ramp supervision delay.
Notes:
• The installer of the equipment is responsible for installing the emergency stop
devices and all additional devices needed for the emergency stop function to fulfill
the required emergency stop categories.
• After an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function cannot
be canceled even though the signal is canceled.
• If the minimum (or maximum) torque limit is set to 0%, the emergency stop
function may not be able to stop the drive.
• During an emergency stop, the speed and torque reference parameters such as
reference ramp shapes (23.32 Shape time 1 and 23.33 Shape time 2) are not
considered.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 21.04 Emergency stop mode (page 169), 21.05 Emergency stop source
(page 170), 23.23 Emergency stop time (page 189), 31.32 Emergency ramp
supervision (page 228) and 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay (page 229).
Events: -

 Motor thermal protection

The control program features two separate motor temperature monitoring functions.
The temperature data sources and warning/trip limits can be set up independently for
each function.
The motor temperature can be monitored using
• the motor thermal protection model (estimated temperature derived internally
inside the drive), or
• sensors installed in the windings. This will result in a more accurate motor model.
The motor thermal protection model fulfills standard IEC/EN 61800-5-1 ed. 2.1
requirements for thermal memory retention and speed sensitivity. The estimated
temperature is retained over power down. Speed dependency is set by parameters.
ACS180 [Link] Page 91 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 91

Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to the
drive.

Motor thermal protection model

The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1. When power is applied to the drive for the first time, the motor is assumed to be at
ambient temperature (defined by parameter 35.50 Motor ambient temperature).
After this, when power is applied to the drive, the motor is assumed to be at the
estimated temperature.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using the user-adjustable motor thermal time and
motor load curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient
temperature exceeds 30 °C.
Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to
the inverter.

Sensor insulation and connection

One sensor Three sensors
AI1
AI1
Motor Motor GND
GND

AO AO
GND GND
3.3 nF 3.3 nF

One sensor Three sensors

AI1 AI1

GND GND

T T T T
AO AO

GND GND
ACS180 [Link] Page 92 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

92 Program features

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live

parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are
either non-conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.

To fulfill this requirement, connect a thermistor to the drive’s control terminals using
any of these alternatives:
• Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced
insulation.
• Protect all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog inputs. Protect
against contact, and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation
(rated for the same voltage level as the drive’s main circuit).
• Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be rated for the same
voltage level as the drive’s main circuit.

Temperature monitoring using Pt100 sensors

1…3 Pt100 sensors can be connected in series to an analog input and an analog
output.
The analog output feeds a constant excitation current of 9.1 mA through the sensor.
The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage
over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
the analog input and converts it into degrees Celsius.
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the
drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the sensor, see the Hardware manual of the drive.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection (page 237).
Events: -

 Automatic fault resets

The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage
and external faults. The user can also specify a fault that is automatically reset.
By default, automatic resets are off and must be specifically activated by the user.

WARNING! Before you activate the function, make sure that no dangerous
situations can occur. The function resets the drive automatically and continues
operation after a fault.
ACS180 [Link] Page 93 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 93

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 31.12…31.16.
Events: -

 Other programmable protection functions

External events (parameters 31.01…31.10)
Five different event signals from the process can be connected to selectable inputs to
generate trips and warnings for the driven equipment. When the signal is lost, an
external event (fault, warning, or a mere log entry) is generated.

Motor phase loss detection (parameter 31.19)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected.
The motor phase loss detection is enabled by default and displays fault 3381 Output
phase loss whenever the drive detects a phase loss. The motor phase loss detection
needs to be enabled or disabled based on the motor control mode and the nominal
current as follows:
• With the vector control, the motor phase loss detection is always on and there are
no operational limits.
• With the scalar control, the motor phase loss detection activates when the motor
frequency is above 10% of the motor nominal frequency. This limit cannot be
changed.
• With motors having nominal current below 1/6 of drive nominal current, the
supervision must be disabled as the drive cannot measure the motor current
accurately.

Safe torque off detection (Only on ACS180-04S-... type, parameter 31.22)

The drive monitors the status of the Safe torque off input, and this parameter selects
which indications are given when the signals are lost. (The parameter does not affect
the operation of the Safe torque off function itself). For more information on the Safe
torque off function, see the hardware manual of the drive.

Swapped supply and motor cabling (parameter 31.23)

The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been swapped
(for example, if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive). The
parameter selects if a fault is generated or not.

Stall protection (parameters 31.24…31.28)

The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (current, frequency and time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall
condition.
ACS180 [Link] Page 94 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

94 Program features

Overspeed protection (parameter 31.30)

The user can set overspeed (and overfrequency) limits by specifying a margin that is
added to the currently-used maximum and minimum speed (or frequency) limits.

Local control loss detection (parameter 49.05)

The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool
communication break.

AI supervision (parameters 12.03…12.04)

The parameters select how the drive reacts when an analog input signal moves out of
the minimum and/or maximum limits specified for the input.

Ramp stop supervision (parameters 31.32, 31.33, 31.37 and 31.38)

The control program has a supervision function for both the normal and emergency
stop ramps. The user can either define a maximum time for stopping, or a maximum
deviation from the expected deceleration rate. If the drive fails to stop in the expected
manner, a fault is generated and the drive coasts to a stop.

Custom motor current fault limit (parameter 31.30)

The control program sets a motor current limit based on drive hardware. In most
cases, the default value is appropriate. However, a lower limit can be manually set by
the user, for example, to protect a permanent magnet motor from demagnetization.
ACS180 [Link] Page 95 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 95

Diagnostics
 Fault and warning messages, data logging
See chapter Fault tracing (page 347).

 Signal supervision
Six signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever a supervised
signal exceeds or falls below predefined limits, a bit in 32.01 Supervision status is
activated, and a warning or fault generated.
The supervised signal is low-pass filtered.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 32 Supervision (page 230).
Events: -

 Energy saving calculators

This feature consists of the following functionalities:
• An energy optimizer that adjusts the motor flux in such a way that the total system
efficiency is maximized
• A counter that monitors used and saved energy by the motor and displays them in
kWh, currency or volume of CO2 emissions, and
• A load analyzer showing the load profile of the drive (see section Load analyzer
on page 111).

In addition, there are counters that show energy consumption in kWh of the current
and previous hour as well as the current and previous day.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the
accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.19 Comparison power.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 45 Energy efficiency (page 269).
Parameters 01.50 Current hour kWh (page 125), 01.51 Previous hour kWh (page
125), 01.52 Current day kWh (page 126) and 01.53 Previous day kWh (page 126).
Events: -

 Load analyzer
Peak value logger
The user can select a signal to be monitored by a peak value logger. The logger
records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as well as
ACS180 [Link] Page 96 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

96 Program features

motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak. The peak value is
sampled at 2 ms intervals.

Amplitude loggers
The control program has two amplitude loggers.
For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms
intervals, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are
sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their amplitude.
• Parameter 1 shows the share of samples that have fallen in range 0…10% of
the reference value during the time that the logging has been active.
• Parameter 2 shows that share of samples that have fallen in range 10…20%
of the reference value during the time that the logging has been active
• etc.
You can view this graphically with the assistant panel or the Drive composer PC tool.
share of all samples

0…10%

10…20%

20…30%

30…40%

40…50%

50…60%

60…70%

70…80%

80…90%

>90%

Amplitude ranges
(parameters 36.40…36.49)

Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With
amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the maximum output current of the drive
(Imax). The maximum output current values are listed in the section Ratings in the
Hardware manual of the drive. The measured current is logged continuously. The
distribution of samples is shown by parameters 36.20…36.29.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 36 Load analyzer (page 243).
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 97 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 97

Miscellaneous
 Backup and restore
You can make backups of the settings manually to the assistant panel. The panel also
keeps one automatic backup. You can restore a backup to another drive, or a new
drive replacing a faulty one. You can make backups and restore on the panel, or with
the Drive composer PC tool.
See the relevant assistant control panel for more information on backing up and
settings.

Backup

Manual backup
Make a backup when necessary, for example, after you have started up the drive or
when you want to copy the settings to another drive.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced
parameter saving.

Automatic backup
The assistant panel has space for one automatic backup. An automatic backup is
created two hours after the last parameter change. After completing the backup, the
panel waits for 24 hours before checking if there are additional parameter changes. If
there are, it creates a new backup overwriting the previous one when two hours have
passed after the latest change.
You cannot adjust the delay time or disable the automatic backup function.
Parameter changes from fieldbus interfaces are ignored unless you have forced
parameter saving.
Restore
The backups are shown on the panel. Automatic and manual backups are separately
marked.
Note: To restore a backup, the drive has to be in Local control.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter 96.07 Parameter save manually (page 294).
Events: -

 User parameter sets

The drive supports four user parameter sets that can be saved to the permanent
memory and recalled using drive parameters. It is also possible to use digital inputs to
ACS180 [Link] Page 98 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

98 Program features

switch between user parameter sets. To change a user parameter set, the drive has
to be stopped.
A user parameter set contains all editable values in parameter groups 10…99 except
Data storage parameters (47 Data storage).
As the motor settings are included in the user parameter sets, make sure the settings
correspond to the motor used in the application before recalling a user set. In an
application where different motors are used with the drive, the motor ID run needs to
be performed with each motor and the results saved to different user sets. The
appropriate set can then be recalled when the motor is switched.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 96.10…96.13.
Events: -

 Data storage parameters

Twelve (eight 32-bit, four 16-bit) parameters are reserved for data storage. These
parameters are unconnected by default and can be used for linking, testing and
commissioning purposes. They can be written to and read from using other
parameters’ source or target selections.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameter group 47 Data storage (page 277).
Events: -

 Parameter checksum calculation

Parameter checksums A and B can be calculated from a set of parameters to monitor
changes in the drive configuration. The parameter sets are different for A and B. Each
of the calculated checksum is compared to corresponding reference checksum. If a
mismatch occurs, the drive generates an event (a pure event, warning or fault). The
calculated checksum can be set as the new reference checksum.
The set of parameters for checksum A does not include fieldbus settings parameters.
The parameters included in the checksum A calculation are user editable parameters
in parameter groups 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 35, 36, 37, 40,
41, 45, 46, 71, 95, 96, 97, 98, and 99.
The set of parameters for checksum B does not include:
• fieldbus settings
• motor data settings, and
• energy data settings parameters.
ACS180 [Link] Page 99 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Program features 99

The parameters included in the checksum B calculation are user editable parameters
in parameter groups 10, 15, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 35, 36, 37, 40,
41, 46, 71, 95, 96, and 97.
Settings and diagnostics
Parameters 96.54…96.55, 96.68…96.69 and 96.71…96.72.
Events A686 Checksum mismatch (page 352), B686 Checksum mismatch (page
357) and 6200 Checksum mismatch (page 361).
Events: -

 Motor potentiometer
The motor potentiometer is a counter whose value can be adjusted up and down
using two digital signals selected by parameters.
When enabled, the motor potentiometer assumes a set value. Depending on the
mode selected, the motor potentiometer value is either retained or reset over a power
cycle.
The change rate is defined as the time it would take for the value to change from the
minimum to the maximum, or vice versa. If the up and down signals are
simultaneously on, the motor potentiometer value does not change.
The output of the function is shown, and it can be directly set as the reference source
in the main selector parameters, or used as an input by other source selector
parameters.
The following example shows the behavior of the motor potentiometer value.

1
22.73
0

1
22.74
0

22.77

22.80
0

22.76

22.75

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 22.71…22.80.
ACS180 [Link] Page 100 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

100 Program features

Events: -

 User lock
For better cybersecurity, you can set a master password to prevent eg. the changing
of parameter values and/or the loading of firmware and other files.

WARNING! ABB will not be liable for damages or losses caused by the failure
to activate the user lock using a new pass code. See Cybersecurity disclaimer
(page 30).

WARNING! Store the pass code in a safe place – the user lock cannot be
opened even by ABB if the pass code is lost.

To activate the user lock for the first time, enter the default pass code, 10000000, into
96.02 Pass code. This will make parameters 96.100…96.102 visible. Then enter a
new pass code into 96.100 Change user pass code, and confirm the code in 96.101
Confirm user pass code. In 96.102 User lock functionality, define the actions that you
want to prevent.
To close the user lock, enter an invalid pass code into 96.02 Pass code, activate
96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power. With the lock closed, parameters
96.100…96.102 are hidden.
To reopen the lock, enter your pass code into 96.02 Pass code. This will again make
parameters 96.100…96.102 visible.

Settings and diagnostics

Parameters 96.02 Pass code (page 292) and 96.100…96.102.
Events: -
ACS180 [Link] Page 101 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 101

6
Parameters
What this chapter contains
• Terms and abbreviations
• Fieldbus addresses
• Summary of parameter groups
• Long parameter listing
• Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply frequency
settings
ACS180 [Link] Page 102 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

102 Parameters

Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be
monitored but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be
reset.
Def The default is shown on the same row as the parameter name.
The default value of a parameter for the Factory macro. For information
on other macro-specific parameter values, see chapter Control macros.
FbEq16/32 The fieldbus equivalent for 16-bit and 32-bit. They are shown on the
same row as the parameter range, or for each selection.
A dash (-) indicates that the user cannot access the parameter in 16-bit
format.
32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the
panel and the integer used in communication when a 32-bit value is
selected for transmission to an external system.
Other The value is taken from another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can specify
the source parameter.
Other [bit] The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter. The user
selects the source from a parameter list.
Parameter Either a user-adjustable operating instruction for the drive, or an Actual
signal.
p.u. Per unit
[parameter number] Value of the parameter

Fieldbus addresses
Refer to Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB).
ACS180 [Link] Page 103 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 103

Summary of parameter groups

Group Contents Page
01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive. 124
03 Input references Values of references received from various sources. 127
04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last. 128
05 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to 130
drive maintenance.
06 Control and status words Drive control and status words. 133
07 System info Drive hardware and firmware information. 138
10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs. 139
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO Configuration of the digital input/outputs. 143
12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs. 147
13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs. 152
19 Operation mode Selection of local and external control location sources and 156
operating modes.
20 Start/stop/direction Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source 158
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal source
selection.
21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal source 168
selection; DC magnetization settings.
22 Speed reference selection Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings. 176
23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the acceleration 186
and deceleration rates for the drive).
24 Speed reference Speed error calculation; speed error window control configuration; 191
conditioning speed error step.
25 Speed control Speed controller settings. 191
26 Torque reference chain Settings for the torque reference chain. 197
28 Frequency reference chain Settings for the frequency reference chain. 201
30 Limits Drive operation limits. 213
31 Fault functions Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of the drive 221
upon fault situations.
32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…3. 230
35 Motor thermal protection Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature 237
measurement configuration, load curve definition and motor fan
control configuration.
36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings. 243
37 User load curve Settings for user load curve. 246
40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control. 250
41 Process PID set 2 A second set of parameter values for process PID control. 265
44 Mechanical brake control Configuration of mechanical brake control. 268
45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators. 269
46 Monitoring/scaling settings Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general scaling 273
settings.
47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from 277
using other parameters’ source and target settings.
49 Panel port communication Communication settings for the control panel port on the drive. 278
ACS180 [Link] Page 104 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

104 Parameters

Group Contents Page

58 Embedded fieldbus Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface. 280
71 External PID1 Configuration of external PID. 287
95 HW configuration Various hardware-related settings. 289
96 System Language selection; access levels; macro selection; parameter 291
save and restore; control unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit
selection; parameter checksum calculation; user lock.
97 Motor control Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux braking; anti- 300
cogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
98 User motor parameters Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor 304
model.
99 Motor data Motor configuration settings. 306

Short parameter listing

There are two parameter listings: Short and Long parameter listings.
The Short parameter listing shows common user parameters. The Long parameter
listing shows all user parameters including those in the Short parameter listing. The
default view is short listing. You can select the listing with parameter 96.02 Pass
code.
Input
Parameter Long and short listing selection
password
1 Short listing
96.02 password
2 Long listing

The following table lists the parameters that are visible in the Short parameter listing.
For full parameter descriptions, see the section Long parameter listing on page 124.
Par. No. Par. Name Settings/Range (default value on bold)
Group 99 Motor data
99.03 Motor type [0]Asynchronous motor, [1]Permanent magnet motor
99.04 Motor control mode [0]Vector, [1]Scalar
99.06 Motor nominal current depend on rating
99.07 Motor nominal voltage depend on rating
99.08 Motor nominal frequency depend on rating
99.09 Motor nominal speed depend on rating
99.10 Motor nominal power depend on rating
99.11 Motor nominal cos Φ 0.00 … 1.00
99.12 Motor nominal torque depend on rating
99.16 Motor phase order [0]UVW,[1]UWV
Group 01 Actual values (read-only)
1.01 Motor speed used -30000.00 … 30000.00 RPM
1.06 Output frequency -500.00 … 500.00 Hz
1.07 Motor current 0.00 … 30000.00 A
1.10 Motor torque -1600.00% … 1600.00%
ACS180 [Link] Page 105 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 105

Par. No. Par. Name Settings/Range (default value on bold)

1.11 DC voltage 0.00 … 2000.00 V
1.13 Output voltage 0 … 2000 V
1.14 Output power -32768.00 … 32767.00 kW
Group 5 Diagnostics (read-only)
5.02 Run-time counter 0 … 65535 days
5.11 Inverter temperature -40.0 … 160.0 %
Group 10 Standard DI, RO
10.24 RO1 source [2]Ready run, [7]Running, [14]Fault, [16]Fault/Warning
Group 11 Standard DI, RO
11.06 DO1 output source [2]Ready run, [7]Running, [14]Fault, [16]Fault/Warning
11.21 DI5 configuration [0]Digital input, [1]Analog input
Group 12 Standard AI
12.15 AI1 unit selection [2]V, [10]mA
12.17 AI1 min -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V, 0mA or 0V
12.18 AI1 max -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V, 20mA or 10V
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min -32768.000 … 32767.000, 0
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max -32768.000 … 32767.000, 50
12.25 AI2 unit selection [2]V, [10]mA
12.27 AI2 min -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V, 0mA or 0V
12.28 AI2 max -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V, 20mA or 10V
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min -32768.000 … 32767.000, 0
12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max -32768.000 … 32767.000, 50
Group 13 Standard AO
13.12 AO1 source [3]Output frequency, [4]Motor current
13.15 AO1 unit selection [2]V, [10]mA
13.17 AO1 source min -32768.000 … 32767.000, 0
13.18 AO1 source max -32768.000 … 32767.000, 50
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V, 0mA or 0V
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max -22.000 … 22.000 mA or V, 20mA or 10V
Group 19 Operation mode
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection [0]EXT1, [1]EXT2, [3]DI1, [4]DI2, [5]DI3, [6]DI4, [7]DI5,
[32]Embeded fieldbus
19.17 Local control disable [0]No, [1]Yes
Group 20 Start/stop/direction
20.01 Ext1 commands [0]Not selected, [1]In1 Start, [2]In1 Start;In2 Dir, [3]In1 Start
fwd;In2 Start rev, [4]In1P Start;In2 Stop,[5]In1P Start;In2 Stop;In3
Dir, [6]In1P Start fwd;In2P Start rev;In3 Stop, [14]Embeded
fieldbus
20.03 Ext1 in1 source [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
20.04 Ext1 in2 source [0]Always off,[2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
20.05 Ext1 in3 source [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
ACS180 [Link] Page 106 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

106 Parameters

Par. No. Par. Name Settings/Range (default value on bold)

20.06 Ext2 commands [0]Not selected, [1]In1 Start, [2]In1 Start;In2 Dir, [3]In1 Start
fwd;In2 Start rev, [4]In1P Start;In2 Stop,[5]In1P Start;In2 Stop;In3
Dir, [6]In1P Start fwd;In2P Start rev;In3 Stop, [14]Embeded
fieldbus
20.08 Ext2 in1 source [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
20.09 Ext2 in2 source [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
20.10 Ext2 in3 source [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
20.21 Direction [0]Request, [1]Forward, [2]Reverse
Group 21 Start/stop mode
21.01 Start mode [0]Fast, [1]Const time, [2]Automatic
21.02 Magnetization time 0 … 10000 ms, 500ms
21.03 Stop mode [0]Coast, [1]Ramp
21.19 Scalar start mode [0]Normal, [1]Const time, [2]Automatic, [3]Torque Boost,
[5]Flying start
Group 22 Speed reference selection
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 [1]AI1 scaled, [2]AI2 scaled, [8]EFB ref1, [9]EFB ref2, [16]PID
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 [0]Zero, [1]AI1 scaled, [2]AI2 scaled, [8]EFB ref1, [9]EFB ref2,
[16]PID
22.22 Constant speed sel1 [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
22.23 Constant speed sel2 [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
22.26 Constant speed 1 -30000.00 … 30000.00rpm, 300rpm
22.27 Constant speed 2 -30000.00 … 30000.00rpm, 600rpm
22.28 Constant speed 3 -30000.00 … 30000.00rpm, 900rpm
22.71 Motor potentiometer function [0]Disabled, [1]Enabled (init at stop/power-up), [2]Enabled
(resume always), [3]Enabled (init to actual)
22.72 Motor potentiometer initial -32768.00… 32767.00, 0.00
value
22.73 Motor potentiometer up [0]Not selected, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
source
22.74 Motor potentiometer down [0]Not selected, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
source
22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp 0.0…3600.0 s, 40.0s
time
22.76 Motor potentiometer min -32768.00… 32767.00, -50.00
value
22.77 Motor potentiometer max -32768.00… 32767.00, 50.00
value
Group 23 Speed reference ramp
23.12 Acceleration time 1 0.000 … 1800.000s, 3.000s
23.13 Deceleration time 1 0.000 … 1800.000s, 3.000s
Group 28 Frequency reference chain
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 [1]AI1 scaled, [2]AI2 scaled, [8]EFB ref1, [9]EFB ref2, [16]PID
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 [0]Zero, [1]AI1 scaled, [2]AI2 scaled, [8]EFB ref1, [9]EFB ref2,
[16]PID
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
ACS180 [Link] Page 107 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 107

Par. No. Par. Name Settings/Range (default value on bold)

28.23 Constant frequency sel2 [0]Always off, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 0.000 … 1800.000 s, 3s
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 0.000 … 1800.000 s, 3s
28.26 Constant frequency 1 -500.00 … 500.00Hz, 5Hz
28.27 Constant frequency 2 -500.00 … 500.00Hz, 10Hz
28.28 Constant frequency 3 -500.00 … 500.00Hz, 15Hz
Group 30 Limits
30.11 Minimum speed -30000.00 … 30000.00rpm, -1500.00rpm
30.12 Maximum speed -30000.00 … 30000.00rpm, 1500.00rpm
30.13 Minimum frequency -500 … 500 Hz, -50Hz
30.14 Maximum frequency -500 … 500 Hz, 50Hz
30.17 Maximum current depend on rating
Group 31 Fault functions
31.11 Fault reset selection [0]not used, [2]DI1, [3]DI2, [4]DI3, [5]DI4, [6]DI5
Group 40 Process PID set 1
40.07 Process PID operation mode [0]OFF, [1]ON, [2]ON when drive running
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source [8]AI1 percent, [9]AI2 percent
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source [2]Internal setpoint, [11]AI1 percent, [12]AI2 percent
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0 -200000.00 … 200000.00, 0
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion [0]Not inverted (Ref - Fbk), [1]Inverted (Fbk - Ref)
40.32 Set 1 gain 0.01 … 100.00, 1
40.33 Set 1 integration time 0.0 … 9999.0 s, 60s
Group 45 Energy efficiency
45.11 Energy optimizer [0]Disable, [1]Enable
Group 58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01 Protocol enable [0]None, [1]ModbusRTU
58.03 Node address 0 … 255, 1
58.04 Baud rate [1]4800, [2]9600, [3]19200, [4]38400, [5]57600, [6]76800,
[7]115200
58.05 Parity [0]8 NONE 1, [1]8 NONE 2, [2]8 EVEN 1, [3]8 ODD 1
58.06 Communication control [0]Enabled, [1]Refresh settings
58.14 Communication loss action [0]No action, [1]Fault, [2]Last speed, [5]Warning
ACS180 [Link] Page 108 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

108 Parameters

Long parameter listing

No. Name/Value Description Default
FbEq 16
01
01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the drive.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
Note: Values of these actual signals are filtered with the
filter time defined in group 46 Monitoring/scaling settings.
The selection lists for parameters in other groups mean
the raw value of the actual signal instead. For example, if
a selection is “Output frequency” it does not point to the
value of parameter 01.06 Output frequency but to the raw
value.
01.01 Motor speed used Estimated motor speed. A filter time constant for this -
signal can be defined by parameter 46.11 Filter time motor
speed.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Estimated motor speed. See par.
rpm 46.01

01.03 Motor speed % Actual speed in percent of the motor synchronous speed. -
The filter time constant can be adjusted by parameter
46.11 Filter time motor speed.
-1000.00… 1000.00% Motor speed. See par.
46.01
01.06 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. A filter time -
constant for this signal can be defined by parameter 46.12
Filter time output frequency.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Estimated output frequency. See par.
46.02
01.07 Motor current Measured (absolute) motor current in A. -
0.00…30000.00 Motor current. See par.
46.05
01.08 Motor current % of Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the -
motor nom nominal motor current.
0.0…1000.0% Motor current. 1=1%
01.09 Motor current % of Motor current (drive output current) in percent of the -
drive nom nominal drive current.
0.0…1000.0% Motor current. 1=1%
01.10 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See -
also parameter 01.30 Nominal torque scale.
A filter time constant for this signal can be defined by
parameter 46.13 Filter time motor torque.
-1600.0…1600.0% Motor torque. See par.
46.03
01.11 DC voltage Measured intermediate circuit DC Link voltage. -
0.00…2000.00 V DC link voltage. 10 = 1 V
01.13 Output voltage Calculated motor voltage in V AC. -
0…2000 V Motor voltage. 1=1V
ACS180 [Link] Page 109 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 109

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
01.14 Output power Measured output power in kW. The unit is selected by -
parameter 96.16 Unit selection. The filter time constant
can be adjusted by parameter 46.14 Filter time power.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Output power. See par.
kW 46.04
01.15 Output power % of Measured output power in % of nominal motor power. -
motor nom
-300.00… 300.00% Output power. 10 = 1%
01.17 Motor shaft power Estimated mechanical power at motor shaft in kW or hp. -
Parameter 96.16 Unit selection defines the unit. The filter
time constant can be adjusted by parameter 46.14 Filter
time power.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Motor shaft power. See par.
kW or hp 46.04
01.18 Inverter GWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value
is zero.
0…65535 GWh Energy in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh
01.19 Inverter MWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the
counter rolls over, 01.18 Inverter GWh counter is
incremented. The minimum value is zero.
0…1000 MWh Energy in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh
01.20 Inverter kWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the
counter rolls over, 01.19 Inverter MWh counter is
incremented. The minimum value is zero.
0…1000 kWh Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
01.24 Flux actual % Used flux reference in percent of nominal flux of motor. -
0…200% Flux reference. 1 = 1%
01.30 Nominal torque scale Nominal torque in N•m which corresponds to 100%. 0
Note: This parameter is copied from parameter 99.12
Motor nominal torque if given. Otherwise the
value is calculated from other motor data.
0.000…4000000 Nominal torque. 1 = 100 unit
N·m or lb·ft
01.50 Current hour kWh Current hour energy consumption. This is the energy of -/-
the last 60 minutes (not necessarily continuous) the drive
has been running, not the energy of a calendar hour. The
value is set to the value before the power cycle when the
drive is again up and running.
0.00…1000000.00 Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
kWh
01.51 Previous hour kWh Previous hour energy consumption. The value Current -
hour kWh is stored here when its values has been
cumulated for 60 minutes. The value is set to the value
before the power cycle when the drive is again up and
running.
0.00…1000000.00 Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
kWh
ACS180 [Link] Page 110 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

110 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
01.52 Current day kWh Current day energy consumption. This is the energy of the -
last 24 hours (not necessarily continuous) the drive has
been running, not the energy of a calendar day. The value
is set to the value before the power cycle when the drive is
again up and running.
0.00…1000000.00 Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
kWh
01.53 Previous day kWh Previous day energy consumption. The value is set to the -
value before the power cycle when the drive is again up
and running.
0.00 … 1000000.00 Energy. 1 = 1 kWh
kWh
01.54 Cumulative inverter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
energy either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. The minimum value
is zero.
-200000000.0… Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
200000000.0 kWh
01.55 Inverter GWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
(resettable) either direction) in full gigawatt-hours. The minimum value
is zero.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any
of parameters 01.55…01.58 resets all of them.
0…65535 GWh Energy in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh
01.56 Inverter MWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
(resettable) either direction) in full megawatt-hours. Whenever the
counter rolls over, 01.55 Inverter GWh counter
(resettable) is incremented. The minimum value is zero.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any
of parameters 01.55…01.58 resets all of them.
0…1000 MWh Energy in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh
01.57 Inverter kWh counter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
(resettable) either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. Whenever the
counter rolls over, 01.56 Inverter MWh counter
(resettable) is incremented. The minimum value is zero.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any
of parameters 01.55…01.58 resets all of them.
0…1000 kWh Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
01.58 Cumulative inverter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in -
energy (resettable) either direction) in full kilowatt-hours. The minimum value
is zero.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero. Resetting any
of parameters 01.55…01.58 resets all of them.
-200000000.0… Energy in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
200000000.0 kWh
01.61 Abs motor speed used Absolute value of the motor speed used 01.01 Motor -
speed used.
0.00… 30000.00 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
01.62 Abs motor speed % Absolute value of the motor speed % 01.03 Motor speed -
%
0.00… 1000.00% 10 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 111 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 111

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
01.63 Abs output frequency Absolute value of the output frequency 01.06 Output -
frequency
0.00…500.00 Hz 1 = 1 Hz
01.64 Abs motor torque Absolute value of the motor torque 01.10 Motor torque. -
0.0…1600.0% 1 = 1%
01.65 Abs output power Absolute value of the output power 01.14 Output power. -
0.00…32767.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
01.66 Abs output power % Absolute value of the output power % of motor nominal -
motor nom 01.15 Output power % of motor nom.
0.00… 300.00% 1 = 1%
01.68 Abs motor shaft power Absolute value of the motor shaft power 01.17 Motor shaft -
power.
0.00…332767.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
03
03 Input references Values of references received from various sources.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
03.01 Panel reference Local mode reference is given from the control panel. 0
-100000.00… Control panel or PC tool reference. 1 = 10 unit
100000.00 rpm, Hz or
%
03.02 Panel reference Remote mode reference given from the control panel. -
remote
-100000.00… Control panel or PC tool reference. 1 = 10 unit
100000.00 rpm, Hz or
%
03.09 EFB reference 1 Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded -
fieldbus interface. The scaling is defined by 58.26 EFB
ref1 type
-30000.00 … Scaled reference 1 received through the embedded 1 = 10
30000.00 fieldbus interface.
03.10 EFB reference 2 Scaled embedded fieldbus reference 2. -
-30000.00 … Scaled reference 2 received through the embedded 1 = 10
30000.00 fieldbus interface. The scaling is defined by 58.27 EFB
ref2 type
03.17 Integrated Panel ref Local mode reference given from the integrated control 0
panel. The unit (rpm, Hz or %) is set from parameter.
-100000.00 … Integrated control panel reference. 1 = 10
100000.00 rpm, Hz or
%
03.18 Integrated Panel ref Remote mode reference given from the integrated control 0
remote panel.
-100000.00 … Integrated control panel reference. 1 = 10
100000.00 rpm, Hz or
%
ACS180 [Link] Page 112 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

112 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
04
04 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last.
For explanations of individual warning and fault codes,
see chapter Fault tracing.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
04.01 Tripping fault Code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the drive -
to trip as it arrived at the trip register).
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 1=1
04.02 Active fault 2 2nd active fault in the trip register. -
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 1=1
04.03 Active fault 3 3rd active fault in the trip register. -
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 1=1
04.06 Active warning 1 1st active warning in warning register. -
0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 1=1
04.07 Active warning 2 2nd active warning in warning register. -
0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 1=1
04.08 Active warning 3 3rd active warning in warning register. -
0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 1=1
04.11 Latest fault Latest fault in the trip log store. The trip log store is loaded -
with the active faults in the order they occur.
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 1=1
04.12 2nd latest fault 2nd fault in trip log store. -
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 1=1
04.13 3rd latest fault 3rd fault in trip log store. -
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 1=1
04.16 Latest warning Latest warning in the warning log store. The warning log -
store is loaded with the active warnings in the order they
occur.
0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 1=1
04.17 2nd latest warning 2nd warning in trip log store. -
0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 1=1
04.18 3rd latest warning 3rd warning in trip log store. -
0000h…FFFFh Warning code. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 113 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 113

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
04.40 Event word 1 Shows the user-defined event word. This word collects the -
status of the events (warnings, faults or pure events)
selected by parameters 04.41…04.71.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 User bit 0 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.41 is active.
1 User bit 1 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.43 is active.
… … …
15 User bit 15 1 = Event selected by parameter 04.71 is active.

0000h…FFFFh 1=1
04.41 Event word 1 bit 0 Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault 0X2310h
code or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 0 of
parameter 04.40. See chapterFault tracing (page 347) for
the event codes.
0000h…FFFFh Code of event. 1=1
04.43 Event word 1 bit 1 Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault 0X3210h
code or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 1 of
parameter 04.40. See chapter Fault tracing (page 347) for
the event codes.
0000h…FFFFh Code of event. 1=1
04.45 Event word 1 bit 2 … 0X4310h
code
04.47 Event word 1 bit 3 … 0X2340h
code
04.49 Event word 1 bit 4 … 0X0000h
code
04.51 Event word 1 bit 5 … 0X3220h
code
04.53 Event word 1 bit 6 … 0X80A0h
code
04.55 Event word 1 bit 7 … 0X0000h
code
04.57 Event word 1 bit 8 … 0X7122h
code
04.59 Event word 1 bit 9 … 0X7081h
code
04.61 Event word 1 bit 10 … 0XFF61h
code
04.63 Event word 1 bit 11 … 0X7121h
code
04.65 Event word 1 bit 12 … 0X4110h
code
04.67 Event word 1 bit 13 … 0X9081h
code
04.69 Event word 1 bit 14 … 0X9082h
code
ACS180 [Link] Page 114 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

114 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
04.71 Event word 1 bit 15 Selects the hexadecimal code of an event (warning, fault 0X2330h
code or pure event) whose status is shown as bit 15 of
parameter 04.40. See chapter Fault tracing (page 347) for
the event codes.
0000h…FFFFh Code of event. 1=1
05
05 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements
related to drive maintenance.
All parameters in this group are read-only unless
otherwise noted.
05.01 On-time counter Drive on-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is -
powered.
0…65535 d On-time counter (number of days). 1=1d
05.02 Run-time counter Motor run-time counter. The counter runs when the -
inverter modulates.
0…65535 d Motor run-time counter. 1=1d
05.03 Hours run Corresponding parameter to 05.02 Run-time counter in -
hours, that is, 24 * 05.02 value + fractional part of a day.
0… Hours. 1=1h
429496729.5 h
05.04 Fan on-time counter Running time of the drive cooling fan. Can be reset from -
the control panel by keeping Reset down for over 3
seconds.
0…65535 d Cooling fan run-time. 1=1d
05.10 Control board Measured temperature of the control board. -
temperature
-100… 300 °C or °F Temperature in degrees Celsius for Fahrenheit. 1 = unit
05.11 Inverter temperature Estimated drive temperature in percent of fault limit. The -
fault limit varies according to the type of the drive.
0.0% = 0 °C (32 °F)
100.0% = Fault limit
-40.0…160.0% Temperature in percent. 1 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 115 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 115

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
05.20 Diagnostic word 1 Diagnostic word 1. For possible causes and remedies, 0b0000
see chapter Fault tracing.

Bit Name Value

0 Any warning or fault Yes = Drive has generated a warning or tripped on a fault.
1 Any warning Yes = Drive has generated a warning.
2 Any fault Yes = Drive has tripped on a fault.
3 Reserved
4 Overcurrent fault Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 2310 Overcurrent.
5 Reserved
6 DC overvoltage Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 3210 DC link overvoltage.
7 DC undervoltage Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 3220 DC link undervoltage.
8 Reserved
9 Device overtemp flt Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 4310 Excess temperature.
10...15 Reserved

0b0000…0b1111 Diagnostic word 1. 1=1

05.21 Diagnostic word 2 Diagnostic word 2. For possible causes and remedies, 0b0000
see chapter Fault tracing.

Bit Name Value

0...9 Reserved
10 Motor overtemp flt Yes = Drive has tripped on fault 4981 External
temperature 1.
11…15 Reserved

0b0000…0b1111 Diagnostic word 2. 1=1

05.22 Diagnostic word 3 Diagnostic word 3. For possible causes and remedies, 0b0000
see chapter Fault tracing.

Bit Name Value

0...8 Reserved
9 kWh pulse 1 = kWh pulse is active.
10 Reserved
11 Fan command 1 = Drive fan is rotating above idle speed.
12…15 Reserved

0b0000…0b1111 Diagnostic word 3. 1=1

05.80 Motor speed at fault Displays the motor speed (01.01) at which fault occurred. -
-30000.00… Motor speed at fault. See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
05.81 Output frequency at Displays the output frequency (01.06) at which fault -
fault occurred.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Output frequency at fault. See par.
46.02
05.82 DC voltage at fault Displays the DC link volt age (01.11) at which fault -
occurred.
0.00…2000.00 V DC voltage at fault. 10 = 1 V
ACS180 [Link] Page 116 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

116 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
05.83 Motor current at fault Displays the motor current (01.07) at which fault occurred. -
0.00…30000.00 A Motor current at fault. See par.
46.05
05.84 Motor torque at fault Displays the motor torque (01.10) at which fault occurred -
-1600.0…1600.0% Motor torque at fault. See par.
46.03
05.85 Main status word at Displays the main status word (06.11) at which fault 0000h
fault occurred. For the bit list, see parameter 06.11 Main status
word.

Bit Name
0 Ready to switch ON
1 Ready run
2 Ready ref
3 Tripped
4 Not in use
5 Not in use
6 Not in use
7 Warning
8 Modulating
9 Remote
10 Net OK
11 User bit 0
12 User bit 1
13 User bit 2
14 Charging
15 User bit 3

0000h…FFFFh Main status word at fault. 1=1

05.86 DI delayed status at Displays the DI delayed status (10.02) at which fault 0000h
fault occurred. For the bit list, see parameter 10.02 DI delayed
status.
0000h…FFFFh DI delayed status at fault. 1=1
05.87 Inverter temperature Displays the inverter temperature (05.11) at which fault -
at fault occurred.
-40…160°C Inverter temperature at fault. 1 = 1°C
05.88 Reference used at Displays the reference used (28.01/26.73/23.01) at which -
fault fault occurred. The type of the reference depends on the
selected operation mode (19.01).
-500.00…500.00 Hz/ Reference used at fault. See par.
46.02/
-1600.0…1600.0%/ See par.
46.03/
30000.00… See par.
30000.00 rpm 46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 117 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 117

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
06
06 Control and status Drive control and status words.
words
06.01 Main control word The main control word of the drive. This parameter shows 0000h
the control signals as received from the selected sources
(such as digital inputs, the fieldbus interfaces and the
application program).
The bit assignments of the word are as described on page
376. The related status word are presented on pages 376.
This parameter is read-only.
Note: With the fieldbus control, the parameter value is not
same as the value that it receives from the PLC.

Bit Name
0 OFF1_ CONTROL
1 OFF2_ CONTROL
2 OFF3_ CONTROL
3 INHIBIT_ OPERATION
4 RAMP_OUT_ ZERO
5 RAMP_HOLD
6 RAMP_IN_ ZERO
7 RESET
8 JOGGING_1
9 JOGGING_2
10 REMOTE_ CMD
11 EXT_CTRL_ LOC
12 USER_0
13 USER_1
14 USER_2
15 USER_3

0000h…FFFFh Main control word. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 118 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

118 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
06.11 Main status word ABB Drives Profile Main status word. Reflects the status 0000h
of the drive irrespective of control source e.g. a fieldbus
system, control panel (keypad), PC-Tool, standard I/O,
application program or sequence programming, and
irrespective of the actual control profile which is used to
control the drive.
The bit assignments are described on page 379 (Contents
of the fieldbus control word). The state diagram (valid for
ABB drives profile) is on page 365.
This parameter is read-only.
Note: With the fieldbus control, the parameter value is not
same as the value that it receives from the PLC.

Bit Name
0 RDY_ON
1 RDY_RUN
2 RDY_REF
3 TRIPPED
4 OFF_2_STATUS
5 OFF_3_STATUS
6 SWC_ON_ INHIB
7 ALARM
8 AT_ SETPOINT
9 REMOTE
10 ABOVE_ LIMIT
11 USER_0
12 USER_1
13 USER_2
14 USER_3
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Main status word. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 119 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 119

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
06.16 Drive status word 1 Drive status word 1. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Enabled 1 = Both run enable (see par. 20.12) and start enable (20.19) signals
are present. Note: This bit is not affected by the presence of a fault.
1 Inhibited 1 = Start inhibited. To start the drive, the inhibiting signal (see par.
06.18) must be removed and the start signal cycled.
2 DC charged 1 = DC circuit has been charged
3 Ready to start 1 = Drive is ready to receive a start command
4 Following 1 = Drive is ready to follow given reference
reference
5 Started 1 = Drive has been started
6 Modulating 1 = Drive is modulating (output stage is being controlled)
7 Limiting 1 = Any operating limit (speed, torque, etc.) is active
8 Local control 1 = Drive is in local control
10 Ext1 active 1 = Control location EXT1 active
11 Ext2 active 1 = Control location EXT2 active
12 Reserved
13 Start request 1 = Start requested. 0 = When Enable to rotate signal (see par.
20.22) is 0 (rotating of the motor is disabled).
14 Running 1 = Drive is running
15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Drive status word 1. 1=1

06.17 Drive status word 2 Drive status word 2. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Identification run done 1 = Motor identification (ID) run has been performed
1 Magnetized 1 = The motor has been magnetized
2 Torque control 1 = Torque control mode active
3 Speed control 1 = Speed control mode active
4 Reserved
5 Safe reference active 1 = A “safe” reference is applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05
6 Last speed active 1 = A “last speed” reference is applied by functions such as
parameters 49.05
7 Reserved
8 Emergency stop failed 1 = Emergency stop failed (see parameters 31.32 and 31.33)
9 Jogging active 1 = Jogging enable signal is on
10 Above limit Actual speed, frequency or torque equals or exceeds the limit
(defined by parameters 46.31...45.33). Valid for both directions
of rotation.
11…12 Reserved
13 Start delay active 1 = Start delay (par. 21.22) active.
14…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Drive status word 2. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 120 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

120 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
06.18 Start inhibit status Start inhibit status word. This word specifies the source of -
word the inhibiting signal that is preventing the drive from
starting.
The conditions marked with an asterisk (*) only require
that the start command is cycled to reset the inhibition. In
all other instances, the inhibiting condition must be
removed first.
See also parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1, bit 1.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Not ready run 1 = DC voltage is missing or drive has not been parametrized
correctly. Check the parameters in groups 95 and 99.
1 Ctrl location changed * 1 = Control location has changed
2 SSW inhibit 1 = Control program is keeping itself in inhibited state
3 Fault reset * 1 = A fault has been reset
4 Lost start enable 1 = Start enable signal missing
5 Lost run enable 1 = Run enable signal missing
6 Reserved
7 STO 1 = Safe torque off function active
8 Current calibration * 1 = Current calibration routine has finished
ended
9 ID run ended * 1 = Motor identification run has finished
10 Reserved -
11 Em Off1 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off1)
12 Em Off2 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off2)
13 Em Off3 1 = Emergency stop signal (mode off3)
14 Auto reset inhibit 1 = The autoreset function is inhibiting operation
15 Jogging active 1 = The jogging enable signal is inhibiting operation

0000h…FFFFh Start inhibit status word. 1=1

06.19 Speed control status Speed control status word. --
word This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

1 = Drive has been running below zero speed limit (par. 21.06)
0 Zero speed
for a time defined by parameter 21.07 Zero speed delay
1 = Drive is running in forward direction above zero speed limit
1 Forward
(par. 21.06)
1 = Drive is running in reverse direction above zero speed limit
2 Reverse
(par. 21.06)
3 Out of window Speed out of speed window
4 Internal speed feedback Estimate used for motor control
Any constant speed 1 = A constant speed or frequency has been selected; see par.
7
request 06.20 below.
10...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Speed control status word. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 121 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 121

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
06.20 Constant speed status Constant speed/frequency status word. Indicates which -
word constant speed or frequency is active (if any). See also
parameter 06.19 Speed control status word, bit 7, and
section Constant speeds/frequencies.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Constant speed 1 1 = Constant speed or frequency 1 selected
1 Constant speed 2 1 = Constant speed or frequency 2 selected
2 Constant speed 3 1 = Constant speed or frequency 3 selected
3 Constant speed 4 1 = Constant speed or frequency 4 selected
4 Constant speed 5 1 = Constant speed or frequency 5 selected
5 Constant speed 6 1 = Constant speed or frequency 6 selected
6 Constant speed 7 1 = Constant speed or frequency 7 selected
7…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Constant speed/frequency status word. 1=1

06.21 Drive status word 3 Drive status word 3. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 DC hold active 1 = DC hold is active
1 Post-magnetizing 1 = Post-magnetizing is active
active
2 Motor pre-heating 1 = Motor pre-heating is active
active
3 PM smooth start 1 = PM smooth start is active
active
4 Rotor position 1 = Rotor position is known
known
5 DC brake active 1 = DC brake is active
6…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Drive status word 1. 1=1

06.29 MSW bit 10 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit Above limit
10 (User bit 0) of parameter 06.11 Main status word.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
06.30 MSW bit 11 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit Ext ctrl loc
11 (User bit 0) of 06.11 Main status word.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Ext ctrl loc Bit 11 of 06.01 Main control word. 2
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
ACS180 [Link] Page 122 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

122 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
06.31 MSW bit 12 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit Ext run
12 (User bit 1) of 06.11 Main status word. enable
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Ext run enable Status of the external run enable signal (see parameter 2
20.12 Run enable 1 source).
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
06.32 MSW bit 13 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit False
13 (User bit 2) of 06.11 Main status word.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
06.33 MSW bit 14 selection Selects a binary source whose status is transmitted as bit False
14 (User bit 3) of 06.11 Main status word.
False 0. 0
True 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
07
07 System info Drive hardware and firmware information.
All parameters in this group are read-only.
07.03 Drive rating id Type of the drive/inverter unit. -
07.04 Firmware name Firmware identification. -
07.05 Firmware version Version number of the firmware. -
07.06 Loading package Name of the firmware loading package. -
name
07.07 Loading package Version number of the firmware loading package. -
version
07.11 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent. -
0…100% Microprocessor load. 1 = 1-
07.25 Customization First five ASCII letters of the name given to the -
package name customization package. The full name is visible under
System info on the control panel or the Drive composer
PC tool.
_N/A_ = None.
07.26 Customization Customization package version number. Also visible -
package version under System info on the control panel or the Drive
composer PC tool.
ACS180 [Link] Page 123 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 123

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
09
10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
10.01 DI status Displays the status of digital inputs. 0000h

Bit Value
0 DI1 = Status of digital input 1.
1 DI2 = Status of digital input 2.
2 DI3 = Status of digital input 3.
3 DI4 = Status of digital input 4.
4 DI5 = Status of digital input 5.
6...15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Status of digital inputs. 1=1

10.02 DI delayed status Displays the status of digital inputs. This word is updated 0000h
only after activation / deactivation delays.

Bit Value
0 DI1 = Delayed status of digital input 1.
1 DI2 = Delayed status of digital input 2.
2 DI3 = Delayed status of digital input 3.
3 DI4 = Delayed status of digital input 4.
4 DI5 = Delayed status of digital input 5.
6...15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Delayed status of digital inputs. 1=1

10.03 DI force selection Selects the digital inputs, states of which will be controlled 0000h
by parameter 10.04 DI forced data. A bit in parameter
10.04 DI forced data is provided for each digital input, and
its value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this
parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 10.03 and 10.04).

Bit Value
0 1 = Force DI1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data.
1 1 = Force DI2 to value of bit 1 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data.
2 1 = Force DI3 to value of bit 2 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data.
3 1 = Force DI4 to value of bit 3 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data.
4 1 = Force DI5 to value of bit 4 of parameter 10.04 DI forced data.
5...15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Override selection for digital inputs. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 124 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

124 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
10.04 DI forced data Defines the forced values for the digital inputs selected by 0000h
parameter 10.03 DI force selection. It is only possible to
force an input that has been selected in parameter 10.03
DI force selection.
Bit 0 is the forced value for DI1.

Bit Value
0 Force the value of this bit to DI1, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
1 Force the value of this bit to DI2, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
2 Force the value of this bit to DI3, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
3 Force the value of this bit to DI4, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
4 Force the value of this bit to DI5, if so defined in parameter 10.03 DI force selection.
5...15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Forced values of digital inputs. 1=1

10.05 DI1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital output DI1. 0.0 -

1
Status of selected
source
0

1
DI status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.05 DI1 ON delay

tOff = 10.06 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI1. 10 = 1 -
10.06 DI1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital output DI1. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI1. 10 = 1 -
10.07 DI2 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital output DI2. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI2. 10 = 1 -
10.08 DI2 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital output DI2. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI2. 10 = 1 -
10.09 DI3 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital output DI3. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI3. 10 = 1 -
10.10 DI3 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital output DI3. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI3. 10 = 1 -
10.11 DI4 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital output DI4. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI4. 10 = 1 -
ACS180 [Link] Page 125 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 125

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
10.12 DI4 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital output DI4. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI4. 10 = 1 -
10.13 DI5 ON delay Defines the activation delay for digital output DI5. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DI5. 10 = 1 -
10.14 DI5 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital output DI5. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DI5. 10 = 1 -
10.21 RO status Status of relay outputs RO1. -

Bit Value
0 1 = RO1 is energized.
1...15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Status of relay outputs. 1=1

10.22 RO force selection Selects the relay outputs that will be controlled by 0000h
parameter 10.23. The signals connected to the relay
outputs can be overridden for eg. testing purposes. A bit in
parameter 10.23 RO forced data is provided for each relay
output, and its value is applied whenever the
corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 10.22 and 10.23).

Bit Value
0 1 = Force RO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 10.23 RO forced data (0 = Normal mode).
1…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Override selection for relay outputs. 1=1

10.23 RO forced data Contains the values of relay outputs that are used instead
of the connected signals if selected in parameter 10.22
RO force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for RO1.
This provides the possibility to test the drive functionality
without the plant wiring. Ton and Toff delays are passed.

Bit Value
0 Forced value (0 or 1) for parameter 10.22 RO force selection.
1…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Forced RO values. 1=1

10.24 RO1 source Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output Fault (-1)
RO1.
Not energized Output is not energized. 0
Energized Output is energized. 1
Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word. 2
Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 4
ACS180 [Link] Page 126 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

126 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 5
Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 6
Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 7
Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word. 8
At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word. 9
Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 10
Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 11
Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 12
Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. 13
Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 14
Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 15
Fault/Warning A warning or fault is active. 16
Overcurrent A drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. 17
Overvoltage A drive is tripped to overvoltage fault. 18
Drive temp A drive is tripped to drive temperature fault. 19
Undervoltage A drive is tripped to undervoltage fault. 20
Motor temp A drive is tripped to motor temperature fault. 21
Brake command Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status. 22
Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 23
Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word. 24
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 33
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 34
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 35
Start delay Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 39
RO/DIO control word Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 40
bit0
Event word 1 Parameter 04.40 Event word 1. 53
User load curve Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word 61
(see page 246).
RO/DIO control word Maps to corresponding bit in parameter 10.99 RO/DIO 62
control word. For example, Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control
word controls RO1.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
ACS180 [Link] Page 127 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 127

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
10.25 RO1 ON delay Defines the activation delay for relay output RO1. 0.0 -

1
Status of selected
source
0

1
RO status
0

Time
tOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn = 10.25 RO1 ON delay

tOff = 10.26 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 -
10.26 RO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for relay output RO1. See 0.0 -
parameter 10.25 RO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for RO1. 10 = 1 -
10.99 RO/DIO control word Storage parameter for controlling the relay outputs eg. 0000h
through the embedded fieldbus interface. To control the
relay outputs (RO) of the drive, send a control word with
the bit assignments shown below as Modbus I/O data. Set
the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114) to RO/DIO control word. In the source
selection parameter of the desired output, select the
appropriate bit of this word.

Bit Name Description

0 RO1 Source bits for relay outputs (see parameter 10.24).
8 DO1

0000h…FFFFh RO control word. 1=1

10.101 RO1 toggle counter Displays the number of times relay output RO1 has -
changed states.
0…4294967000 State change count. 1=1
11
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO Configuration of the digital inputs/outputs (DIO) for use as
digital inputs,
11.02 DIO delayed status Displays the delayed status of digital outputs DO1. This -
word is updated only after activation/deactivation delays
(if any are specified).
Example: 0001 = DO1 is on.
This parameter is read-only.
DO1 Delayed status of digital output 1. 1=1
0000b…0001b Status of digital outputs. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 128 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

128 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
11.03 DIO force selection Selects the digit outputs that will be controlled by 0000h
parameter 11.04. The signals connected to the digit
outputs can be overridden for eg. testing purposes. A bit
in parameter 11.04 DO1 force data is provided for each
digit output, and its value is applied whenever the
corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 11.03 and 11.04).

Bit Value
0 1 = Force DO1 to value of bit 0 of parameter 11.04 DO1 force data.
1...15 Reserved

0000h...FFFFh Forced selections of digital inputs/outputs. 1=1

11.04 DO1 force data Contains the values of digit outputs that are used instead 0000h
of the connected signals if selected in parameter 11.03
DIO force selection. Bit 0 is the forced value for DO1.
This provides the possibility to test the drive functionality
without the plant wiring. Ton and Toff delays are passed.

Bit Value
0 1 = Force the value of this bit to DO1, if so defined in parameter 11.03 DO force
selection.
1...15 Reserved

0000h...FFFFh Forced values of digital outputs. 1=1

11.06 DO1 output source Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output Not
DO1. energized
Not energized Output is not energized. 0
Energized Output is energized. 1
Ready run Bit 1 of 06.11 Main status word. 2
Enabled Bit 0 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 4
Started Bit 5 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 5
Magnetized Bit 1 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 6
Running Bit 6 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 7
Ready ref Bit 2 of 06.11 Main status word. 8
At setpoint Bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word. 9
Reverse Bit 2 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 10
Zero speed Bit 0 of 06.19 Speed control status word. 11
Above limit Bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 12
Warning Bit 7 of 06.11 Main status word. 13
Fault Bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 14
Fault (-1) Inverted bit 3 of 06.11 Main status word. 15
Fault/Warning A warning or fault is active. 16
Overcurrent A drive is tripped to overcurrent fault. 17
ACS180 [Link] Page 129 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 129

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Overvoltage A drive is tripped to overvoltage fault. 18
Drive temp A drive is tripped to drive temperature fault. 19
Undervoltage A drive is tripped to undervoltage fault. 20
Motor temp A drive is tripped to motor temperature fault. 21
Brake command Bit 0 of 44.01 Brake control status. 22
Ext2 active Bit 11 of 06.16 Drive status word 1. 23
Remote control Bit 9 of 06.11 Main status word. 24
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 33
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 34
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 35
Start delay Bit 13 of 06.17 Drive status word 2. 39
RO/DIO control word Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 40
bit0
Event word 1 Parameter 04.40 Event word 1. 53
User load curve Bit 3 (Outside load limit) of 37.01 ULC output status word 61
(see page 246).
RO/DIO control word Maps to corresponding bit in parameter 10.99 RO/DIO 62
control word. For example, Bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control
word controls RO1, Bit 8 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word
controls DO1, and so on.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
11.07 DO1 ON delay Defines the on (activation) delay for digital input/output 0.00 s
DO1 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
0.0 … 3000.0 s Activation delay for DO1. 10 = 1 s
11.08 DO1 OFF delay Defines the deactivation delay for digital input/output DO1 0.00 s
(when used as a digital output or digital input). See
parameter 11.07 DO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Deactivation delay for DO1. 10 = 1 s
11.13 DI3 configuration Selects the type of digital input DI3: normal digital input or Digital input
frequency input.
Digital input Digital input. See parameter 11.42 for more information. 0
Frequency input Frequency input. 1
11.17 DI4 configuration Selects the type of digital input DI4: normal digital input or Digital input
frequency input.
Digital input Digital input. 0
Frequency input Frequency input. 1
11.21 DI5 configuration Selects the type of digital input DI5: normal digital input or Analog input
analog input.
Digital input Digital input. 0
Analog input Analog input. 2
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value Displays the value of frequency input 1 before scaling. -
See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
0 … 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 1. 1 = 1 Hz
ACS180 [Link] Page 130 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

130 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value Displays the value of frequency input 1 after scaling. See -
parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000… Scaled value of frequency input 1. 1=1
32767.000
11.42 Freq in 1 min Defines the minimum for the frequency actually arriving at 0 Hz
frequency input 1.
The incoming frequency signal (11.38 Freq in 1 actual
value) is scaled into an internal signal (11.39 Freq in 1
scaled value) by parameters 11.42…11.45 as follows:
11.39

11.45

11.44

fin (11.38)
11.42 11.43

0 … 16000 Hz Minimum frequency of frequency input 1. 1 = 1 Hz

11.43 Freq in 1 max Defines the maximum value of the frequency signal 16000 Hz
actually arriving at frequency input 1. See parameter
11.42 Freq in 1 min.
0 … 16000 Hz Maximum frequency of frequency input 1. 1 = 1 Hz
11.44 Freq in 1 at scaled min Defines the value that corresponds to the actual minimum 0.000
input frequency defined by parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
-32768.000… Value corresponding to minimum of frequency input 1. 1=1
32767.000
11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled Defines the value that corresponds to the actual maximum 1500.000
max input frequency defined by parameter 11.43 Freq in 1
max. See parameter 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
-32768.000… Value corresponding to maximum of frequency input 1. 1=1
32767.000
11.46 Freq in 2 actual value Displays the value of frequency input 2 before scaling. -
See parameter 11.50 Freq in 2 min This parameter is
read-only.
0 … 16000 Hz Unscaled value of frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz
11.47 Freq in 2 scaled Displays the value of frequency input 2 after scaling. See -
parameter 11.50 Freq in 2 min.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000… Scaled value of frequency input 2. 1=1
32767.000
11.50 Freq in 2 min Defines the minimum value for frequency input 2. 0 Hz
ACS180 [Link] Page 131 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 131

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
0 … 16000 Hz Minimum frequency of frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz
11.51 Freq in 2 max Defines the maximum value for frequency input 2. 16000 Hz
0 … 16000 Hz Maximum frequency for frequency input 2. 1 = 1 Hz
11.52 Freq in 2 at scaled min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum 0.000
frequency input 2 value defined by parameter Freq in 2
min.
-32768.000 Value corresponding to minimum of frequency input 2. 1=1
… 32767.000
11.53 Freq in 2 at scaled Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum 1500.000
max frequency input 2 value defined by parameter Freq in 2
max.
-32768.000 … Value corresponding to maximum of frequency input 2. 1=1
32767.000
12
12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs.
12.02 AI force selection The true readings of the analog inputs can be overridden 0000h
for e.g. testing purposes. A forced value parameter is
provided for each analog input, and its value is applied
whenever the corresponding bit in this parameter is 1.
Note: AI filter times (parameters 12.16 AI1 filter time and
12.26 AI1 filter time) have no effect on forced AI values
(parameters 12.13 AI1 forced value and 12.23 AI2 forced
value).
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameter 12.02).

Bit Value
0 1 = Force AI1 to value of parameter 12.13 AI1 forced value.
1 1 = Force AI2 to value of parameter 12.23 AI2 forced value.
2…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Forced values selector for analog inputs AI1 and AI2. 1=1
12.03 AI supervision function Selects how the drive reacts when an analog input signal No action
moves out of the minimum and/or maximum limits
specified for the input.
The supervision applies a margin of 0.5 V or 1.0 mA to the
limits. For example, if the maximum limit for the input is
7.000 V, the maximum limit supervision activates at
7.500 V.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by
parameter 12.04 AI supervision selection.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault Drive trips on 80A0 AI supervision. 1
Warning Drive generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning. 2
Last speed Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and 3
freezes the speed (or frequency) to the level the drive was
operating at. The speed/frequency is determined on the
basis of actual speed using 850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
ACS180 [Link] Page 132 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

132 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Speed ref safe Drive generates a warning (A8A0 AI supervision) and sets 4
the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed
ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency
reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
12.04 AI supervision Specifies the analog input limits to be supervised. See 0000h
selection parameter 12.03 AI supervision function.

Bit Name Description

0 AI1 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active.
1 AI1 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active.
2 AI2 < MIN 1 = Minimum limit supervision of AI2 active.
3 AI2 > MAX 1 = Maximum limit supervision of AI2 active.
4…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Activation of analog input supervision. 1=1

12.11 AI1 actual value Displays the value of analog input AI1 in mA or V -
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage by a hardware setting).
This parameter is read-only.
0.000...22.000 mA or Value of analog input AI1. 1000 = 1 unit
0.000...11.000 V
12.12 AI1 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI1 after scaling. See -
parameters 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min and 12.20 AI1
scaled at AI1 max.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768 … 32767 Scaled value of analog input AI1. 1=1
12.13 AI1 forced value Defines the forced value that can be used instead of the -
true reading of the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force
selection.
- 1000 = 1 -
12.15 AI1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog V
input AI1. See the default control connections of the
macro in use, in chapter Control macros (page 43).
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
ACS180 [Link] Page 133 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 133

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
12.16 AI1 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1. 0.100 s

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface

hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This
cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.000…30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
12.17 AI1 min Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI1. 4.000 mA or
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog 0.000 V
signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
0.000…22.000 mA or Minimum value of AI1. 1000 = 1 mA
0.000…11.00 V or V
12.18 AI1 max Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI1. 20.000 mA
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog or 10.00 V
signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting.
0.000…22.000 mA or Maximum value of AI1. 1000 = 1 mA
0.000…11.00 V or V
ACS180 [Link] Page 134 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

134 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the 0
minimum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter
12.17 AI1 min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.19
and 12.20 can effectively invert the analog input.)
AIscaled (12.12)

12.20

AIin (12.11)
12.17
12.18

12.19

-32768.000… 1=1
32767.000
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Defines the real internal value that corresponds to the 50.000
maximum analog input AI1 value defined by parameter
12.18 AI1 max. See the drawing at parameter 12.19 AI1
scaled at AI1 min.
-32768.000… Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value. 1=1
32767.000
12.21 AI2 actual value Displays the value of analog input AI2 in mA or V -
(depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage by a hardware setting).
This parameter is read-only.
0.000…22.000 mA Value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1 mA
or 0.000…11.000 V or V
12.22 AI2 scaled value Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling. See -
parameters 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12.101 AI1
percent value.
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.000… Scaled value of analog input AI2. 1=1
32767.000
12.23 AI2 forced value Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading -
of the input. See parameter 12.02 AI force selectionn.
0.000…22.000 mA Forced value of analog input AI2. 1000 = 1 mA
or 0.000…11.000 V or V

12.25 AI2 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog mA
input AI2. See the default control connections of the
macro in use, in chapter Control macros (page 43).
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
ACS180 [Link] Page 135 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 135

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
12.26 AI2 filter time Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See 0.100 s
parameter 12.16 AI1 filter time.
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface
hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This
cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.000…30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
12.27 AI2 min Defines the minimum site value for analog input AI2. 4.000 mA or
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog 0.000 V
signal from plant is wound to its minimum setting.
0.000…22.000 mA Minimum value of AI2. 1000 = 1 mA
or 0.000…11.000 V or V
12.28 AI2 max Defines the maximum site value for analog input AI2. 20.000 mA
Set the value actually sent to the drive when the analog or 10.000 V
signal from plant is wound to its maximum setting.
0.000…22.000 mA Maximum value of AI2. 1000 = 1 mA
or 0.000…11.000 V or V
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum 0.000
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.27 AI2
min. (Changing the polarity settings of 12.29 and 12.101
can effectively invert the analog input.)
AIscaled (12.22)

12.101

AIin (12.21)
12.27
12.28

12.29

-32768.000… Real value corresponding to minimum AI2 value. 1=1

32767.000
12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum 50.000
analog input AI2 value defined by parameter 12.28 AI2
max. See the drawing at parameter of 12.29 AI2 scaled at
AI2 min
-32768.000… Real value corresponding to maximum AI2 value. 1=1
32767.000
12.101 AI1 percent value Value of analog input AI1 in percent of AI1 scaling (12.18 -
AI1 max - 12.17 AI1 min).
0.00… 100.00 AI1 value 100 = 1%
12.102 AI2 percent value Value of analog input AI2 in percent of AI1 scaling (12.28 -
AI2 max - 12.27 AI2 min).
0.00… 100.00 AI2 value 100 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 136 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

136 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
13
13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs.
13.02 AO force selection Selects the analog outputs that will be forced to values 0000h
defined by parameters.
The true source signals of the analog outputs can be
overridden for eg. testing purposes. A forced value
parameter is provided for each analog output, and its
value is applied whenever the corresponding bit in this
parameter is 1.
Note: Boot and power cycle reset the force selections
(parameters 13.02 and 13.11).

Bit Value
0 1 = Force AO1 to value of parameter 13.13 AO1 forced value.
1…15 Reserved.

0000h…FFFFh Forced values selector for analog output AO1. 1=1

13.11 AO1 actual value Displays the value of AO1 in mA. -
This parameter is read-only.
0.000…22.000 mA Value of AO1. 1 = 1 mA
13.12 AO1 source Selects a signal to be connected to analog output AO1. Output
frequency
Zero None. 0
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current 4
Motor current % of 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom 5
motor nom
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage 7
Output power 01.14 Output power 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 10
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference 12
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output 14
Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual 16
Temp sensor 1 The output is used to feed an excitation current to the 20
excitation temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature
1 source. See also section Motor thermal protection.
Abs motor speed used 01.61 Abs motor speed used 26
Abs motor speed % 01.62 Abs motor speed % 27
Abs output frequency 01.63 Abs output frequency 28
Abs motor torque 01.64 Abs motor torque 30
Abs output power 01.65 Abs output power 31
Abs motor shaft power 01.68 Abs motor shaft power 32
External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value 33
ACS180 [Link] Page 137 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 137

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage 37
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
13.13 AO1 forced value Forced value that can be used instead of the selected 0.000 mA
output signal. See parameter 13.02 AO force selection.
- 1000 = 1 -
13.15 AO1 unit selection Selects the unit for readings and settings related to analog mA
input AO1.
Note: This setting must match the corresponding
hardware setting on the drive control unit (see the drive
hardware manual). See the default control connections for
the macro in use in chapter Control macros. Control board
reboot (either by cycling the power or through parameter
96.08 Control board boot) is required to validate any
changes in the hardware settings.
V Volts. 2
mA Milliamperes. 10
13.16 AO1 filter time Defines the filtering time constant for analog output AO1. 0.100 s

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s

ACS180 [Link] Page 138 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

138 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
13.17 AO1 source min Defines the real minimum value of the signal (selected by 0.0
parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
minimum required AO1 output value (defined by
parameter 13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min).

IAO1 (mA)

13.20

13.19

13.17 13.18 Signal

selected by
13.12

Setting 13.17 to the maximum value and 13.18 to the

minimum value inverts the output.

IAO1 (mA)

13.20

13.19

13.18 13.17 Signal (real)

selected by
13.12
ACS180 [Link] Page 139 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 139

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
AO has automatic scaling. Every time the source for the AO is changed, the scaling range is
changed accordingly. User given minimum and maximum values override the automatic values.

13.12 AO1 source, 13.17 AO1 source min, 13.18 AO1 source max,
13.22 AO2 source 13.27 AO2 source min 13.28 AO2 source max
0 Zero N/A (Output is constant zero.)
1 Motor speed used 0 46.01 Speed scaling
3 Output frequency 0 46.02 Frequency scaling
4 Motor current 0 Max. value of 30.17 Maximum
current
5 Motor current % of motor 0% 100%
nom
6 Motor torque 0 46.03 Torque scaling
7 DC voltage Min. value of 01.11 DC Max. value of 01.11 DC
voltage voltage
8 Output power 0 46.04 Power scaling
10 Speed ref ramp in 0 46.01 Speed scaling
11 Speed ref ramp out 0 46.01 Speed scaling
12 Speed ref used 0 46.01 Speed scaling
14 Freq ref used 0 46.02 Frequency scaling
16 Process PID out Min. value of 40.01 Process Max. value of 40.01 Process
PID output actual PID output actual
20 Temp sensor 1 excitation N/A (Analog output is not scaled; it is determined by the
21 Temp sensor 2 excitation sensor’s triggering voltage.)
26 Abs motor speed used 0 46.01 Speed scaling
27 Abs motor speed % 0 46.01 Speed scaling
28 Abs output frequency 0 46.02 Frequency scaling
30 Abs motor torque 0 46.03 Torque scaling
31 Abs output power 0 46.04 Power scaling
32 Abs motor shaft power 0 46.04 Power scaling
33 External PID1 out Min. value of 71.01 External Max. value of 71.01 External
PID act value PID act value
Other Min. value of the selected Max. value of the selected
parameter parameter

-32768.0…32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output 1=1

value.
13.18 AO1 source max Defines the real maximum value of the signal (selected by 50.0
parameter 13.12 AO1 source) that corresponds to the
maximum required AO1 output value (defined by
parameter 13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max). See
parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
-32768.0…32767.0 Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output 1=1
value.
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the minimum output value for analog output AO1. 0.000 mA
min See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000…22.00 mA Minimum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA
0.000…11.000 V
ACS180 [Link] Page 140 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

140 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src Defines the maximum output value for analog output AO1. 20.000 mA
max See also drawing at parameter 13.17 AO1 source min.
0.000…22.000 mA Maximum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA
0.000…11.000 V
13.91 AO1 data storage Storage parameter for controlling analog output AO1 eg. 0.00
through fieldbus.
In parameter 13.12 AO1 source, select AO1 data storage.
Then set this parameter as the target of the incoming
value data. With the embedded fieldbus interface, simply
set the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114 to AO1 data storage).
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for AO1. 100 = 1
15
19 Operation mode Selection of local and external control location sources
and operating modes.
See section Operating modes of the drive in chapter
Program features.
19.01 Actual operation mode Displays the operating mode currently used. -
See parameters 19.11…19.14.
This parameter is read-only.
Zero Zero. 0
Speed Speed control (in vector motor control mode). 1
Torque Torque control (in vector motor control mode). 2
Min The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed 3
controller (25.01) and torque reference (26.74) and the
smaller of the two is used (in vector motor control mode).
Max The torque selector is comparing the output of the speed 4
controller (25.01) and torque reference (26.74) and the
greater of the two is used (in vector motor control mode).
Add Add 5
Scalar (Hz) Frequency control in scalar motor control mode (in scalar 7
motor control mode).
Scalar (rpm) Speed control in scalar motor control mode (in scalar 8
motor control mode).
Forced magn. Motor is in magnetizing mode. 9
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selects the source for external control location EXT1
EXT1/EXT2 selection.
0 = EXT1
1 = EXT2
EXT1 EXT1 (permanently selected). 0
EXT2 EXT2 (permanently selected). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
ACS180 [Link] Page 141 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 141

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 30
EFB MCW bit 11 Control word bit 11 received through the embedded 32
fieldbus interface.
EFB connection loss Detected communication loss of embedded fieldbus 35
interface changes control mode to EXT2.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
19.12 Ext1 control mode Selects the operating mode for external control location Speed
EXT1 in vector motor control mode.
Zero None. 0
Speed Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque 1
reference speed control (output of the speed reference
chain).
Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque 2
ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
Minimum Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque 3
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01
Torque reference speed control) and the torque reference
(26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and selects the smaller of the
two.
If speed error becomes negative, the drive follows the
speed controller output until speed error becomes positive
again. This prevents the drive from accelerating
uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control.
Maximum Combination of selections Speed and Torque: the torque 4
selector compares the speed controller output (25.01
Torque reference speed control) and the torque reference
(26.74 Torque ref ramp out) and selects the greater of the
two.
If speed error becomes positive, the drive follows the
speed controller output until speed error becomes
negative again. This prevents the drive from accelerating
uncontrollably if the load is lost in torque control.
19.14 Ext2 control mode Selects the operating mode for external control location Speed
EXT2 in vector motor control mode.
For the selections, see parameter 19.12 Ext1 control
mode.
19.16 Local control mode Selects the operating mode for local control in vector Speed
motor control mode.
Speed Speed control. The torque reference used is 25.01 Torque 0
reference speed control (output of the speed reference
chain).
Torque Torque control. The torque reference used is 26.74 Torque 1
ref ramp out (output of the torque reference chain).
ACS180 [Link] Page 142 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

142 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
19.17 Local control disable Enables/disables local control (start and stop buttons on No
the control panel, and the local controls on the PC tool).
WARNING! Before disabling local control, ensure
that the control panel is not needed for stopping
the drive.
No Local control enabled. 0
Yes Local control disabled. 1
20
20 Start/stop/direction Start/stop/direction and run/start/jog enable signal source
selection; positive/negative reference enable signal
source selection.
For information on control locations, see section Local
and external control locations (page 60).
20.01 Ext1 commands Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands In1 Start; In2
for external control location 1 (EXT1). Dir
See also parameters 20.02…20.05. See parameter 20.21
for the determination of the actual direction.
Not selected No start or stop command sources selected. 0
In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1
parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1 source. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 (20.03) Command

0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
Start
1 (20.02 = Level)
0 Stop

In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the start 2
signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2

Command
(20.03) (20.04)
0 Any Stop
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge) 0 Start forward
1 (20.02 = Level) 1 Start reverse

In1 Start fwd; In2 Start The source selected by 20.03 Ext1 in1 source is the 3
rev forward start signal; the source selected by 20.04 Ext1 in2
source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2

Command
(20.03) (20.04)
0 0 Stop
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
0 Start forward
1 (20.02 = Level)
0 -> 1 (20.02 = Edge)
0 Start reverse
1 (20.02 = Level)
1 1 Stop
ACS180 [Link] Page 143 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 143

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 4
by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2
source. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2

Command
(20.03) (20.04)
0 -> 1 1 Start
Any 0 Stop

Notes:
• Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect
with this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the
control panel are disabled.
In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 5
In3 Dir by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source and 20.04 Ext1 in2
source. The source selected by 20.05 Ext1 in3 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of

source 1 source 2 source 3 Command
(20.03) (20.04) (20.05)
0 -> 1 1 0 Start forward
0 -> 1 1 1 Start reverse
Any 0 Any Stop

Notes:
• Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no effect
with this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the
control panel are disabled.
In1P Start fwd; In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 6
Start rev; In3 Stop by parameters 20.03 Ext1 in1 source, 20.04 Ext1 in2
source and 20.05 Ext1 in3 source. The source selected by
20.05 Ext1 in3 source determines the direction. The state
transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of

source 1 source 2 source 3 Command
(20.03) (20.04) (20.05)
0 -> 1 Any 1 Start forward
Any 0 -> 1 1 Start reverse
Any Any 0 Stop
Note: Parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger type has no
effect with this setting.
Control panel Start; stop and direction commands through control panel; 7
when EXT1 is active. Applies also for PC-Tool when it is
connected via panel port.
Embedded fieldbus The start and stop commands are taken from the 10
embedded fieldbus interface.
Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this
setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger
type.
ACS180 [Link] Page 144 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

144 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Integrated Panel Start; stop and direction commands from Integrated Panel 15
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type Defines whether the start signal for external control Level
location EXT1 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse-type start
signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of
parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands.
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0
Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
20.03 Ext1 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. DI1
Always off 0 (always off). 0
Always on 1 (always on). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
20.04 Ext1 in2 source Selects source 2 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. DI2
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1
in1 source.
20.05 Ext1 in3 source Selects source 3 for parameter 20.01 Ext1 commands. Always off
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1
in1 source.
20.06 Ext2 commands Selects the source of start, stop and direction commands Not selected
for external control location 2 (EXT2).
See also parameters 20.07…20.10. See parameter 20.21
for the determination of the actual direction.
Not selected No start or stop command sources selected. 0
In1 Start The source of the start and stop commands is selected by 1
parameter 20.08 Ext2 in1 source. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 (20.08) Command

0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
Start
1 (20.07 = Level)
0 Stop
ACS180 [Link] Page 145 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 145

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
In1 Start; In2 Dir The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the start 2
signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext2 in2 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2

Command
(20.08) (20.09)
0 Any Stop
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge) 0 Start forward
1 (20.07 = Level) 1 Start reverse

In1 Start fwd; In2 Start The source selected by 20.08 Ext2 in1 source is the 3
rev forward start signal; the source selected by 20.09 Ext1 in2
source is the reverse start signal. The state transitions of
the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2

Command
(20.08) (20.09)
0 0 Stop
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
0 Start forward
1 (20.07 = Level)
0 -> 1 (20.07 = Edge)
0 Start reverse
1 (20.07 = Level)
1 1 Stop

In1P Start; In2 Stop The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 4
by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext1 in2
source. The state transitions of the source bits are
interpreted as follows:

State of source 1 State of source 2

Command
(20.08) (20.09)
0 -> 1 1 Start
Any 0 Stop

Notes:
• Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect
with this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the
control panel are disabled.
ACS180 [Link] Page 146 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

146 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
In1P Start; In2 Stop; The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 5
In3 Dir by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source and 20.09 Ext1 in2
source. The source selected by 20.10 Ext2 in3 source
determines the direction. The state transitions of the
source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of

source 1 source 2 source 3 Command
(20.08) (20.09) (20.10)
0 -> 1 1 0 Start forward
0 -> 1 1 1 Start reverse
Any 0 Any Stop
Notes:
• Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no effect
with this setting.
• When source 2 is 0, the Start and Stop keys on the
control panel are disabled.
In1P Start fwd; In2P The sources of the start and stop commands are selected 6
Start rev; In3 Stop by parameters 20.08 Ext2 in1 source, 20.09 Ext1 in2
source and 20.10 Ext2 in3 source. The source selected by
20.10 Ext2 in3 source determines the direction. The state
transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:

State of State of State of

source 1 source 2 source 3 Command
(20.08) (20.09) (20.10)
0 -> 1 Any 1 Start forward
Any 0 -> 1 1 Start reverse
Any Any 0 Stop

Note: Parameter 20.07 Ext2 start trigger type has no

effect with this setting.
Control panel Start; stop and direction commands through control panel; 7
when EXT1 is active. Applies also for PC-Tool when it is
connected via panel port.
Embedded fieldbus Start; stop and direction commands through embedded 10
fieldbus protocol when EXT1 is active.
Note: The start signal is always level-triggered with this
setting regardless of parameter 20.02 Ext1 start trigger
type.
Integrated Panel Start; stop and direction commands from Integrated Panel 15
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type Defines whether the start signal for external control Level
location EXT2 is edge-triggered or level-triggered.
Note: This parameter is not effective if a pulse-type start
signal is selected. See the descriptions of the selections of
parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands.
Edge The start signal is edge-triggered. 0
Level The start signal is level-triggered. 1
20.08 Ext2 in1 source Selects source 1 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Always off
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
ACS180 [Link] Page 147 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 147

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
20.09 Ext2 in2 source Selects source 2 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Always off
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
20.10 Ext2 in3 source Selects source 3 for parameter 20.06 Ext2 commands. Always off
For the available selections, see parameter 20.03 Ext1 in1
source.
20.11 Run enable stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when the run enable Coast
signal switches off.
The source of the run enable signal is selected by
parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the 0
drive. The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, ensure
it is safe to stop the drive by coasting.
Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter 1
group 23 Speed reference ramp.
Torque limit Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 2
30.20).
20.12 Run enable 1 source Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the Selected
run enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start. If
already running, the drive will stop according to the setting
of parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode.
1 = Run enable signal on.
See also parameter 20.19 Enable start command
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
EFB MCW bit 3 Control word bit 3 received through the embedded 32
fieldbus interface.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
20.19 Enable start command Selects the source for the start enable signal. On
1 = Start enable.
With the signal switched off, any drive start command is
inhibited. (Switching the signal off while the drive is
running will not stop the drive.)
See also parameter 20.12 Run enable 1 source.
Off 0. 0
ACS180 [Link] Page 148 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

148 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
On 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
ACS180 [Link] Page 149 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 149

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
20.21 Direction Reference direction lock. Defines the direction of the drive Request
rather than the sign of the reference, except in some
cases.
In the table the actual drive rotation is shown as a function
of parameter 20.21 Direction and Direction command
(from parameter 20.01 Ext2 commands or 20.06 Ext2
commands).

Direction command = Direction command = Direction command not

Forward Reverse defined
Par. 20.21
Direction = Forward Forward Forward
Forward
Par. 20.21
Direction = Reverse Reverse Reverse
Reverse
Par. 20.21 Forward, but Reverse, but
Direction = • If reference from • If reference from
Request Constant, Motor Constant, PID or Jogging
potentiometer, PID, Safe reference, reference
speed, Last, Jogging or used as is.
Panel reference, • If reference from the Forward
reference used as is. network, Panel, Analog
• If reference from the input, Motor
network, reference used potentiometer, Safe
as is. speed or Last reference,
reference multiplied by
-1.
Request In external control the direction is selected by a direction 0
command (parameter 20.01 Ext2 commands or 20.06
Ext2 commands).
If the reference comes from Constant (constant
speeds/frequencies), Motor potentiometer, PID, Fail, Last
(last speed reference), Jogging (jogging speed) or Panel
reference, the reference is used as is.
If the reference comes from a fieldbus:
• if the direction command is forward, the reference is
used as is
• if the direction command is reverse, the reference is
multiplied by -1.
Forward Motor rotates forward regardless of the sign of the 1
external reference. (Negative reference values are
replaced by zero. Positive reference values are used as
is.)
Reverse Motor rotates reverse regardless of the sign of the 2
external reference. (Negative reference values are
replaced by zero. Positive reference values are multiplied
by -1.)
ACS180 [Link] Page 150 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

150 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
20.22 Enable to rotate Setting this parameter to 0 stops motor rotating but does Selected
not affect any other conditions for rotating. Setting the
parameter back to 1 starts motor rotating again.
This parameter can be used for example with a signal
from some external equipment to prevent the motor
rotating before the equipment is ready.
When this parameter is 0 (rotating of the motor is
disabled), bit 13 of parameter 06.16 Drive status word 1
is set to 0.
Not selected 0 (always off). 0
Selected 1 (always on). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
20.25 Jogging enable Selects the source for a jog enable signal. Not selected
(The sources for jogging activation signals are selected by
parameters 20.26 Jogging 1 start source and 20.27
Jogging 2 start source.)
1 = Jogging is enabled.
0 = Jogging is disabled.
Notes:
• Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
• Jogging can be enabled only when no start command
from an external control location is active. On the other
hand, if jogging is already enabled, the drive cannot be
started from an external control location (apart from
inching commands through fieldbus).
See section Rush control on page 73.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
ACS180 [Link] Page 151 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 151

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
20.26 Jogging 1 start source If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the Not selected
source for the activation of jogging function 1. (Jogging
function 1 can also be activated through fieldbus
regardless of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 1 active.
Notes:
• Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
• If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that was
activated first has priority.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
20.27 Jogging 2 start source If enabled by parameter 20.25 Jogging enable, selects the Not selected
source for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging
function 2 can also be activated through fieldbus
regardless of parameter 20.25.)
1 = Jogging 2 active.
For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jogging 1 start
source.
Notes:
• Jogging is supported in vector control mode only.
• If both jogging 1 and 2 are activated, the one that was
activated first has priority.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
For the selections, see parameter 20.26 Jogging 1 start
source.
20.30 Enable signals Selects the enable signal warnings that will be 0000h
warning function suppressed. This parameter can be used to prevent these
warnings from being added to the event log. Whenever a
bit of this parameter is set to 1, the corresponding warning
is suppressed.
ACS180 [Link] Page 152 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

152 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16

Bit Name Description

0 Enable to rotate 1 = Warning AFED Enable to rotate is suppressed.
1 Run enable missing 1 = Warning AFEB Run enable missing is suppressed.
3…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Word for disabling enable signal warnings. 1=1

21
21 Start/stop mode Start and stop modes; emergency stop mode and signal
source selection; DC magnetization settings.
21.01 Start mode Selects the motor start function for the vector motor Const time
control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to
Vector.
Notes:
• The start function for the scalar motor control mode is
selected by parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode.
• Starting into a rotating motor is not possible when DC
magnetizing is selected (Fast or Const time).
• With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode
must be used.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also section DC magnetization on page 82.
Fast The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre- 0
magnetizing time is determined automatically, typically
200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size. Select this mode
if a high break-away torque is required.
Const time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre- 1
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if
constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the
motor start must be synchronized with the release of a
mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the
highest possible break-away torque when the pre-
magnetizing time is set long enough.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications
where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that
the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most 2
cases. It includes the flying start function (starting into a
rotating motor) and the automatic restart function. The
drive motor control program identifies the flux as well as
the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor
instantly under all conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.04 Motor control mode is set to
Scalar, no flying start or automatic restart is possible
unless parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to
Automatic.
ACS180 [Link] Page 153 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 153

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
21.02 Magnetization time Defines the pre-magnetization time when 500 ms
• parameter 21.01 Start mode is set to Const time (in
vector motor control mode), or
• parameter 21.19 Scalar start mode is set to Const time
(in scalar motor control mode).
After the start command, the drive automatically
premagnetizes the motor for the set time. To ensure full
magnetizing, set this parameter to the same value as, or
higher than, the rotor time constant. If not known, use the
rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:

Motor rated power Constant magnetizing time

< 1 kW > 50 to 100 ms
1 to 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms

Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive

is running.
0…10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time. 1 = 1 ms
21.03 Stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when a stop Ramp
command is received.
Additional braking is possible by selecting flux braking
(see parameter 97.05 Flux braking).
Coast Stop by switching off the output semiconductors of the 0
drive. The motor coasts to a stop.
WARNING! If a mechanical brake is used, make
sure it is safe to stop the drive by coasting.
Ramp Stop along the active deceleration ramp. See parameter 1
group 23 Speed reference ramp or 28 Frequency
reference chain.
Torque limit Stop according to torque limits (parameters 30.19 and 2
30.20). This mode is only possible in vector motor control
mode.
21.04 Emergency stop mode Selects the way the motor is stopped when an emergency Ramp stop
stop command is received. (Off1)
The source of the emergency stop signal is selected by
parameter 21.05 Emergency stop source.
Ramp stop (Off1) With the drive running: 0
• 1 = Normal operation.
• 0 = Normal stop along the standard deceleration ramp
defined for the particular reference type (see section
Reference ramping on page 68). After the drive has
stopped, it can be restarted by removing the
emergency stop signal and switching the start signal
from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed.
• 0 = Starting not allowed.
ACS180 [Link] Page 154 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

154 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Coast stop (Off2) With the drive running: 1
• 1 = Normal operation.
• 0 = Stop by coasting.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed.
• 0 = Starting not allowed.
Eme ramp stop (Off3) With the drive running: 2
• 1 = Normal operation
• 0 = Stop by ramping along emergency stop ramp
defined by parameter 23.23 Emergency stop time. After
the drive has stopped, it can be restarted by removing
the emergency stop signal and switching the start
signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed
• 0 = Starting not allowed
21.05 Emergency stop Selects the source of the emergency stop signal. The stop Inactive
source mode is selected by parameter 21.04 Emergency stop (true)
mode.
0 = Emergency stop active
1 = Normal operation
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
Active (false) 0. 0
Inactive (true) 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
21.06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along a 30.00 rpm
speed ramp (when ramped stop is selected or emergency
stop time is used) until the defined zero speed limit is
reached. After the zero speed delay, the motor coasts to a
stop.
0.00…30000.00 rpm Zero speed limit. See par.
46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 155 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 155

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
21.07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The 0 ms
function is useful in applications where a smooth and
quick restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive
knows the rotor position accurately.
Without zero speed delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates
along a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the
value of parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, inverter
modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to a standstill.

Speed

Speed controller switched off

Motor coasts to a stop.

21.06 Zero speed limit

Time

With zero speed delay:

The drive receives a stop command and decelerates
along a ramp. When actual motor speed falls below the
value of parameter 21.06 Zero speed limit, the zero speed
delay function activates. During the delay the function
keeps the speed controller live: the inverter modulates,
motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick
restart. Zero speed delay can be used e.g. with the
jogging function.

Speed
Speed controller remains
active. Motor is decelerated to
true zero speed.

21.06 Zero speed limit

Delay Time

0…30000 ms Zero speed delay. 1 = 1 ms

ACS180 [Link] Page 156 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

156 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
21.08 DC current control Activates/deactivates the DC hold and post-magnetization 0b0000
functions. See section DC magnetization on page 82.
Note: DC magnetization causes the motor to heat up. In
applications where long DC magnetization times are
required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If
the DC magnetization period is long, DC magnetization
cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant
load is applied to the motor.

Bit Name Value

0 DC hold 1 = DC hold. See section DC hold on page 82.
Note: The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is switched
off.
1 Post- 1 = Post-magnetization. See section Post-magnetization on page 83.
magnetization Note: Post-magnetization is only available when ramping is the selected
stop mode (see parameter 21.03 Stop mode).
2 DC brake 1 = Enable DC brake.
3…15 Reserved

0b0000…0b1111 DC magnetization selection. 1=1

21.09 DC hold speed Defines the DC hold speed in speed control mode. See 5.00 rpm
parameter 21.08 DC current control, and section DC hold
on page 82.
0.00…1000.00 rpm DC hold speed. See par.
46.01
21.10 DC current reference Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor 30.0%
nominal current. See parameter 21.08 DC current control,
and section DC magnetization on page 82.
After 100 s post-magnetization time, the maximum
magnetization current is limited to the magnetization
current corresponding to the actual flux reference.
0.0…100.0% DC hold current. 1 = 1%
21.11 Post magnetization Defines the length of time for which post-magnetization is 0s
time active after stopping the motor. The magnetization current
is defined by parameter 21.10 DC current reference.
See parameter 21.08 DC current control
0…3000 s Post-magnetization time. 1=1s
21.14 Pre-heating input Selects the source for triggering pre-heating for the motor. Off
source The status of the pre-heating is shown as bit 2 of 06.21
Drive status word 3.
Notes:
• The heating function requires that STO is not triggered.
• The heating function requires that the drive is not
faulted.
• Pre-heating uses DC hold to produce current.
Off 0. Pre-heating is always deactivated. 0
On 1. Pre-heating is always activated when the drive is 1
stopped.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
ACS180 [Link] Page 157 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 157

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 230). 8
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 230). 9
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status (see page 230). 10
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
21.15 Pre-heating time delay Time delay before pre-heating starts after the drive is 60 s
stopped.
10...3000 s Pre-heating time delay. 1=1s
21.16 Pre-heating current Defines the DC current used to heat the motor. The value 0.0%
is in percent of the nominal motor current.
0.0…30.0% Pre-heating current. 1 = 1%
21.18 Auto restart time The motor can be automatically started after a short 10.0 s
supply power failure using the automatic restart function.
See section Automatic restart on page 103.
When this parameter is set to 0.0 seconds, automatic
restarting is disabled. Otherwise, the parameter defines
the maximum duration of the power failure after which
restarting is attempted. Note that this time also includes
the DC pre-charging delay.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make
sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The
function restarts the drive automatically and
continues operation after a supply break.
0.0 s Automatic restart disabled. 0
0.0…10.0 s Maximum power failure duration. 1=1s
21.19 Scalar start mode Selects the motor start function for the scalar motor Const time
control mode, ie. when 99.04 Motor control mode is set to
Scalar.
Notes:
• The start function for the vector motor control mode is
selected by parameter 21.01 Start mode.
• With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start mode
must be used.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
See also section DC magnetization on page 82.
Normal Immediate start from zero speed. 0
ACS180 [Link] Page 158 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

158 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Const time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre- 1
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 21.02
Magnetization time. This mode should be selected if
constant pre-magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the
motor start must be synchronized with the release of a
mechanical brake). This setting also guarantees the
highest possible break-away torque when the pre-
magnetizing time is set long enough.
Note: This mode cannot be used to start into a rotating
motor.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications
where a full break-away torque is essential, ensure that
the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
Automatic The drive automatically selects the correct output 2
frequency to start a rotating motor. This is useful for flying
starts: if the motor is already rotating, the drive will start
smoothly at the current frequency.
Note: Cannot be used in multimotor systems.
Torque boost Torque boost is applied at start, ending when output 3
frequency exceeds 40% of nominal frequency or when
output frequency is equal to reference.
Automatic + boost If the Flystart routine does not detect rotating motor, 4
torque boost is applied.
Flying start The drive automatically selects the correct output 5
frequency to start a rotating motor. If the motor is already
rotating, drive will start smoothly at the current frequency.
The mode will start the motor with vector control and
switch to scalar control on the fly when the motor speed
has been found. Compared to the Automatic start mode,
Flying start detects the motor speed faster. Flying start
requires more accurate information about motor model.
Therefore standstill ID run is done automatically when the
drive is started for the first time after selecting Flying start.
Motor plate values should be accurate. Wrong plate
values may decrease the starting performance.
Note: Flying start cannot be used in multimotor systems.
Note: During flying start, the drive will at first run in vector
control mode. This is why, when using flying start, the
drive nominal current setting must be in the allowed range
for vector control mode. See parameter 99.06.
Flying start+boost Flying start with torque boost. 6
Flying start is performed first and the motor is magnetized.
If the speed is found to be zero, torque boost is applied.
21.21 DC hold frequency Defines the DC hold frequency, which is used instead of 5.00 Hz
parameter 21.09 DC hold speed when the operating mode
in use is Scalar frequency mode. See parameters 19.01
Actual operation mode, 21.08 DC current control, and
section DC hold on page 82.
0.00…1000.00 Hz DC hold frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
ACS180 [Link] Page 159 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 159

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
21.22 Start delay Defines the start delay. After the conditions for start have 0.00 s
been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed
and then starts the motor. During the delay, warning AFE9
Start delay is shown.
Start delay can be used with all start modes.
0.00…60.00 s Start delay 1=1s
21.23 Smooth start Enables smooth start function. Smooth start function Disabled
restricts the motor current below the limit defined by
parameter 21.24 Smooth start current when the motor
speed is below 21.25 Smooth start speed.
Warning: Long run operation of smooth start at low
speed with high current may heat the motor.
Disabled Smooth start disabled 0
Enabled always Smooth start function is always active when speed is 1
below limit.
Start only Smooth start function is only active after start while the 2
speed is below limit.
21.24 Smooth start current Current applied to motor when the smooth start is active. 50.0%
10.0... 100.0% 1=1%
21.25 Smooth start speed Set the smooth start speed when the current is applied. 10.0%
2.0... 100.0% 1=1%
21.26 Torque boost current Defines the maximum supplied current to motor during 100.0%
‘Torque boost’ –starting mode. Parameter value is in
percent of the motor nominal current. Nominal value of the
parameter is 100.0%. ‘Torque boost’ –starting mode can
be used only when motor control mode is ‘Scalar’. Torque
boost is only applied at start, ending when output
frequency exceeds 40% of nominal frequency or when
output frequency is equal to reference.
15.0... 300.0% 0.01 = 1%
21.27 Torque boost time Defines the minimum and maximum torque boost time. 20.0 s
If torque boost time is less than 40% of frequency
acceleration time (see parameters 28.72 and 28.74),
torque boost time is set at 40% of the frequency
acceleration time.
0.0... 60.0s Nominal motor time. 1=1s
21.30 Speed compensated Selects the method used to stop the drive. See also Off
stop mode section Speed compensated stop on page 85.
Speed compensated stop is active only if
• the operation mode is not torque, and
• parameter 21.03 Stop mode is Ramp, or
• parameter 20.11 Run enable stop mode is Ramp (in
case Run enable is missing).
Off Stop according parameter 21.03 Stop mode, no speed 0
compensated stop.
ACS180 [Link] Page 160 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

160 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Speed comp FWD If the direction of rotation is forward, speed compensation 1
is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is
compensated by running the drive with current speed
before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
If the direction of rotation is reverse, the drive is stopped
along a ramp.
Speed comp REV If the direction of rotation is reverse, speed compensation 2
is used for constant distance braking. Speed difference
(between used speed and maximum speed) is
compensated by running the drive with current speed
before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
If the direction of rotation is forward, the drive is stopped
along a ramp.
Speed comp bipolar Regardless of the direction of rotation, speed 3
compensation is used for constant distance braking.
Speed difference (between used speed and maximum
speed) is compensated by running the drive with current
speed before the motor is stopped along a ramp.
21.31 Speed comp stop This delay adds distance to the total distance traveled 0.00 s
delay during a stop from maximum speed. It is used to adjust
the distance to match requirements so that the distance
traveled is not solely determined by the deceleration rate.
0.00…1000.00 s Speed delay. 1=1s
21.32 Speed comp stop This parameter sets a speed threshold below which the 10%
threshold Speed compensated stop feature is disabled. In this
speed region, the speed compensated stop is not
attempted and the drive stops as it would, using the ramp
option.
0…100% Speed threshold as a percent of the motor nominal speed. 1 = 1%
22
22 Speed reference Speed reference selection; motor potentiometer settings.
selection See the control chain diagrams on pages 394…398.
22.01 Speed ref unlimited Displays the output of the speed reference selection 0.00 rpm
block. See the control chain diagram on page 394.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Value of the selected speed reference. See par.
rpm 46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 161 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 161

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Selects Ext1 speed reference source 1. Integrated
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and panel (ref
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.13 saved)
Ext1 speed function) applied to the two signals creates an
Ext1 reference (A in the figure below).
A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can
be used to switch between Ext1 reference and the
corresponding Ext2 reference defined by parameters
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1, 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 and 22.20
Ext2 speed function (B in the figure below).
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See Control macros on page 43.

22.11
22.13
0
AI Ref1
FB
… … ADD
Other SUB
MUL A
MIN Ext1
22.12
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
19.11
Other
0
22.86
22.18 1
22.20
0
AI Ref1
FB
… … ADD
Ext2
Other SUB
MUL
B
MIN
22.19
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
Other

Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1. 8
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2. 9
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
ACS180 [Link] Page 162 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

162 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference for the previous 19
copied) control location is used as the reference when the control
location changes if the references for the two locations are
of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID);
otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2 Selects Ext1 speed reference source 2. Zero
For the diagram of reference source selection, see
parameter 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1. 8
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2. 9
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
ACS180 [Link] Page 163 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 163

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference for the previous 19
copied) control location is used as the reference when the control
location changes if the references for the two locations are
of the same type (eg frequency/speed/torque/PID);
otherwise, the actual signal is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
22.13 Ext1 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
sources selected by parameters 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1
and 22.12 Ext1 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.11 Ext1
speed ref1.
Ref1 Signal selected by 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 is used as speed 0
reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as speed 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] - [22.12 Ext1 2
speed ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
speed reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as speed 5
reference 1.
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 Selects Ext2 speed reference source 1. Zero
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. A mathematical function (22.20
Ext2 speed function) applied to the two signals creates an
Ext2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero None. 0
ACS180 [Link] Page 164 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

164 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value. 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1. 8
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2. 9
Motor potentiometer 22.19 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 19
copied) for the previous control location is used as the reference
when the control location changes if the references for the
two locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal
is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 Selects Ext2 speed reference source 2. Zero
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1.
22.20 Ext2 speed function Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
sources selected by parameters 22.18 Ext2 speed ref1
and 22.19 Ext2 speed ref2. See diagram at 22.18 Ext2
speed ref1.
Ref1 Signal selected by Ext2 speed ref1 is used as speed 0
reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as speed 1
reference 1.
ACS180 [Link] Page 165 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 165

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([22.11 Ext1 speed ref1] - [22.12 Ext1 2
speed ref2]) of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
speed reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as speed 5
reference 1.
22.21 Constant speed Determines how constant speeds are selected, and 0b0001
function whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not
when applying a constant speed.

Bit Name Information

0 Constant speed 1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources
mode defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24.
0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by
the sources defined by parameters 22.22, 22.23 and 22.24 respectively.
In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller number takes
priority.
1 Direction 1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed, the
enable sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 22.26…22.32) is
multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This
effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse) constant
speeds if all values in 22.26…22.32 are positive.
WARNING! If the direction signal is reverse and the active
constant speed is negative, the drive will run in the forward
direction.
0 = According to Par: The running direction for the constant frequency is
determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters
28.26…28.32).
2 Speed step 1 = Speed step enable; 0 = Speed step disable
3…15 Reserved

0b0000...ob1111 Constant speed configuration word. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 166 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

166 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
22.22 Constant speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is DI2
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
speed 1.
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See Control macros on page 43.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.23
Constant speed sel2 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3
select three sources whose states activate constant
speeds as follows:

Source defined Source defined Source defined

Constant speed active
by par. 22.22 by par. 22.23 by par. 22.24
0 0 0 None
1 0 0 Constant speed 1
0 1 0 Constant speed 2
1 1 0 Constant speed 3
0 0 1 Constant speed 4
1 0 1 Constant speed 5
0 1 1 Constant speed 6
1 1 1 Constant speed 7

Always off 0 (always off). 0

Always on 1 (always on). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
22.23 Constant speed sel2 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is Always off
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
speed 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22
Constant speed sel1 and 22.24 Constant speed sel3
select three sources that are used to activate constant
speeds.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed
sel1.
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See Control macros on page 43.
ACS180 [Link] Page 167 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 167

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
22.24 Constant speed sel3 When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is Always off
0 (Separate), selects a source that activates constant
speed 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 22.21 Constant speed function is
1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters 22.22
Constant speed sel1 and 22.23 Constant speed sel2
select three sources that are used to activate constant
speeds. See table at parameter 22.22 Constant speed
sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 22.22 Constant speed
sel1.
22.26 Constant speed 1 Defines constant speed 1 (the speed the motor will turn 300.00 rpm
when constant speed 1 is selected).
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 1. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.27 Constant speed 2 Defines constant speed 2. 600.00 rpm
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 2. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.28 Constant speed 3 Defines constant speed 3. 900.00 rpm
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 3. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.29 Constant speed 4 Defines constant speed 4. 1200.00 rpm
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 4. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.30 Constant speed 5 Defines constant speed 5. 1500.00 rpm
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 5. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.31 Constant speed 6 Defines constant speed 6. 2400.00 rpm
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 6. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.32 Constant speed 7 Defines constant speed 7. 3000.00 rpm
-30000.00… 30000.00 Constant speed 7. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.41 Speed ref safe Defines a safe speed reference value that is used with 0.00 rpm
supervision functions such as
• 12.03 AI supervision function
• 49.05 Communication loss action
-30000.00… 30000.00 Safe speed reference. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.42 Jogging 1 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1. For 0.00 rpm
more information on jogging, see page 74.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference for jogging function 1. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2. For 0.00 rpm
more information on jogging, see page 74.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference for jogging function 2. See par.
rpm 46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 168 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

168 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
22.51 Critical speed function Enables/disables the critical speeds function. Also 0000h
determines whether the specified ranges are effective in
both rotating directions or not.
See also section Critical speeds/frequencies on page 69.

Bit Name Information

0 Enable 1 = Enable: Critical speeds enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical speeds disabled.
1 Sign mode 1 = Signed: The signs of parameters 22.52… 22.57 are taken into
account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 22.52… 22.57 are handled as absolute
values. Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.
2…15 Reserved

0000h...FFFFh Critical speeds configuration word. 1=1

22.52 Critical speed 1 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value
of 22.53 Critical speed 1 high.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Low limit for critical speed 1. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.53 Critical speed 1 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 22.52.
-30000.00… 30000.00 High limit for critical speed 1. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.54 Critical speed 2 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 2. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value
of parameter 22.55.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Low limit for critical speed 2. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.55 Critical speed 2 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 2. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of parameter 22.54.
-30000.00… 30000.00 High limit for critical speed 2. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.56 Critical speed 3 low Defines the low limit for critical speed range 3. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value
of parameter 22.57 .
-30000.00… 30000.00 Low limit for critical speed 3. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.57 Critical speed 3 high Defines the high limit for critical speed range 3. 0.00 rpm
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of parameter 22.56.
-30000.00… 30000.00 High limit for critical speed 3. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.71 Motor potentiometer Activates and selects the mode of the motor Disabled
function potentiometer.
See section Speed control performance figures in chapter
Program features.
Disabled Motor potentiometer is disabled and its value set to 0. 0
ACS180 [Link] Page 169 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 169

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Enabled (init at stop/ When enabled, the motor potentiometer first adopts the 1
power-up) value defined by parameter 22.72. The value can then be
adjusted from the up and down sources defined by
parameters 22.73 and 22.74.
A power cycle will reset the motor potentiometer to the
predefined initial value (22.72).
Enabled (resume As Enabled (init at stop/ power-up), but the motor 2
always) potentiometer value is retained over a power cycle.
Enabled (init to actual) Whenever another reference source is selected, the value 3
of the motor potentiometer follows that reference. After
the source of reference returns to the motor
potentiometer, its value can again be changed by the up
and down sources (defined by 22.73 and 22.74).
22.72 Motor potentiometer Defines an initial value (starting point) for the motor 0.00
initial value potentiometer. See the selections of parameter 22.71.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Initial value for motor potentiometer. 1=1
22.73 Motor potentiometer Selects the source of motor potentiometer up signal. Not selected
up source 0 = No change
1 = Increase motor potentiometer value. (If both the up
and down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not
change.)
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
22.74 Motor potentiometer Selects the source of motor potentiometer down signal. Not selected
down source 0 = No change
1 = Decrease motor potentiometer value. (If both the up
and down sources are on, the potentiometer value will not
change.)
For the selections, see parameter 22.73.
22.75 Motor potentiometer Defines the change rate of the motor potentiometer. This 40.0 s
ramp time parameter specifies the time required for the motor
potentiometer to change from minimum (parameter 22.76)
to maximum (parameter 22.77). The same change rate
applies in both directions.
0.0…3600.0 s Motor potentiometer change time. 1=1s
ACS180 [Link] Page 170 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

170 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
22.76 Motor potentiometer Defines the minimum value of the motor potentiometer. -50.00
min value Note: If vector control mode is used, the value of this
parameter must be changed.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Motor potentiometer minimum. 1=1
22.77 Motor potentiometer Defines the maximum value of the motor potentiometer. 50.00
max value Note: If vector control mode is used, the value of this
parameter must be changed.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Motor potentiometer maximum. 1=1
22.80 Motor potentiometer Shows the output of the motor potentiometer function. -
ref act (The motor potentiometer is configured using parameters
22.71…22.74.)
This parameter is read-only.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Value of motor potentiometer. 1=1
22.86 Speed reference act 6 Displays the value of the speed reference (Ext1 or Ext2) 0.00 rpm
that has been selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection. See
diagram at 22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 or the control chain
diagram on page 394.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference after additive 2. See par.
rpm 46.01
22.87 Speed reference act 7 Displays the value of speed reference before application 0.00 rpm
of critical speeds. See the control chain diagram on page
394.
The value is received from 22.86 Speed reference act 6
unless overridden by
• any constant speed
• a jogging reference
• network control reference
• control panel reference
• safe speed reference.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference before application of critical speeds. See par.
rpm 46.01
23
23 Speed reference ramp Speed reference ramp settings (programming of the
acceleration and deceleration rates for the drive).
See the control chain diagram on page 396.
23.01 Speed ref ramp input Displays the used speed reference (in rpm) before it -
enters the ramping and shaping functions. See the control
chain diagram on page 396.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference before ramping and shaping. See par.
rpm 46.01
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Displays the ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm. -
See the control chain diagram on page 396.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference after ramping and shaping. See par.
rpm 46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 171 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 171

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
23.11 Ramp set selection Selects the source that switches between the two sets of DI1
acceleration/deceleration ramp times defined by
parameters 23.12… 23.15
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are active
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are active.
Acc/Dec time 1 0. 0
Acc/Dec time 2 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
EFB DCU CW bit 10 Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received 20
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the 3.000 s
speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 46.01 Speed scaling (not to parameter 30.12
Maximum speed).
If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
acceleration rate.
If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive torque limits.
0.000 …1800.000 s Acceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
23.13 Deceleration time 1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the 3.000 s
speed to change from the speed defined by parameter
46.01 Speed scaling (not from parameter 30.12 Maximum
speed) to zero.
If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the
reference.
If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration
rate, the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.
If the deceleration rate is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to
exceed drive torque limits (or not to exceed a safe DC link
voltage). If there is any doubt about the deceleration time
being too short, ensure that DC overvoltage control is on
(parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high
inertia application, the drive should be equipped with
braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake
resistor.
0.000 …1800.000 s Deceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
23.14 Acceleration time 2 Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 23.12 60.000 s
Acceleration time 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Acceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 172 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

172 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
23.15 Deceleration time 2 Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 23.13 60.000 s
Deceleration time 1.
0.000 …1800.000 s Deceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
23.20 Acc time jogging Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function ie. 60.000 s
the time required for the speed to change from zero to the
speed value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
See section Rush control on page 73.
0.000 …1800.000 s Acceleration time for jogging. 10 = 1 s
23.21 Dec time jogging Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function ie. 60.000 s
the time required for the speed to change from the speed
value defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling to zero.
See section Rush control on page 73.
0.000 …1800.000 s Deceleration time for jogging. 10 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 173 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 173

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
23.23 Emergency stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an 3.000 s
emergency stop Off3 is activated (ie. the time required for
the speed to change from the speed value defined by
parameter 46.01 Speed scaling or 46.02 Frequency
scaling to zero). Emergency stop mode and activation
source are selected by parameters 21.04 Emergency stop
mode and 21.05 Emergency stop source respectively.
Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus.
Note:
• Emergency stop Off1 uses the standard deceleration
ramp as defined by parameters 23.11…23.15.
• The same parameter value is also used in frequency
control mode (ramp parameters 28.71…28.75).
0.000 …1800.000 s Emergency stop Off3 deceleration time. 10 = 1 s
23.28 Variable slope enable Activates the variable slope function, which controls the Off
slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference
change. This allows for a constantly variable ramp rate to
be generated, instead of just the standard two ramps
normally available.
If the update interval of the signal from an external control
system and the variable slope rate (23.32 Variable slope
rate) are equal, speed reference (23.02 Speed ref ramp
output) is a straight line.

Speed reference

Speed
reference

23.02 Speed ref ramp output

Time

t = update interval of signal from external control system

A = speed reference change during t

This function is only active in remote control.

Off Variable slope disabled. 0
On Variable slope enabled (not available in local control). 1
23.29 Variable slope rate Defines the rate of the speed reference change when 50 ms
variable slope is enabled by parameter 23.28 Variable
slope enable.
For the best result, enter the reference update interval into
this parameter.
2…30000 ms Variable slope rate. 1 = 1 ms
ACS180 [Link] Page 174 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

174 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
23.32 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration 0.000 s
ramps used with the set 1.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are
ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear
part in between.
Acceleration:
Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s
Speed

Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s

S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s

S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s

Time

Deceleration:
Speed
S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s

Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
23.32 > 0 s

Linear ramp:
23.32 = 0 s

Time

0.100…1800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and 10 = 1 s

deceleration.
23.33 Shape time 2 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration 0.000 s
ramps used with the set 2. See parameter 23.32 Shape
time 1.
0.100…1800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and 10 = 1 s
deceleration.
ACS180 [Link] Page 175 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 175

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
24
24 Speed reference Speed error calculation; speed error window control
conditioning configuration; speed error step.
See the control chain diagram on page 394.
24.01 Used speed reference Displays the ramped and corrected speed reference -
(before speed error calculation). See the control chain
diagram on page 394.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed reference used for speed error calculation. See par.
rpm 46.01
24.02 Used speed feedback Displays the speed feedback used for speed error -
calculation. See the control chain diagram on page 394.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.00… 30000.00 Speed feedback used for speed error calculation. See par.
rpm 46.01
24.03 Speed error filtered Displays the filtered speed error. See the control chain -
diagram on page 394.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0… 30000.0 Filtered speed error. See par.
rpm 46.01
24.04 Speed error inverted Displays the inverted (unfiltered) speed error. See the -
control chain diagram on page 394.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0… 30000.0 Inverted speed error. See par.
rpm 46.01
24.11 Speed correction Defines a speed reference correction, ie. a value added to 0.00 rpm
the existing reference between ramping and limitation.
This is useful to trim the speed if necessary, for example
to adjust draw between sections of a paper machine.
See the control chain diagram on page 394.
-10000.00… 10000.00 Speed reference correction. See par.
rpm 46.01
24.12 Speed error filter time Defines the time constant of the speed error low-pass 0 ms
filter.
If the used speed reference changes rapidly, the possible
interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered
with the speed error filter. Reducing the ripple with this
filter may cause speed controller tuning problems. A long
filter time constant and fast acceleration time contradict
one another. A very long filter time results in unstable
control.
0…10000 ms Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled. 1 = 1 ms
25
25 Speed control Speed controller settings.
See the control chain diagram on page 398.
25.01 Torque reference Displays the speed controller output that is transferred to -
speed control the torque controller. See the control chain diagram on
page 398.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Limited speed controller output torque. See par.
46.03
ACS180 [Link] Page 176 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

176 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
25.02 Speed proportional Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. 10.00
gain Too high a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure
below shows the speed controller output after an error
step when the error remains constant.

%
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0

Error value
Controller output
Controller e = Error value
output = Kp × e

Time

If gain is set to 1, a 10% change in error value (reference -

actual value) causes the speed controller output to
change by 10%, ie. the output value is input × gain.
0.00 …250.00 Proportional gain for speed controller. 100 = 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 177 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 177

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
25.03 Speed integration time Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The 2.50 s
integration time defines the rate at which the controller
output changes when the error value is constant and the
proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter
the integration time, the faster the continuous error value
is corrected. This time constant must be set to the same
order of magnitude as the time constant (time to respond)
of the actual mechanical system being controlled,
otherwise instability will result.
Setting the integration time to zero disables the I-part of
the controller. This is useful to do when tuning the
proportional gain; adjust the proportional gain first, then
return the integration time.
Anti-windup (the integrator just integrates up to 100%)
stops the integrator if the controller output is limited. See
06.05 Limit word1.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after
an error step when the error remains constant.

Controller output
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Kp × e

Kp × e e = Error value

Time
TI

0.00…1000.00 s Integration time for speed controller. 10 = 1 s

ACS180 [Link] Page 178 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

178 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
25.04 Speed derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. 0.000 s
Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error
value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more
the speed controller output is boosted during the change.
If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as
a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller. The
derivation makes the control more responsive for
disturbances. For simple applications (especially those
without a pulse encoder), derivative time is not normally
required and should be left at zero.
The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass
filter to eliminate disturbances.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after
an error step when the error remains constant.

Controller output

e
K p × TD ×
Ts Kp × e

Error value

Kp × e e = Error value

TI Time

Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 250 µs
e = Error value change between two samples

0.000…10.000 s Derivation time for speed controller. 1000 = 1 s

25.05 Derivation filter time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See parameter 8 ms
25.04 Speed derivation time.
0…10000 ms Derivation filter time constant. 1 = 1 ms
ACS180 [Link] Page 179 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 179

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
25.06 Acc comp derivation Defines the derivation time for acceleration(/deceleration) 0.00 s
time compensation. In order to compensate for a high inertia
load during acceleration, a derivative of the reference is
added to the output of the speed controller. The principle
of a derivative action is described under parameter 25.04
Speed derivation time.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value
between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time
constants of the motor and the driven machine.
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high
inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration compensation:

Speed reference

Actual speed

Time

Acceleration compensation:

Speed reference

Actual speed

Time

0.00…1000.00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time. 10 = 1 s

25.07 Acc comp filter time Defines the acceleration (or deceleration) compensation 8.0 ms
filter time constant. See parameters 25.04 Speed
derivation time and 25.06 Acc comp derivation time.
0.0…1000.0 ms Acceleration/deceleration compensation filter time. 1 = 1 ms
25.15 Proportional gain em Defines the proportional gain for the speed controller 10.00
stop when an emergency stop is active. See parameter 25.02
Speed proportional gain.
1.00…250.00 Proportional gain upon an emergency stop. 100 = 1
25.30 Flux adaptation enable Activates the flux adaption enable function. Off
Disable Flux adaption disabled. 0
ACS180 [Link] Page 180 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

180 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Enable Flux adaption enabled. 1
25.33 Speed controller Activates (or selects a source that activates) the speed Off
autotune controller auto tune function.
Off, On Note: The parameter can be configured to use 'other'
source bit to enable the function.
25.34 Speed controller Defines a control preset for the speed controller auto tune Normal
autotune mode function. The setting affects the way the torque reference
will respond to a speed reference step.
Smooth, Normal, Tight • Smooth: slow yet robust response.
• Normal: normal response.
• Tight: fast response which can produce high gain
value.
25.37 Mechanical time Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery -
constant as determined by the speed controller autotune function.
The value can be adjusted manually.
0.00 … 1000.00 s Mechanical time constant. 10 = 1 s
25.38 Autotune torque step Defines an added torque value used by the auto tune 10.00
function. This value is scaled to the motor nominal torque.

Note: The torque used by the auto tune function can also
be limited by the torque limits (in parameter group 30
Limits) and the nominal motor torque.
0.00 … 20.00 %
25.39 Autotune speed step Defines a speed value added to the initial speed for the 10%
auto tune function. The initial speed (speed used when
auto tune is activated) plus the value of this parameter is
the calculated maximum speed used by the auto tune
routine. The maximum speed can also be limited by the
speed limits (in parameter group 30 Limits) and nominal
motor speed. The value is scaled to the motor nominal
speed.
Note: The motor will exceed the calculated maximum
speed slightly at the end of each acceleration stage.
0.00 … 20.00 %
25.40 Autotune repeat times Determines how many acceleration/deceleration cycles 10
are performed during the auto tune routine. Increasing the
value will improve the accuracy of the auto tune function,
and allow the use of smaller torque or speed step values.
1…10
25.53 Torque prop reference Displays the output of the proportional (P) part of the -
speed controller. See the control chain diagram on page
398.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0… 30000.0% P-part output of speed controller. See par.
46.03
25.54 Torque integral Displays the output of the integral (I) part of the speed -
reference controller. See the control chain diagram on page 398.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0… 30000.0% I-part output of speed controller. See par.
46.03
ACS180 [Link] Page 181 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 181

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
25.55 Torque deriv reference Displays the output of the derivative (D) part of the speed -
controller. See the control chain diagram on page 398.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0… 30000.0% D-part output of speed controller. See par.
46.03
25.56 Torque acc Displays the output of the acceleration compensation -
compensation function. See the control chain diagram on page 398.
This parameter is read-only.
-30000.0… 30000.0% Output of acceleration compensation function. See par.
46.03
26
26 Torque reference chain Settings for the torque reference chain.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 399 and 400.
26.01 Torque reference to Displays the final torque reference given to the torque -
TC controller in percent. This reference is then acted upon by
various final limiters, like power, torque, load etc.
See the control chain diagrams on pages 399 and 400.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference for torque control. See par.
46.03
26.02 Torque reference used Displays the final torque reference (in percent of motor -
nominal torque) given to the torque controller, and comes
after frequency, voltage and torque limitation.
See the control chain diagram on page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference for torque control. See par.
46.03
26.08 Minimum torque ref Defines the minimum torque reference. Allows for local -300.0%
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to
the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting,
refer to parameter 30.19 Minimum torque 1.
-1000.0…0.0% Minimum torque reference. See par.
46.03
26.09 Maximum torque ref Defines the maximum torque reference. Allows for local 300.0%
limiting of the torque reference before it is passed on to
the torque ramp controller. For absolute torque limiting,
refer to parameter 30.20 Maximum torque 1.
0.0…1000.0% Maximum torque reference. See par.
46.03
ACS180 [Link] Page 182 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

182 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
26.11 Torque ref1 source Selects torque reference source 1. Zero
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
26.12 Torque ref2 source. A digital source selected by
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection can be used to switch
between the two sources, or a mathematical function
(26.13 Torque ref1 function) applied to the two signals to
create the reference.

26.13
26.11 Ref1
0
AI ADD
FB 26.70
SUB
… …
MUL 26.14
Other
MIN 0
MAX 26.72

26.12 1

0
AI
26.71
FB
… …
Other

Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 127). 8
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 127). 9
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
Frequency input 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2
ACS180 [Link] Page 183 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 183

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 19
copied) for the previous control location is used as the reference
when the control location changes if the references for the
two locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal
is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved) 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
26.12 Torque ref2 source Selects torque reference source 2. Zero
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source.
26.13 Torque ref1 function Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
sources selected by parameters 26.11 Torque ref1 source
and 26.12 Torque ref2 source. See diagram at 26.11
Torque ref1 source.
Ref1 Signal selected by 26.11 Torque ref1 source is used as 0
torque reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as torque 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([26.11 Torque ref1 source] - [26.12 2
Torque ref2 source]) of the reference sources is used as
torque reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
torque reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as torque 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as torque 5
reference 1.
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection Configures the selection between torque references 1 and Torque
2. See diagram at 26.11 Torque ref1 source. reference 1
0 = Torque reference 1
1 = Torque reference 2
Torque reference 1 0. 0
Torque reference 2 1. 1
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Torque reference 1 is used when external control location 2
selection EXT1 is active. Torque reference 2 is used when external
control location EXT2 is active.
See also parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
ACS180 [Link] Page 184 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

184 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
26.17 Torque ref filter time Defines a low-pass filter time constant for the torque 0.000 s
reference.
0.000…30.000 s Filter time constant for torque reference. 1000 = 1 s
26.18 Torque ramp up time Defines the torque reference ramp-up time, ie. the time for 0.000 s
the reference to increase from zero to nominal motor
torque.
0.000…60.000 s Torque reference ramp-up time. 100 = 1 s
26.19 Torque ramp down Defines the torque reference ramp-down time, ie. the time 0.000 s
time for the reference to decrease from nominal motor torque
to zero.
0.000…60.000 s Torque reference ramp-down time. 100 = 1 s
26.20 Torque reversal Inverts the torque reference or selects the source for the Always off
inversion signal.
Torque reversal is located in the torque reference chain
after torque reference act 3 signal, so the inversion is
visible in torque reference act 4 signal.
Always off Torque reference is not inverted. 0
Always on Torque reference is inverted. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
26.70 Torque reference act 1 Displays the value of torque reference source 1 (selected -
by parameter 26.11 Torque ref1 source). See the control
chain diagram on page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Value of torque reference source 1. See par.
46.03
ACS180 [Link] Page 185 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 185

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
26.71 Torque reference act 2 Displays the value of torque reference source 2 (selected -
by parameter 26.12 Torque ref2 source). See the control
chain diagram on page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Value of torque reference source 2. See par.
46.03
26.72 Torque reference act 3 Displays the torque reference after the function applied by -
parameter 26.13 Torque ref1 function (if any), and after
selection (26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection). See the control
chain diagram on page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference after selection. See par.
46.03
26.73 Torque reference act 4 Displays the torque reference after application of -
reference additive 1. See the control chain diagram on
page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference after application of reference additive 1. See par.
46.03
26.74 Torque ref ramp out Displays the torque reference after limiting and ramping. -
See the control chain diagram on page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference after limiting and ramping. See par.
46.03
26.75 Torque reference act 5 Displays the torque reference after control mode -
selection. See the control chain diagram on page 400.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference after control mode selection. See par.
46.03
26.76 Torque reference act 6 Displays the torque reference after torque trim. See the -
control chain diagram on page 400.
This parameter is read-only.
-1600.0…1600.0% Torque reference See par.
46.03
26.81 Rush control gain Rush controller gain term. See section Rush control 10.0
(page 73).
0.0 …10000.0 Rush controller gain (0.0 = disabled). 1=1
26.82 Rush control Rush controller integration time term. 2.0 s
integration time
0.0 …10.0 s Rush controller integration time (0.0 = disabled). 1=1s
28
28 Frequency reference Settings for the frequency reference chain.
chain See the control chain diagrams on pages 399 and 400.
28.01 Frequency ref ramp Displays the used frequency reference before ramping. -
input See the control chain diagram on page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Frequency reference before ramping. See par.
46.02
ACS180 [Link] Page 186 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

186 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.02 Frequency ref ramp Displays the final frequency reference (after selection, -
output limitation and ramping). See the control chain diagram on
page 399.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Final frequency reference. See par.
46.02
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 1. Integrated
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and panel (ref
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. A mathematical function saved)
(28.13 Ext1 frequency function) applied to the two signals
creates an Ext1 reference (A in the figure below).
A digital source selected by 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection can
be used to switch between Ext1 reference and the
corresponding Ext2 reference defined by parameters
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1, 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 and
28.17 Ext2 frequency function (B in the figure below).
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See chapter Control macros on page 43.

28.11
28.13
0
AI Ref1
FB
… … ADD
Other SUB
MUL A
MIN Ext1
28.12
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
19.11
Other
0
28.92
28.15 1
28.17
0
AI Ref1
FB
… … ADD
Ext2
Other SUB
MUL
B
MIN
28.16
MAX
0
AI
FB
… …
Other

Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 127). 8
ACS180 [Link] Page 187 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 187

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 127). 9
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 19
copied) for the previous control location is used as the reference
when the control location changes if the references for the
two locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal
is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2 Selects Ext1 frequency reference source 2. Zero
For the diagram of reference source selection, see
parameter 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 127). 8
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 127). 9
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
ACS180 [Link] Page 188 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

188 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 19
copied) for the previous control location is used as the reference
when the control location changes if the references for the
two locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal
is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
28.13 Ext1 frequency Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
function sources selected by parameters 28.11 Ext1 frequency
ref1 and 28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.11
Ext1 frequency ref1.
Ref1 Signal selected by 28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 is used as 0
frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1] - [28.12 Ext1 2
frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as
frequency reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
frequency reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency 5
reference 1.
ACS180 [Link] Page 189 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 189

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 1. Zero
Two signal sources can be defined by this parameter and
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. A mathematical function (28.17
Ext2 frequency function) applied to the two signals
creates an Ext2 reference. See diagram at 28.11 Ext1
frequency ref1.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 (see page 127). 8
EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 (see page 127). 9
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act(output of the motor 15
potentiometer).
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 16
PID controller).
Frequency input 1 11.38 Freq in 1 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 17
frequency input).
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 18
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 19
copied) for the previous control location is used as the reference
when the control location changes if the references for the
two locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal
is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 20

saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied). 21
copied)
Frequency input 2 11.46 Freq in 2 actual value (when DI3 or DI4 is used as a 22
frequency input).
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 Selects Ext2 frequency reference source 2. Zero
For the selections, and a diagram of reference source
selection, see parameter 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1.
ACS180 [Link] Page 190 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

190 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.17 Ext2 frequency Selects a mathematical function between the reference Ref1
function sources selected by parameters 28.15 Ext2 frequency
ref1 and 28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2. See diagram at 28.15
Ext2 frequency ref1.
Ref1 Signal selected by 28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 is used as 0
frequency reference 1 as such (no function applied).
Add (ref1 + ref2) The sum of the reference sources is used as frequency 1
reference 1.
Sub (ref1 - ref2) The subtraction ([28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1] - [28.16 Ext2 2
frequency ref2]) of the reference sources is used as
frequency reference 1.
Mul (ref1 × ref2) The multiplication of the reference sources is used as 3
frequency reference 1.
Min (ref1, ref2) The smaller of the reference sources is used as frequency 4
reference 1.
Max (ref1, ref2) The greater of the reference sources is used as frequency 5
reference 1.
28.21 Constant frequency Determines how constant frequencies are selected, and 0b00001
function whether the rotation direction signal is considered or not
when applying a constant frequency.

Bit Name Information

0 Const freq 1 = Packed: 7 constant frequencies are selectable using the three
mode sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24.
0 = Separate: Constant frequencies 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated
by the sources defined by parameters 28.22, 28.23 and 28.24
respectively. In case of conflict, the constant frequency with the smaller
number takes priority.
1 Direction 1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant frequency, the
enable sign of the constant frequency setting (parameters 28.26…28.32) is
multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). This
effectively allows the drive to have 14 (7 forward, 7 reverse) constant
frequencies if all values in 28.26…28.32 are positive.
WARNING! If the direction signal is reverse and the active
constant frequency is negative, the drive will run in the forward
direction.
0 = According to Par: The running direction for the constant frequency is
determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters
28.26…28.32).
2 Frequency step Frequency step: 1 = Freq step enable; 0 = Freq step disable
3...15 Reserved

0b0000...0b1111 Constant frequency configuration word. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 191 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 191

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.22 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency DI2
sel1 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates
constant frequency 1.
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See chapter Control macros on page 43.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency
function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 and 28.24 Constant
frequency sel3 select three sources whose states activate
constant frequencies as follows:

Source defined Source defined Source defined Constant frequency

by par. 28.22 by par. 28.23 by par. 28.24 active
0 0 0 None
1 0 0 Constant frequency 1
0 1 0 Constant frequency 2
1 1 0 Constant frequency 3
0 0 1 Constant frequency 4
1 0 1 Constant frequency 5
0 1 1 Constant frequency 6
1 1 1 Constant frequency 7

Always off 0 (always off). 0

Always on 1 (always on). 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
28.23 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency Always off
sel2 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates
constant frequency 2.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency
function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.24 Constant
frequency sel3 select three sources that are used to
activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter
28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant
frequency sel1.
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See Control macros on page 43.
ACS180 [Link] Page 192 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

192 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.24 Constant frequency When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency Always off
sel3 function is 0 (Separate), selects a source that activates
constant frequency 3.
When bit 0 of parameter 28.21 Constant frequency
function is 1 (Packed), this parameter and parameters
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 and 28.23 Constant
frequency sel2 select three sources that are used to
activate constant frequencies. See table at parameter
28.22 Constant frequency sel1.
For the selections, see parameter 28.22 Constant
frequency sel1.
28.26 Constant frequency 1 Defines constant frequency 1 (the frequency the motor will 5.00 Hz
turn when constant frequency 1 is selected).
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 1. See par.
46.02
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Defines constant frequency 2. 10.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 2. See par.
46.02
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Defines constant frequency 3. 15.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 3. See par.
46.02
28.29 Constant frequency 4 Defines constant frequency 4. 20.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 4. See par.
46.02
28.30 Constant frequency 5 Defines constant frequency 5. 25.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 5. See par.
46.02
28.31 Constant frequency 6 Defines constant frequency 6. 40.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 6. See par.
46.02
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Defines constant frequency 7. 50.00 Hz
-500.00…500.00 Hz Constant frequency 7. See par.
46.02
28.41 Frequency ref safe Defines a safe frequency reference value that is used with 0.00 Hz
supervision functions such as
• 12.03 AI supervision function
• 49.05 Communication loss action.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Safe frequency reference. See par.
46.02
28.42 Jogging 1 frequency Defines the frequency reference for jogging function 1 in 0.00Hz
ref scalar control mode.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Jogging 1 frequency reference. See par.
46.02
28.43 Jogging 2 frequency Defines the frequency reference for jogging function 2 in 0.00Hz
ref scalar control mode.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Jogging 2 frequency reference. See par.
46.02
ACS180 [Link] Page 193 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 193

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.51 Critical frequency Enables/disables the critical frequencies function. Also 0000h
function determines whether the specified ranges are effective in
both rotating directions or not.
See also section Critical speeds/frequencies on page 69.

Bit Name Information

0 Crit freq 1 = Enable: Critical frequencies enabled.
0 = Disable: Critical frequencies disabled.
1 Sign mode 1 = According to par: The signs of parameters 28.52…28.57 are taken
into account.
0 = Absolute: Parameters 28.52…28.57 are handled as absolute values.
Each range is effective in both directions of rotation.

0000h…FFFFh Critical frequencies configuration word. 1=1

28.52 Critical frequency 1 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 1. 0.00 Hz
low Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value
of 28.53 Critical frequency 1 high.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Low limit for critical frequency 1. See par.
46.02
28.53 Critical frequency 1 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 1. 0.00 Hz
high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 28.52 Critical frequency 1 low.
-500.00…500.00 Hz High limit for critical frequency 1. See par.
46.02
28.54 Critical frequency 2 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 2. 0.00 Hz
low Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value
of 28.55 Critical frequency 2 high.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Low limit for critical frequency 2. See par.
46.02
28.55 Critical frequency 2 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 2. 0.00 Hz
high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 28.54 Critical frequency 2 low.
-500.00…500.00 Hz High limit for critical frequency 2. See par.
46.02
28.56 Critical frequency 3 Defines the low limit for critical frequency 3. 0.00 Hz
low Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value
of 28.57 Critical frequency 3 high.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Low limit for critical frequency 3. See par.
46.02
28.57 Critical frequency 3 Defines the high limit for critical frequency 3. 0.00 Hz
high Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the
value of 28.56 Critical frequency 3 low.
-500.00…500.00 Hz High limit for critical frequency 3. See par.
46.02
ACS180 [Link] Page 194 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

194 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.71 Freq ramp set Selects a source that switches between the two sets of Acc/Dec time
selection acceleration/deceleration times defined by parameters 1
28.72…28.75.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in
force.
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in
force.
Note: The default value depends on the selected macro.
See chapter Control macros on page 43.
Acc/Dec time 1 0 0
Acc/Dec time 2 1 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
EFB DCU CW bit 10 Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 10 received 20
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
28.72 Freq acceleration time Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the 3.000 s
1 frequency to change from zero to the frequency defined
by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling. After this
frequency has been reached, the acceleration continues
with the same rate to the value defined by parameter
30.14 Maximum frequency.
If the reference increases faster than the set acceleration
rate, the motor will follow the acceleration rate.
If the reference increases slower than the set acceleration
rate, the motor frequency will follow the reference.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive torque limits.
0.000…1800.000 s Acceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
28.73 Freq deceleration time Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the 3.000 s
1 frequency to change from the frequency defined by
parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling (not from parameter
30.14 Maximum frequency) to zero.
If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too
short, ensure that DC overvoltage control (30.30
Overvoltage control) is on.
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high
inertia application, the drive should be equipped with
braking equipment such as a brake chopper and brake
resistor.
0.000…1800.000 s Deceleration time 1. 10 = 1 s
28.74 Freq acceleration time Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 28.72 Freq 60.000 s
2 acceleration time 1.
0.000…1800.000 s Acceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
28.75 Freq deceleration time Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 28.73 Freq 60.000 s
2 deceleration time 1.
0.000…1800.000 s Deceleration time 2. 10 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 195 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 195

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.76 Freq ramp in zero Selects a source that forces the frequency reference to Inactive
source zero.
0 = Force frequency reference to zero
1 = Normal operation
Active 0. 0
Inactive 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
ACS180 [Link] Page 196 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

196 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.82 Shape time 1 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration 0.000 s
ramps used with the set 1.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are
ideal for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of
symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear
part in between.
Acceleration:
Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s
Speed

Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s

S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s

S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s

Time

Deceleration:
Speed
S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s

Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
28.82 > 0 s

Linear ramp:
28.82 = 0 s

Time

0.000…1800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and 10 = 1 s

deceleration.
28.83 Shape time 2 Defines the shape of the acceleration and deceleration 0.000 s
ramps used with the set 2. See parameter 28.82 Shape
time 1.
0.000…1800.000 s Ramp shape at start and end of acceleration and 10 = 1 s
deceleration.
ACS180 [Link] Page 197 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 197

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Displays the frequency reference after the function 0.00 Hz
applied by parameter 28.13 Ext1 frequency function (if
any), and after selection (19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection ). See
the control chain diagram on page 392.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Frequency reference after selection. See par.
46.02
28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Displays the frequency reference after application of 0.00 Hz
constant frequencies, control panel reference, etc. See
the control chain diagram on page 392.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Frequency reference 7. See par.
46.02
28.97 Frequency ref Displays the frequency reference after application of 0.00 Hz
unlimited critical frequencies, but before ramping and limiting. See
the control chain diagram on page 392.
This parameter is read-only.
-500.00…500.00 Hz Frequency reference before ramping and limiting. See par.
46.02
30
30 Limits Drive operation limits.
30.01 Limit word 1 Displays limit word 1. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Torq lim 1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control (undervoltage
control, current control, load angle control or pull-out control), or by the
torque limits defined by parameters.
1…2 Reserved
3 Torq ref max 1 = Torque reference is being limited by 26.09 Maximum torque ref or
30.20 Maximum torque 1
4 Torq ref min 1 = Torque reference is being limited by 26.08 Minimum torque ref or
30.19 Minimum torque 1
5 Tlim max speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of
maximum speed limit (30.12 Maximum speed)
6 Tlim min speed 1 = Torque reference is being limited by the rush control because of
minimum speed limit (30.11 Minimum speed)
7 Max speed ref lim 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.12 Maximum speed
8 Min speed ref lim 1 = Speed reference is being limited by 30.11 Minimum speed
9 Max freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.14 Maximum frequency
10 Min freq ref lim 1 = Frequency reference is being limited by 30.13 Minimum frequency
11…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Limit word 1. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 198 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

198 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
30.02 Torque limit status Displays the torque controller limitation status word. -
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Undervoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit undervoltage
1 Overvoltage *1 = Intermediate DC circuit overvoltage
2 Minimum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.19 Minimum torque 1, 30.26 Power
motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
3 Maximum torque *1 = Torque is being limited by 30.20 Maximum torque 1, 30.26 Power
motoring limit or 30.27 Power generating limit
4 Internal current 1 = An inverter current limit (identified by bits 8…11) is active
5 Load angle (With permanent magnet motors and reluctance motors only)
1 = Load angle limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more
torque
6 Motor pullout (With asynchronous motors only)
Motor pull-out limit is active, ie. the motor cannot produce any more
torque
7 Reserved
8 Thermal 1 = Input current is being limited by the main circuit thermal limit
9 Max current *1 = Maximum output current (IMAX) is being limited
10 User current *1 = Output current is being limited by 30.17 Maximum current
11 Thermal IGBT *1 = Output current is being limited by a calculated thermal current
value
12 IGBT *1 = Output current is being limited because of the estimated IGBT
overtemperature temperature
13 IGBT overload *1 = Output current is being limited because of the IGBT junction to
case temperature
14…15 Reserved
*Only one out of bits 0…3, and one out of bits 9…11 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically
indicates the limit that is exceeded first.
0000h…FFFFh Torque limitation status word. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 199 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 199

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
30.11 Minimum speed Defines together with 30.12 Maximum speed allowed -1500.00
speed range. See the figure below. rpm
A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
A negative minimum speed value defines one range.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.11 Minimum
speed must not be higher than the 30.12 Maximum
speed.
WARNING! In speed control mode only. In
frequency control mode, use frequency limits
(30.13 and 30.14).
Speed 30.11 value is < 0
30.12

Speed range allowed

0 Time

30.11

30.11 value is > 0

Speed

30.12
Speed range allowed
30.11

0 Time

-30.11
Speed range allowed
-30.12

-30000.00…30000.00 Minimum allowed speed. See par.

rpm 46.01
30.12 Maximum speed Defines together with 30.11 Minimum speed allowed 1500.00 rpm
speed range. See parameter 30.11 Minimum speed.
Note: This parameter does not affect the speed
acceleration and deceleration ramp times. See parameter
46.01 Speed scaling.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.12 Maximum
speed must not be lower than 30.11 Minimum
speed.
WARNING! In speed control mode only. In
frequency control mode, use frequency limits
(30.13 and 30.14).
-30000.00… 30000.00 Maximum speed. See par.
rpm 46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 200 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

200 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
30.13 Minimum frequency Defines together with 30.14 Maximum frequency allowed -50.00 Hz
frequency range. See the figure below.
A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
A negative minimum frequency value defines one range.
WARNING! The absolute value of 30.13 Minimum
frequency must not be higher than 30.14
Maximum frequency.
WARNING! in frequency control mode only.

Frequency 30.13 value is < 0

30.14

Frequency range allowed

0 Time

30.13

30.13 value is > 0

Frequency

30.14
Frequency range allowed
30.13

0 Time

-30.13
Frequency range allowed
-30.14

-500.00…500.00 Hz Minimum frequency. See par.

46.02
30.14 Maximum frequency Defines together with 30.13 Minimum frequency allowed 50.00 Hz
frequency range. See 30.13 Minimum frequency.
Note: This parameter does not affect the speed
acceleration and deceleration ramp times. See parameter
46.02 Frequency scaling.
WARNING! This absolute value of 30.14
Maximum frequency must not be lower than 30.13
Minimum frequency.
WARNING! In frequency control mode only.

-500.00…500.00 Hz Maximum frequency. See par.

46.02
ACS180 [Link] Page 201 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 201

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
30.17 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current. 2.88 A
The system sets the default value to 90% of the rated
current. If required, you can increase the parameter value
by 10%.
Note: The maximum current range and default value
depends on the drive type.
0.00…3.20 A Maximum motor current. 1=1A
30.18 Torq lim sel Selects a source that switches between two different Torque limit
predefined minimum torque limit sets. set 1
0 = minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum
torque limit defined by 30.20 are active
1 = minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum
torque limit defined by 30.22 are active
The user can define two sets of torque limits, and switch
between the sets using a binary source such as a digital
input.
The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.19 and
30.20. The second set has selector parameters for both
the minimum (30.21) and maximum (30.22) limits that
allows the use of a selectable analog source (such as an
analog input).

30.21
0
AI1 30.18
AI2 1
PID
30.23 User-defined
0 minimum torque
Other
limit
30.19

30.22
0
AI1 30.18
AI2 1
PID
30.24 User-defined
Other 0 maximum torque
limit
30.20

Note: In addition to the user-defined limits, torque may be

limited for other reasons (such as power limitation). Refer
to the block diagram on page 389.
Torque limit set 1 0 (minimum torque limit defined by 30.19 and maximum 0
torque limit defined by 30.20 are active).
Torque limit set 2 1 (minimum torque limit selected by 30.21 and maximum 1
torque limit defined by 30.22 are active).
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
ACS180 [Link] Page 202 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

202 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
EFB Only for the DCU profile. DCU control word bit 15 received 11
through the embedded fieldbus interface.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
30.19 Minimum torque 1 Defines a minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent of -300.0%
nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18
Torq lim sel.
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
WARNING! Do not use minimum torque to stop
reverse rotation of the motor. Usage of minimum
torque limits disables the drive to reach zero speed
and fails to stop the motor.
-1600.0…0.0% Minimum torque limit 1. See par.
46.03
30.20 Maximum torque 1 Defines a maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent of 300.0%
nominal motor torque). See diagram at parameter 30.18
Torq lim sel.
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 0, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 1.
0.0…1600.0% Maximum torque 1. See par.
46.03
30.21 Min torque 2 source Defines the source of the minimum torque limit for the Minimum
drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when torque 2
• the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is
1, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Note: Any positive values received from the selected
source are inverted.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 15
PID controller).
Minimum torque 2 30.23 Minimum torque 2. 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
30.22 Max torque 2 source Defines the source of the maximum torque limit for the Maximum
drive (in percent of nominal motor torque) when torque 2
• the source selected by parameter 30.18 Torq lim sel is
1, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
Note: Any negative values received from the selected
source are inverted.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
ACS180 [Link] Page 203 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 203

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
PID 40.01 Process PID output actual (output of the process 15
PID controller).
Maximum torque 2 30.24 Maximum torque 2. 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
30.23 Minimum torque 2 Defines the minimum torque limit for the drive (in percent -300.0%
of nominal motor torque) when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2
and
• 30.21 Min torque 2 source is set to Minimum torque 2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
-1600.0…0.0% Minimum torque limit 2. See par.
46.03
30.24 Maximum torque 2 Defines the maximum torque limit for the drive (in percent 300.0%
of nominal motor torque) when
The limit is effective when
• the source selected by 30.18 Torq lim sel is 1, or
• 30.18 is set to Torque limit set 2
and
• 30.22 Max torque 2 source is set to Maximum torque
2.
See diagram at 30.18 Torq lim sel.
0.0…1600.0% Maximum torque limit 2. See par.
46.03
30.26 Power motoring limit Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to 300.00%
the motor in percent of nominal motor power.
0.00…600.00% Maximum motoring power. 1 = 1%
30.27 Power generating limit Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to -300.00%
the inverter in percent of nominal motor power.
-600.00…0.00% Maximum generating power. 1 = 1%
30.30 Overvoltage control Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC Enable
link. Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage
to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC
voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage
controller automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper and
resistor, or a regenerative supply unit, the controller must
be disabled.
Disable Overvoltage control disabled. 0
Enable Overvoltage control enabled. 1
30.31 Undervoltage control Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC Enable
link. If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the
undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the
motor torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower
limit. By decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the
load will cause regeneration back to the drive, keeping the
DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until
the motor coasts to a stop. This will act as a power-loss
ride-through functionality in systems with high inertia,
such as a centrifuge or a fan.
Disable Undervoltage control disabled. 0
ACS180 [Link] Page 204 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

204 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Enable Undervoltage control enabled. 1
30.35 Thermal current Enables/disables temperature-based output current Enable
limitation limitation.
The limitation should only be disabled if required by the
application.
Disable Thermal current limitation disabled. 0
Enable Thermal current limitation enabled. 1
30.36 Speed limit selection Selects a source that switches between two different Not selected
predefined adjustable speed limit sets.
0 = minimum speed limit defined by 30.11 and maximum
speed limit defined by 30.12 are active
1 = minimum speed limit selected by 30.37 and maximum
speed limit defined by 30.38 are active.
The user can define two sets of speed limits, and switch
between the sets using a binary source such as a digital
input.
The user can define two sets of speed limits, and switch
between the sets using a binary source such as a digital
input.
The first set of limits is defined by parameters 30.11
Minimum speed and 30.12 Maximum speed. The second
set has selector parameters for both the minimum (30.37)
and maximum (30.38) limits that allows the use of a
selectable analog source (such as an analog input).
30.37
0
AI1 30.36
AI2 1
Minimum
speed User-defined
0 minimum speed
Other
limit
30.11

30.38
0
AI1 30.36
AI2 1
Maximum
speed User-defined
Other 0 maximum speed
limit
30.12

Not selected Adjustable speed limits are disabled. 0

(Minimum speed limit defined by 30.11 Minimum speed
and maximum speed limit defined by 30.12 Maximum
speed are active).
Selected Adjustable speed limits are enabled. 1
(Minimum speed limit defined by 30.37 Min speed source
source and maximum speed limit defined by 30.38 Max
speed source are active).
Ext1 active Adjustable speed limits are enabled if EXT1 is active. 2
Ext2 active Adjustable speed limits are enabled if EXT2 is active. 3
ACS180 [Link] Page 205 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 205

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Torque control Adjustable speed limits are enabled if Torque control 4
mode (vector motor control) is active.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 5
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 6
DI3 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 7
DI4 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 8
DI5 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 9
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
30.37 Min speed source Defines the source of a minimum speed limit for the drive Minimum
when the source is selected by 30.36 Speed limit speed
selection.
WARNING! In vector motor control mode only. In
scalar motor control mode, use frequency limits
30.13 and 30.14.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 2
Minimum speed 30.11 Minimum speed. 11
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
30.38 Max speed source Defines the source of a maximum speed limit for the drive Maximum
when the source is selected by 30.36 Speed limit speed
selection.
WARNING! In vector motor control mode only. In
scalar motor control mode, use frequency limits
30.13 and 30.14.
Zero None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 2
Maximum speed 30.12 Maximum speed. 12
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
31
31 Fault functions Configuration of external events; selection of behavior of
the drive upon fault situations.
31.01 External event 1 Defines the source of external event 1. Inactive
source See also parameter 31.02 External event 1 type. (true)
0 = Trigger event
1 = Normal operation
Active (false) 0. 0
Inactive (true) 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
ACS180 [Link] Page 206 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

206 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
31.02 External event 1 type Selects the type of external event 1. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.03 External event 2 Defines the source of external event 2. See also Inactive
source parameter 31.04 External event 2 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.04 External event 2 type Selects the type of external event 2. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.05 External event 3 Defines the source of external event 3. See also Inactive
source parameter 31.06 External event 3 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.06 External event 3 type Selects the type of external event 3.
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.07 External event 4 Defines the source of external event 4. See also Inactive
source parameter 31.08 External event 4 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.08 External event 4 type Selects the type of external event 4.
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.09 External event 5 Defines the source of external event 5. See also Inactive
source parameter 31.10 External event 5 type. (true)
For the selections, see parameter 31.01 External event 1
source.
31.10 External event 5 type Selects the type of external event 5. Fault
Fault The external event generates a fault. 0
Warning The external event generates a warning. 1
31.11 Fault reset selection Selects the source of an external fault reset signal. The Not used
signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the
fault no longer exists.
0 -> 1 = Reset
Note: A fault reset via FBA A and EFB MCW bit 7 is useful
when the start stop signal is through DIs (parameter 20.01
or 20.06) or from local control mode and the user wants a
fault reset through the fieldbus.

Whenever the remote control mode is in fieldbus (Start

stop command and reference is through fieldbus), the
fault can be reset from the fieldbus regardless of the
selection of the parameter.
Not used Not used 0
Not used Not used 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
ACS180 [Link] Page 207 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 207

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
EFB MCW bit 7 Control word bit 7 received through the embedded 32
fieldbus interface.
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
31.12 Autoreset selection Selects faults that are automatically reset. The parameter 0000h
is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type.
Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is
automatically reset.
WARNING! Before you activate the function, make
sure that no dangerous situations can occur. The
function restarts the drive automatically and
continues operation after a fault.
The bits of this binary number correspond to the following
faults:

Bit Fault
0 Overcurrent
1 Overvoltage
2 Undervoltage
3 AI supervision fault
4…9 Reserved
10 Selectable fault (see parameter 31.13 Selectable fault)
11 External fault 1 (from source selected by parameter 31.01 External event 1 source)
12 External fault 2 (from source selected by parameter 31.03 External event 2 source)
13 External fault 3 (from source selected by parameter 31.05 External event 3 source)
14 External fault 4 (from source selected by parameter 31.07 External event 4 source)
15 External fault 5 (from source selected by parameter 31.09 External event 5 source)

0000h…FFFFh Automatic reset configuration word. 1=1

31.13 Selectable fault Defines the fault that can be automatically reset using 0
parameter 31.12 Autoreset selection, bit 10.
Faults are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page 347).
Note: The fault codes are in hexadecimal. The selected
code must be converted to decimal for this parameter.
0000h…FFFFh Fault code. 10 = 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 208 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

208 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
31.14 Number of trials Defines the maximum number of automatic resets that the 0
drive is allowed to attempt within the time defined by
parameter 31.15 Total trials time.
If the fault persists, subsequent reset attempts will be
made at intervals defined by 31.16 Delay time.
The faults to be automatically reset are defined by 31.12
Autoreset selection.
0…5 Number of automatic resets. 10 = 1
31.15 Total trials time Defines a time window for automatic fault resets. The 30.0 s
maximum number of attempts made during any period of
this length is defined by 31.14 Number of trials.
Note: If the fault condition remains and cannot be reset,
each reset attempt will generate an event and start a new
time window. In practice, if the specified number of resets
(31.14) at specified intervals (31.16) take longer than the
value of 31.15, the drive will continue to attempt resetting
the fault until the cause is eventually removed.
1.0…600.0 s Time for automatic resets. 10 = 1 s
31.16 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before 0.0 s
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 31.12
Autoreset selection.
0.0…120.0 s Autoreset delay. 10 = 1 s
31.19 Motor phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is Fault
detected. See section Motor phase loss detection
(parameter 31.19) on page 109.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault The drive trips on fault 3381 Output phase loss. 1
31.21 Supply phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is Fault
detected.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault The drive trips on fault 3130 Input phase loss. 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 209 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 209

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
31.22 STO indication Selects which indications are given when one or both Safe Fault/Fault
run/stop torque off (STO) signals are switched off or lost. The
indications also depend on whether the drive is running or
stopped when this occurs.
The tables at each selection below show the indications
generated with that particular setting.
Notes:
• This parameter does not affect the operation of the
STO function itself. The STO function will operate
regardless of the setting of this parameter: a running
drive will stop upon removal of one or both STO
signals, and will not start until both STO signals are
restored and all faults reset.
• The loss of only one STO signal always generates a
fault as it is interpreted as a malfunction.
For more information on the STO, see chapter The Safe
torque off function in the hardware manual of the drive.
Fault/Fault 0
Inputs
Indication (running or stopped)
IN1 IN2
0 0 Fault 5091 Safe torque off
0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)

Fault/Warning 1
Inputs Indication
IN1 IN2 Running Stopped
Fault 5091 Safe Warning A5A0 Safe
0 0
torque off torque off
Fault FA81 Safe Fault FA81 Safe torque
0 1
torque off 1 off 1
Fault FA82 Safe Fault FA82 Safe torque
1 0
torque off 2 off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)

Fault/Event 2
Inputs Indication
IN1 IN2 Running Stopped
Fault 5091 Safe torque Event B5A0 Safe
0 0
off torque off
Fault FA81 Safe torque Fault FA81 Safe
0 1
off 1 torque off 1
Fault FA82 Safe torque Fault FA82 Safe
1 0
off 2 torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)
ACS180 [Link] Page 210 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

210 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Warning/Warning 3
Inputs
Indication (running or stopped)
IN1 IN2
0 0 Warning A5A0 Safe torque off
0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)

Event/Event 4
Inputs
Indication (running or stopped)
IN1 IN2
0 0 Event B5A0 Safe torque off
Event B5A0 Safe torque off and fault
0 1
FA81 Safe torque off 1
Event B5A0 Safe torque off and fault
1 0
FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)
No Indication/No 5
Indication Inputs
Indication (running or stopped)
IN1 IN2
0 0 None
0 1 Fault FA81 Safe torque off 1
1 0 Fault FA82 Safe torque off 2
1 1 (Normal operation)

31.23 Wiring or earth fault Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and Fault
motor cable connection (ie. input power cable is
connected to drive motor connection).
No action No action taken. 0
Fault The drive trips on fault 3181 Cross connection. 1
31.24 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. No action
A stall condition is defined as follows:
• The drive exceeds the stall current limit (31.25 Stall
current limit), and
• the output frequency is below the level set by
parameter 31.27 Stall frequency limit or the motor
speed is below the level set by parameter 31.26 Stall
speed limit, and
• the conditions above have been true longer than the
time set by parameter 31.28 Stall time.
No action None (stall supervision disabled). 0
Warning The drive generates an A780 Motor stall warning. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault 7121 Motor stall. 2
31.25 Stall current limit Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the 200.0%
motor. See parameter 31.24 Stall function.
0.0…1600.0% Stall current limit. -
ACS180 [Link] Page 211 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 211

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
31.26 Stall speed limit Stall speed limit in rpm. See parameter 31.24 Stall 150.00 rpm
function.
0.00…10000.00 rpm Stall speed limit. See par.
46.01
31.27 Stall frequency limit Stall frequency limit. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. 15.00 Hz
Note: Setting the limit below 10 Hz is not recommended.
0.00…1000.00 Hz Stall frequency limit. See par.
46.02
31.28 Stall time Stall time. See parameter 31.24 Stall function. 20 s
0…3600 s Stall time. -
31.30 Overspeed trip margin Defines, together with 30.11 Minimum speed and 30.12 500.00 rpm
Maximum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the
motor (overspeed protection). If the speed (24.02 Used
speed feedback) exceeds the speed limit defined by
parameter 30.11 or 30.12 by more than the value of this
parameter, the drive trips on the 7310 Overspeed fault.
WARNING! This function only supervises the
speed in vector motor control mode. The function
is not effective in scalar motor control mode.
Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed
trip margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.

Speed (24.02)
Overspeed trip level

31.30

30.12

0
Time

30.11

31.30

Overspeed trip level

0.00…10000.00 rpm Overspeed trip margin. See par.

46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 212 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

212 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
31.31 Frequency trip margin Defines, together with 30.13 Minimum frequency and 15.00 Hz
30.14 Maximum frequency, the maximum allowed
frequency of the motor. If the speed (28.01 Frequency ref
ramp input) exceeds the frequency limit defined by
parameter 30.13 or 30.14 by more than the value of this
parameter, the drive trips on the 73F0 Overfrequency
fault.
WARNING! This function only supervises the
speed in scalar motor control mode. The function
is not effective in vector motor control mode.
Example: If the maximum speed is 40 Hz and speed trip
margin is 10 Hz, the drive trips at 50 Hz.

Frequency (28.02)
Overfrequency trip level

31.31

30.14

0
Time

30.13

31.31

Overfrequency trip level

0.00…10000.00 Hz Overfrequency trip margin. See par.

46.02
31.32 Emergency ramp Parameters 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision and 0%
supervision 31.33 Emergency ramp supervision delay, together with
the derivative of 24.02 Used speed feedback, provide a
supervision function for emergency stop modes Off1 and
Off3.
The supervision is based on either
• observing the time within which the motor stops, or
• comparing the actual and expected deceleration rates.
If this parameter is set to 0%, the maximum stop time is
directly set in parameter 31.33. Otherwise, 31.32 defines
the maximum allowed deviation from the expected
deceleration rate, which is calculated from parameters
23.11… 23.15 (Off1) or 23.23 Emergency stop time (Off3).
If the actual deceleration rate (24.02) deviates too much
from the expected rate, the drive trips on 73B0
Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of 06.17 Drive status
word 2, and coasts to a stop.
If 31.32 is set to 0% and 31.33 is set to 0 s, the
emergency stop ramp supervision is disabled.
See also parameter 21.04 Emergency stop mode.
0…300% Maximum deviation from expected deceleration rate. 1 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 213 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 213

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
31.33 Emergency ramp If parameter 31.32 Emergency ramp supervision is set to 0s
supervision delay 0%, this parameter defines the maximum time an
emergency stop (mode Off1 or Off3) is allowed to take. If
the motor has not stopped when the time elapses, the
drive trips on 73B0 Emergency ramp failed, sets bit 8 of
06.17 Drive status word 2, and coasts to a stop.
If 31.32 is set to a value other than 0%, this parameter
defines a delay between the receipt of the emergency
stop command and the activation of the supervision. It is
recommended to specify a short delay to allow the speed
change rate to stabilize.
0…100 s Maximum ramp-down time, or supervision activation 1=1s
delay.
31.40 Disable warning Selects the warnings to be suppressed. This parameter is 0000h
messages a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a warning.
Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding warning is
not logged to event log.

Bit Name Description

0 Reserved
1 DC link undervoltage 1 = Warning A3A2 DC link undervoltage is suppressed.
2…4 Reserved
5 Emergency stop off2 1 = Warning AFE1 Emergency stop (off2) is suppressed.
4 Emergency stop off1, off3 1 = Warning AFE2 Emergency stop (off1 or off3) is
suppressed.
7…15 Reserved Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Word for disabling warnings. 1=1

31.54 Fault action Selects the stop mode when a non-critical fault occurs. Coast
Coast The drive coasts to stop. 0
Emergency ramp The drive follows the ramp specified for an emergency 1
stop by parameter 22.23.
ACS180 [Link] Page 214 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

214 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32
32 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision functions 1…3.
Three values can be chosen to be monitored; a warning or
fault is generated whenever predefined limits are
exceeded.
See also section Signal supervision (page 111).
32.01 Supervision status Signal supervision status word. 0000h
Indicates whether the values monitored by the signal
supervision functions are within or outside their respective
limits.
Note: This word is independent of the drive actions
defined by parameters 32.06, 32.16, 32.26, 32.36, 32.46
and 32.56.

Bit Name Description

0 Supervision 1 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.07 is outside its limits.
1 Supervision 2 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.17 is outside its limits.
2 Supervision 3 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.27 is outside its limits.
3 Supervision 4 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.37 is outside its limits.
4 Supervision 5 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.47 is outside its limits.
5 Supervision 6 active 1 = Signal selected by 32.57 is outside its limits.
6…15 Reserved

0000h...FFFFh Signal supervision status word. 1=1

32.05 Supervision 1 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 1. Disabled
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.07) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.09
and 32.10 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.06.
Disabled Signal supervision 1 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit 5
or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value 7
defined by the high limit + 0.5 · hysteresis range (32.11
Supervision 1 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when
the signal falls below the value defined by the low limit -
0.5 · hysteresis range.
ACS180 [Link] Page 215 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 215

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32.06 Supervision 1 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 1
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No warning or fault generated. 0
Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if running. 3
32.07 Supervision 1 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Frequency
function 1.
Zero None. 0
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used. 1
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency. 3
Current 01.07 Motor current. 4
Torque 01.10 Motor torque. 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage. 7
Output power 01.14 Output power. 8
AI1 12.11 AI1 actual value. 9
AI2 12.21 AI2 actual value. 10
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 18
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output. 19
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference. 20
Torque ref used 26.02 Torque reference used. 21
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output. 22
Inverter temperature 05.11 Inverter temperature. 23
Process PID output 40.01 Process PID output actual. 24
Process PID feedback 40.02 Process PID feedback actual. 25
Process PID setpoint 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. 26
Process PID deviation 40.04 Process PID deviation actual. 27
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
32.08 Supervision 1 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 1.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.09 Supervision 1 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 1. 0.00
-21474830.00… Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.10 Supervision 1 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 1. 0.00
-21474830.00… Upper limit. -
21474830.00
ACS180 [Link] Page 216 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

216 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32.11 Supervision 1 Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal 0.00
hysteresis supervision 1.
Note: This parameter applies to all selections of
parameter 32.11, not just Hysteresis.
0.00…100000.00 Hysteresis. -
32.15 Supervision 2 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 2. Disabled
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.17) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.19
and 32.20 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.16.
Disabled Signal supervision 2 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit 5
or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value 7
defined by the high limit + 0.5 · hysteresis range (32.21
Supervision 2 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when
the signal falls below the value defined by the low limit -
0.5 · hysteresis range.
32.16 Supervision 2 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 2
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No warning or fault generated. 0
Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if running. 3
32.17 Supervision 2 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Current
function 2.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
32.18 Supervision 2 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 2.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.19 Supervision 2 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 2. 0.00
-21474830.00… Low limit. -
21474830.00
ACS180 [Link] Page 217 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 217

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32.20 Supervision 2 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 2. 0.00
-21474830.00… Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.21 Supervision 2 Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal 0.00
hysteresis supervision 2.
Note: This parameter applies to all selections of
parameter 32.15, not just Hysteresis.
0.00…100000.00 Hysteresis. -
32.25 Supervision 3 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 3. Disabled
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.27) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.29
and 32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.26.
Disabled Signal supervision 3 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit 5
or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value 7
defined by the high limit + 0.5 · hysteresis range (32.31
Supervision 3 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when
the signal falls below the value defined by the low limit -
0.5 · hysteresis range.
32.26 Supervision 3 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 3
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No warning or fault generated. 0
Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if running. 3
32.27 Supervision 3 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Torque
function 3.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
32.28 Supervision 3 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 3.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 218 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

218 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32.29 Supervision 3 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 3. 0.00
-21474830.00… Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.30 Supervision 3 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 3. 0.00
-21474830.00… Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.31 Supervision 3 Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal 0.00
hysteresis supervision 3.
Note: This parameter applies to all selections of
parameter 32.25, not just Hysteresis.
0.00…100000.00 Hysteresis. -
32.35 Supervision 4 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 4. Disabled
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.37 is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.39 and
32.30 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.36.
Disabled Signal supervision 4 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit 5
or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value 7
defined by the high limit + 0.5 · hysteresis range (32.41
Supervision 4 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when
the signal falls below the value defined by the low limit -
0.5 · hysteresis range.
32.36 Supervision 4 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 4
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No warning or fault generated. 0
Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if running. 3
32.37 Supervision 4 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero
function 4.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
ACS180 [Link] Page 219 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 219

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32.38 Supervision 4 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 4.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.39 Supervision 4 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 4. 0.00
-21474830.00… Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.40 Supervision 4 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 4. 0.00
-21474830.00… Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.41 Supervision 4 Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal 0.00
hysteresis supervision 4.
Note: This parameter applies to all selections of
parameter 32.35, not just Hysteresis.
0.00…100000.00 Hysteresis. -
32.45 Supervision 5 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 5. Disabled
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.47) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.49
and 32.40 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.46.
Disabled Signal supervision 5 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit 5
or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value 7
defined by the high limit + 0.5 · hysteresis range (32.51
Supervision 5 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when
the signal falls below the value defined by the low limit -
0.5 · hysteresis range.
32.46 Supervision 5 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 5
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No warning or fault generated. 0
Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if running. 3
ACS180 [Link] Page 220 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

220 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
32.47 Supervision 5 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero
function 5.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
32.48 Supervision 5 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 5.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.49 Supervision 5 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 5. 0.00
-21474830.00… Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.50 Supervision 5 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 5. 0.00
-21474830.00… Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.51 Supervision 5 Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal 0.00
hysteresis supervision 5.
Note: This parameter applies to all selections of
parameter 32.45, not just Hysteresis.
0.00…100000.00 Hysteresis. -
32.55 Supervision 6 function Selects the mode of signal supervision function 6. Disabled
Determines how the monitored signal (see parameter
32.57) is compared to its lower and upper limits (32.59
and 32.50 respectively). The action to be taken when the
condition is fulfilled is selected by 32.56.
Disabled Signal supervision 6 not in use. 0
Low Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its lower 1
limit.
High Action is taken whenever the signal rises above its upper 2
limit.
Abs low Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 3
falls below its (absolute) lower limit.
Abs high Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 4
rises above its (absolute) upper limit.
Both Action is taken whenever the signal falls below its low limit 5
or rises above its high limit.
Abs both Action is taken whenever the absolute value of the signal 6
falls below its (absolute) low limit or rises above its
(absolute) high limit.
Hysteresis Action is taken whenever the signal rises above the value 7
defined by the high limit + 0.5 · hysteresis range (32.61
Supervision 6 hysteresis). The action is deactivated when
the signal falls below the value defined by the low limit -
0.5 · hysteresis range.
32.56 Supervision 6 action Selects whether the drive generates a fault, warning or No action
neither when the value monitored by signal supervision 6
exceeds its limits.
Note: This parameter does not affect the status indicated
by 32.01 Supervision status.
No action No warning or fault generated. 0
Warning Warning A8B0 Signal supervision is generated. 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 221 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 221

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Fault The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision. 2
Fault if running The drive trips on fault 80B0 Signal supervision if running. 3
32.57 Supervision 6 signal Selects the signal to be monitored by signal supervision Zero
function 6.
For the available selections, see parameter 32.07
Supervision 1 signal.
32.58 Supervision 6 filter Defines a filter time constant for the signal monitored by 0.000 s
time signal supervision 6.
0.000 … 30.000 s Signal filter time. 1000 = 1 s
32.59 Supervision 6 low Defines the lower limit for signal supervision 6. 0.00
-21474830.00… Low limit. -
21474830.00
32.60 Supervision 6 high Defines the upper limit for signal supervision 6. 0.00
-21474830.00… Upper limit. -
21474830.00
32.61 Supervision 6 Defines the hysteresis for the signal monitored by signal 0.00
hysteresis supervision 6.
Note: This parameter applies to all selections of
parameter 32.55, not just Hysteresis.
0.00…100000.00 Hysteresis. -
34
35 Motor thermal Motor thermal protection settings such as temperature
protection measurement configuration, load curve definition and
motor fan control configuration.
See also section Motor thermal protection (page 106).
35.01 Motor estimated Displays the motor temperature as estimated by the -
temperature internal motor thermal protection model (see parameters
35.50…35.55). The unit is selected by parameter 96.16
Unit selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-60…1000 °C Estimated motor temperature. 1 = 1°
35.02 Measured temperature Displays the temperature received through the source -
1 defined by parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 source. The
unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
This parameter is read-only.
-60…5000 °C, or Measured temperature 1. 1 = 1 unit
0...5000 ohm Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is [Link] the
measured temperature source selection (35.11) is PTC
analog I/O or PTC AI/DI Voltage divider tree, the motor
thermal protection function converts the analog input
signal (35.14) to PTC resistance value (ohms), and shows
it in this parameter. This is the case even the parameter
name and unit refer to motor temperature (°C or °F). You
cannot change the unit to ohm for the time being (96.16).
35.05 Motor overload level Shows the motor overload level as a percentage of the 0.0
motor overload fault [Link] section
0.0...300.0% Motor overload level. 10 = 1%
0.0% No motor overloading.
88.0% Motor overloaded to warning level.
100.0% Motor overloaded to fault level.
ACS180 [Link] Page 222 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

222 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
35.11 Temperature 1 source Selects the source from which measured temperature 1 is Estimated
read. temperature
Usually this source is from a sensor connected to the
motor controlled by the drive, but it could be used to
measure and monitor a temperature from other parts of
the process as long as a suitable sensor is used as per
the selection list.
Disabled None. Temperature monitoring function 1 is disabled. 0
Estimated temperature Estimated motor temperature (see parameter 35.01 Motor 1
estimated temperature).
The temperature is estimated from an internal drive
calculation. It is important to set up the ambient
temperature of the motor in 35.50 Motor ambient
temperature.
KTY84 analog I/O KTY84 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 2
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection
parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp
sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
1 x Pt100 analog I/O Pt100 sensor connected to a standard analog input 5
selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source
and an analog output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection
parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp
sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
2 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with two sensors 6
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
3 x Pt100 analog I/O As selection 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, but with three sensors 7
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
ACS180 [Link] Page 223 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 223

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Direct temperature The temperature is taken from the source selected by 11
parameter 35.14. The value of the source is assumed to
be in the unit of temperature specified by parameter
96.16.
KTY83 analog I/O KTY83 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 12
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection
parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp
sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
1 × Pt1000 analog I/O Pt1000 sensor connected to a standard analog input 13
selected by parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source
and an analog output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection
parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp
sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
2 × Pt1000 analog I/O As selection 1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, but with two sensors 14
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
3 × Pt1000 analog I/O As selection1 × Pt1000 analog I/O, but with three sensors 15
connected in series. Using multiple sensors improves
measurement accuracy significantly.
ACS180 [Link] Page 224 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

224 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Ni1000 Ni1000 sensor connected to the analog input selected by 16
parameter 35.14 Temperature 1 AI source and an analog
output.
The following settings are required:
• Set the hardware jumper or switch related to the analog
input to U (voltage). Any change must be validated by a
control unit reboot.
• Set the appropriate analog input unit selection
parameter in group 12 Standard AI to V (volt).
• In parameter group 13 Standard AO, set the source
selection parameter of the analog output to Temp
sensor 1 excitation.
The analog output feeds a constant current through the
sensor. As the resistance of the sensor increases along
with its temperature, the voltage over the sensor
increases. The voltage is read by the analog input and
converted into degrees.
35.12 Temperature 1 fault Defines the fault limit for temperature supervision 130 °C, or
limit function 1. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit 4500 ohm
selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
-60…5000 °C, or Fault limit for temperature monitoring function 1. 1 = 1 unit
0...5000 ohm
35.13 Temperature 1 Defines the warning limit for temperature supervision 110 °C, or
warning limit function 1. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit 4000 ohm
selection.
Note: With a PTC sensor, the unit is ohms.
-60…5000 °C, or Warning limit for temperature monitoring function 1. 1 = 1 unit
0...5000 ohm
35.14 Temperature 1 AI Selects the input for parameter 35.11 Temperature 1 Not selected
source source selections 1 x Pt100 analog I/O, 2 x Pt100 analog
I/O, 3 x Pt100 analog I/O, and Direct temperature.
Not selected None. 0
AI1 actual value Analog input AI1. 1
AI2 actual value Analog input AI2. 2
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
35.50 Motor ambient Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for the 20 °C or
temperature motor thermal protection model. The unit is selected by 68 °F
parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
The motor thermal protection model estimates the motor
temperature on the basis of parameters 35.50 … 35.55.
The motor temperature increases if it operates in the
region above the load curve, and decreases if it operates
in the region below the load curve.
WARNING! The model cannot protect the motor if
the motor does not cool properly because of dust,
dirt, etc.
-60…100 °C or Ambient temperature. 1 = 1°
-75 … 212 °F
ACS180 [Link] Page 225 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 225

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
35.51 Motor load curve Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 110%
35.52 Zero speed load and 35.53 Break point. The load
curve is used by the motor thermal protection model to
estimate the motor temperature.
When the parameter is set to 100%, the maximum load is
taken as the value of parameter 99.06 Motor nominal
current (higher loads heat up the motor). The load curve
level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs
from the nominal value set in 35.50 Motor ambient
temperature.

I/IN
(%) I = Motor current
IN = Nominal motor current

150

35.51
100

50
35.52

35.53 Drive output

frequency

50…150% Maximum load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%

35.52 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 70%
35.51 Motor load curve and 35.53 Break point. Defines
the maximum motor load at zero speed of the load curve.
A higher value can be used if the motor has an external
motor fan to boost the cooling. See the motor
manufacturer's recommendations.
See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
25…150% Zero speed load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%
35.53 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 45.00 Hz
35.51 Motor load curve and 35.52 Zero speed load.
Defines the break point frequency of the load curve ie. the
point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease
from the value of parameter 35.51 Motor load curve
towards the value of parameter 35.52 Zero speed load.
See parameter 35.51 Motor load curve.
1.00…500.00 Hz Break point for the motor load curve. See par.
46.02
ACS180 [Link] Page 226 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

226 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
35.54 Motor nominal Defines the temperature rise of the motor above ambient 80 °C or
temperature rise when the motor is loaded with nominal current. See the 176 °F
motor manufacturer's recommendations.
The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.

Temperature

Motor nominal
temperature rise

Ambient temperature

Time

0…300 °C or Temperature rise. 1 = 1°

32…572 °F
35.55 Motor thermal time Defines the thermal time constant for use with the motor 256 s
constant thermal protection model, defined as the time to reach
63% of the nominal motor temperature. See the motor
manufacturer's recommendations.

Motor current

100%

Time

Temperature rise

100%
63%

Motor thermal time Time

100…10000 s Motor thermal time constant. 1=1s

35.56 Motor overload action Defines what action the drive should take when the motor Warning and
overload specified by parameter 35.57 occurs. fault
ACS180 [Link] Page 227 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 227

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
No action No action taken. 0
Warning only Drive generates warning A783 Motor overload when the 1
motor is overloaded to the warning level, that is,
parameter 35.05 reaches value 88.0%.
Warning and fault Drive generates warning A783 Motor overload when the 2
motor is overloaded to the warning level, that is,
parameter 35.05 reaches value 88.0%.
Drive trips on fault 7122 Motor overload when the motor is
overloaded to the fault level, that is, parameter 35.05
reaches value 100.0%.
35.57 Motor overload class Defines the motor overload class to be used. The class of Class 20
protection is specified by the user as the time for tripping
at 6 times the tripping level current.

The function shares the following parameters with the

Motor thermal model:
• 35.51
• 35.52
• 35.53

Together, these three parameters set the tripping level as

a function of motor frequency.
Class 5 Motor overload class 5. 0
Class 10 Motor overload class 10. 1
Class 20 Motor overload class 20. 2
Class 30 Motor overload class 30. 3
Class 40 Motor overload class 40. 4
36
36 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings.
See also section Load analyzer (page 111).
36.01 PVL signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value Output
logger. power
The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by
parameter 36.02 PVL filter time.
The peak value is stored, along with other pre-selected
signals at the time, into parameters 36.10 … 36.15.
The peak value logger can be reset using parameter
36.09 Reset loggers. The date and time of the last reset
are stored into parameters 36.16 and 36.17 respectively.
Not selected None (peak value logger disabled). 0
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used. 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency. 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current. 4
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque. 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage. 7
Output power 01.14 Output power. 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input. 10
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output. 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference. 12
ACS180 [Link] Page 228 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

228 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Torque ref used 26.02 Torque reference used. 13
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output. 14
Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual. 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
36.02 PVL filter time Peak value logger filtering time. See parameter 36.01 PVL 2.00 s
signal source.
0.00…120.00 s Peak value logger filtering time. 100 = 1 s
36.06 AL2 signal source Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2. Motor torque
The signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals.
The results are displayed by parameters 36.40 … 36.49.
Each parameter represents an amplitude range, and
shows what portion of the samples fall within that range.
The signal value corresponding to 100% is defined by
parameter 36.07 AL2 signal scaling.
Amplitude logger 2 can be reset using parameter 36.09
Reset loggers. The date and time of the last reset are
stored into parameters 36.50 and 36.51 respectively.
For the selections, see parameter 36.01 PVL signal
source.
See parameter 36.01 for the selections.
36.07 AL2 signal scaling Defines the monitored signal value for the amplitude 100.00
logger AL2 that corresponds to 100% sample value.
0.00…32767.00 Signal value corresponding to 100%. 1=1
36.09 Reset loggers Resets the peak value logger and/or amplitude logger 2. Done
(Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.)
Done Reset completed or not requested (normal operation). 0
All Reset both the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2. 1
PVL Reset the peak value logger. 2
AL2 Reset amplitude logger 2. 3
36.10 PVL peak value Shows the peak value recorded by the peak value logger. 0.00
-32768.00… 32767.00 Peak value. 1=1
36.11 PVL peak date Shows the date when the peak value was recorded. 01/01/1980
1/1/1980...6/5/2159 Peak occurrence date. -
36.12 PVL peak time Shows the time when the peak value was recorded. 00:00:00
- Peak occurrence time. -
36.13 PVL current at peak Shows the Motor current at the moment the peak value 0.00 A
was recorded.
-32768.00… 32767.00 Motor current at peak. 1=1A
A
36.14 PVL DC voltage at Shows the voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the 0.00 V
peak drive at the moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00…2000.00 V DC voltage at peak. 10 = 1 V
36.15 PVL speed at peak Shows the Motor speed at the moment the peak value 0.00 rpm
was recorded.
-30000… 30000 rpm Motor speed at peak. See par.
46.01
ACS180 [Link] Page 229 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 229

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
36.16 PVL reset date Shows the date on which the peak value logger was last 01/01/1980
reset.
1/1/1980...6/5/2159 Last reset date of the peak value logger. -
36.17 PVL reset time Shows the time when the peak value logger was last 00:00:00
reset.
- Last reset time of the peak value logger. -
36.20 AL1 0 to 10% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by amplitude 0.00%
logger 1 that fall between 0 and 10%. 100% corresponds
to the Imax value given in the ratings table in chapter
Technical data in the hardware manual.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%. 1 = 1%
36.21 AL1 10 to 20% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by amplitude 0.00%
logger 1 that fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 10 and 20%. 1 = 1%
36.22 AL1 20 to 30% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by amplitude 0.00%
logger 1 that fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 20 and 30%. 1 = 1%
36.23 AL1 30 to 40% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by amplitude 0.00%
logger 1 that fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 30 and 40%. 1 = 1%
36.24 AL2 40 to 50% Shows the percentage of samples recorded by amplitude 0.00%
logger 1 that fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 40 and 50%. 1 = 1%
36.25 AL1 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 0.00%
that fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 50 and 60%. 1 = 1%
36.26 AL1 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 0.00%
that fall between 60 and 70%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 60 and 70%. 1 = 1%
36.27 AL1 70 to 80% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 0.00%
that fall between 70 and 80%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 70 and 80%. 1 = 1%
36.28 AL1 80 to 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 0.00%
that fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 80 and 90%. 1 = 1%
36.29 AL1 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 0.00%
that exceed 90%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%. 1 = 1%
36.40 AL2 0 to 10% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 0 and 10%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 0 and 10%. 1 = 1%
36.41 AL2 10 to 20% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 10 and 20%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 10 and 20%. 1 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 230 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

230 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
36.42 AL2 20 to 30% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 20 and 30%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 20 and 30%. 1 = 1%
36.43 AL2 30 to 40% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 30 and 40%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 30 and 40%. 1 = 1%
36.44 AL2 40 to 50% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 40 and 50%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 40 and 50%. 1 = 1%
36.45 AL2 50 to 60% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 50 and 60%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 50 and 60%. 1 = 1%
36.46 AL2 60 to 70% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 60 and 70%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 60 and 70%. 1 = 1%
36.47 AL2 70 to 80% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 70 and 80%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 70 and 80%. 1 = 1%
36.48 AL2 80 to 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that fall between 80 and 90%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples between 80 and 90%. 1 = 1%
36.49 AL2 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 0.00%
that exceed 90%.
0.00…100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%. 1 = 1%
36.50 AL2 reset date The date on which amplitude logger 2 was last reset. 01/01/1980
1/1/1980...6/5/2159 Last reset date of amplitude logger 2. -
36.51 AL2 reset time The time at which amplitude logger 2 was last reset. 00:00:00
- Last reset time of amplitude logger 2. -
37
37 User load curve Settings for user load curve.
See also section User load curve (page 79).
37.01 ULC output status Displays the status of the monitored signal (37.02). The 0000h
word status is shown only while the drive is running. (The status
word is independent of the actions and delays selected by
parameters 37.03, 37.04, 37.41 and 37.42.)
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Description

0 Under load limit 1 = Signal lower than the underload curve.
1 Within load range 1 = Signal between the underload and overload curve.
2 Overload limit 1 = Signal higher than the overload curve.
3 Outside load limit 1 = Signal lower than the underload curve or higher than the
overload curve.
4…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Status of the monitored signal. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 231 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 231

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
37.02 ULC supervision Selects the signal to be monitored. The function compares Motor
signal the absolute value of the signal against the load curve. torque %
Not selected No signal selected. Monitoring disabled. 0
Motor speed % 01.03 Motor speed %. 1
Motor current % 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom. 2
Motor torque % 01.10 Motor torque. 3
Output power % of 01.15 Output power % of motor nom. 4
motor nom
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
37.03 ULC overload actions Selects how the drive reacts if the absolute value of the Disabled
monitored signal stays continuously above the overload
curve for longer than the value of 37.41 ULC overload
timer.
Disabled No warnings or fault generated. 0
Warning The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload warning if the 1
signal has been continuously over the overload curve for a
time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
Fault The drive trips on 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal 2
has been continuously over the overload curve for a time
defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
Warning/Fault The drive generates an A8C1 ULC overload warning if the 3
signal has been continuously over the overload curve for
half of the time defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload
timer.
The drive trips on 8002 ULC overload fault if the signal
has been continuously over the overload curve for a time
defined by parameter 37.41 ULC overload timer.
37.04 ULC underload Selects an action taken if the signal (37.02) stays under Disabled
actions the underload curve for a defined time.
Disabled No warnings or fault generated. 0
Warning The drive generates an A8C4 ULC underload warning if 1
the signal has been continuously under the underload
curve for a time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC
underload timer.
Fault The drive trips on 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal 2
has been continuously under the underload curve for a
time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
Warning/Fault The drive generates an A8C4 ULC underload warning if 3
the signal has been continuously under the underload
curve for half of the time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC
underload timer.
The drive trips on 8001 ULC underload fault if the signal
has been continuously under the underload curve for a
time defined by parameter 37.42 ULC underload timer.
ACS180 [Link] Page 232 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

232 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
37.11 ULC speed table point Defines the first of the five speed points on the X-axis of 150.0 rpm
1 the user load curve.
The values of the parameters must satisfy: -30000.0 rpm
< 37.11 ULC speed table point 1 < 37.12 ULC speed table
point 2 < 37.13 ULC speed table point 3 < 37.14 ULC
speed table point 4 < 37.15 ULC speed table point 5 <
30000.0 rpm.
Speed points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor control
mode is set to Vector or if 99.04 Motor control mode is set
to Scalar and the reference unit is rpm.
The five points must be in order from lowest to highest.
The points are defined as positive values, but the range is
symmetrically effective also in the negative direction. The
monitoring is not active outside these two areas.
-30000.0…30000.0 Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
37.12 ULC speed table point Defines the second speed point. 750.0 rpm
2 See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
-30000.0…30000.0 Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
37.13 ULC speed table point Defines the third speed point. 1290.0 rpm
3 See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
-30000.0…30000.0 Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
37.14 ULC speed table point Defines the fourth speed point. 1500.0 rpm
4 See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
-30000.0…30000.0 Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
37.15 ULC speed table point Defines the fifth speed point. 1800.0 rpm
5 See parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point 1.
-30000.0…30000.0 Speed. 1 = 1 rpm
rpm
37.16 ULC frequency table Defines the first of the five frequency points on the X-axis 5.0 Hz
point 1 of the user load curve.
The values of the parameters must satisfy: -500.0 Hz <
37.16 ULC frequency table point 1 < 37.17 ULC frequency
table point 2 < 37.18 ULC frequency table point 3 < 37.19
ULC frequency table point 4 < 37.20 ULC frequency table
point 5 < 500.0 Hz.
Frequency points are used if parameter 99.04 Motor
control mode is set to Scalar and the reference unit is Hz.
The five points must be in order from lowest to highest.
The points are defined as positive values, but the range is
symmetrically effective also in the negative direction. The
monitoring is not active outside these two areas.
-500.0…500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
37.17 ULC frequency table Defines the second frequency point. 25.0 Hz
point 2 See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
-500.0…500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
ACS180 [Link] Page 233 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 233

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
37.18 ULC frequency table Defines the third frequency point. 43.0 Hz
point 3 See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
-500.0…500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
37.19 ULC frequency table Defines the fourth frequency point. 50.0 Hz
point 4 See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
-500.0…500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
37.20 ULC frequency table Defines the fifth frequency point. 60.0 Hz
point 5 See parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table point 1.
-500.0…500.0 Hz Frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
37.21 ULC underload point 1 Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that 10.0%
together with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11
ULC speed table point 1… 37.15 ULC speed table point 5
or 37.15 ULC speed table point 5…37.15 ULC frequency
table point 5) define the underload (lower) curve.
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
• 37.21 ULC underload point 1 <= 37.31 ULC overload
point 1
• 37.22 ULC underload point 2 <= 37.32 ULC overload
point 2
• 37.23 ULC underload point 3 <= 37.33 ULC overload
point 3
• 37.24 ULC underload point 4 <= 37.34 ULC overload
point 4
• 37.25 ULC underload point 5 <= 37.35 ULC overload
point 5
-1600.0…1600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1%
37.22 ULC underload point 2 Defines the second underload point. 15.0%
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1%
37.23 ULC underload point 3 Defines the third underload point. 25.0%
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1%
37.24 ULC underload point 4 Defines the fourth underload point. 30.0%
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1%
37.25 ULC underload point 5 Defines the fifth underload point. 30.0%
See parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Underload point. 1 = 1%
37.31 ULC overload point 1 Defines the first of the five points on the Y-axis that 300.0%
together with the corresponding point on the X-axis (37.11
ULC speed table point 1…37.15 ULC frequency table
point 5 or 37.15 ULC frequency table point 5…37.20 ULC
frequency table point 5) define the overload (higher)
curve.
At each of the five points the value of the underload curve
point must be equal to or smaller than the value of the
overload curve point. See parameter 37.21 ULC
underload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 234 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

234 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
37.32 ULC overload point 2 Defines the second overload point. 300.0%
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1%
37.33 ULC overload point 3 Defines the third overload point. 300.0%
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1%
37.34 ULC overload point 4 Defines the fourth overload point. 300.0%
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1%
37.35 ULC overload point 5 Defines the fifth overload point. 300.0%
See parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
-1600.0…1600.0% Overload point. 1 = 1%
37.41 ULC overload timer Defines the time for which the monitored signal must 20.0 s
continuously stay above the overload curve before the
drive takes the action selected by 37.03 ULC overload
actions.
0.0…10000.0 s Time. 1=1s
37.42 ULC underload timer Defines the time for which the monitored signal must 20.0 s
continuously stay below the underload curve before the
drive takes the action selected by 37.04 ULC underload
actions.
0.0…10000.0 s Time. 1=1s
40
40 Process PID set 1 Parameter values for process PID control.
The drive output can be controlled by the process PID.
When the process PID control is enabled, the drive
controls the process feedback to the reference value.
Two different parameter sets can be defined for the
process PID. One parameter set is in use at a time. The
first set is made up of parameters 40.07…40.50, the
second set is defined by the parameters in group 41
Process PID set 2. The binary source that defines which
set is used is selected by parameter 40.57 PID set1/set2
selection.
See also the PID control chain diagrams in chapter
Control chain diagrams.
40.01 Process PID output Displays the output of the process PID controller. See the 0.00
actual control chain diagram on page 403.
This parameter is read-only.
-200000.00… Process PID controller output. 1 = 1%
200000.00%
40.02 Process PID feedback Displays the value of process feedback after source 0.00
actual selection, mathematical function (parameter 40.10 Set 1
feedback function), and filtering. See the control chain
diagram on page 403.
This parameter is read-only.
-200000.00… Process feedback. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
ACS180 [Link] Page 235 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 235

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.03 Process PID setpoint Displays the value of process PID setpoint after source 0.00
actual selection, mathematical function (40.18 Set 1 setpoint
function), limitation and ramping. See the control chain
diagram on page 403.
This parameter is read-only.
-200000.00… Setpoint for process PID controller. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.04 Process PID deviation Displays the process PID deviation. By default, this value 0.00
actual equals setpoint - feedback, but deviation can be inverted
by parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. See the
control chain diagram on page 391.
This parameter is read-only.
-200000.00… PID deviation. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.05 Process PID trim Displays the process PID trimmed reference output. See -
output act control chain diagram on page 391.
This parameter is read-only.
32768.0…32767.0 Process PID trimmed reference. 1=1
40.06 Process PID status Displays status information on process PID control. 0000h
word This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Value

0 PID active 1 = Process PID control active.
1 Setpoint frozen 1 = Process PID setpoint frozen.
2 Output frozen 1 = Process PID controller output frozen.
3 PID sleep mode 1 = Sleep mode active.
4 Sleep boost 1 = Sleep boost active.
5 Trim mode 1 = Trim function active.
6 Tracking mode 1 = Tracking function active.
7 Output limit high 1 = PID output is being limited by parameter 40.37.
8 Output limit low 1 = PID output is being limited by parameters 40.36
9 Deadband active 1 = Deadband active (see parameter 40.39)
10 PID set 0 = Parameter set 1 in use. 1 = Parameter set 2 in use.
11 Reserved
12 Internal setpoint 1 = Internal setpoint active (see parameters 40.16…40.23)
active
13…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Process PID control status word. 1=1

40.07 Process PID operation Activates/deactivates process PID control. Off
mode Note: Process PID control is only available in external
control; see section Local and external control locations
(page 60).
Off Process PID control inactive. 0
On Process PID control active. 1
On when drive running Process PID control is active when the drive is running. 2
ACS180 [Link] Page 236 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

236 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 Selects the primary source of process feedback. See the Not selected
source control chain diagram on page 402.
Not selected None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 2
Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value 3
AI1 percent 12.101 AI1 percent value 8
AI2 percent 12.102 AI2 percent value 9
Feedback storage 40.91 Feedback data storage 10
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 Selects the second source of process feedback. The Not selected
source second source is used only if the setpoint function
requires two inputs.
For the selections, see parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1
source.
40.10 Set 1 feedback Defines how process feedback is calculated from the two In1
function feedback sources selected by parameters 40.08 Set 1
feedback 1 source and 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source.
In1 Source 1. 0
In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. 1
In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. 2
In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. 3
In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. 4
MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. 5
MAX(In1,In2) Greater of the two sources. 6
AVE(In1,In2) Average of the two sources. 7
sqrt(In1) Square root of source 1. 8
sqrt(In1-In2) Square root of (source 1 - source 2). 9
sqrt(In1+In2) Square root of (source 1 + source 2). 10
sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2. 11
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter Defines the filter time constant for process feedback. 0.000 s
time
0.000…30.000 s Feedback filter time. 1=1s
40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Defines, together with parameter 40.15 Set 1 output 0.00
scaling, a general scaling factor for the process PID
control chain.
The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the
process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID
controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this
case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter
40.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz.
In effect, the output of the PID controller = [40.15] when
deviation (setpoint - feedback) = [40.14] and [40.32] = 1.
Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 40.14
and 40.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would
produce the same scaling as 1 and 30.
32768.00…32767.00 Process setpoint base. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 237 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 237

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.15 Set 1 output scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. 1500.00;
1800.00
Operation mode (95.20 b0)
Scaling
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control 46.01 Speed scaling
Frequency control 46.02 Frequency scaling

32768.00…32767.00 Process PID controller output base. 1=1

40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 Selects the primary source of process PID setpoint. See Not selected
source the control chain diagram on page 402.
Not selected None. 0
Internal setpoint Internal setpoint. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal 2
setpoint sel1.
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 3
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value 4
Motor potentiometer 22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act (output of the motor 8
potentiometer).
Freq in scaled 11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value 10
AI1 percent 12.101 AI1 percent value 11
AI2 percent 12.102 AI2 percent value 12
Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 13
saved) saved by the control system for the location where the
control returns is used as the reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

Control panel (ref Panel reference (03.01 Panel reference, see page 127) 14
copied) for the previous control location is used as the reference
when the control location changes if the references for the
two locations are of the same type (eg
frequency/speed/torque/PID); otherwise, the actual signal
is used as the new reference.
Reference
Ext1 reference
Ext2 reference
Active reference
Inactive reference
t
Ext1 -> Ext2

EFB ref1 03.09 EFB reference 1 19

EFB ref2 03.10 EFB reference 2 20
Setpoint data storage 40.92 Setpoint data storage 24
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref saved). 26
saved)
Integrated panel (ref See above Control panel (ref copied. 27
copied)
ACS180 [Link] Page 238 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

238 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 Selects the second source of process setpoint. The Not selected
source second source is used only if the setpoint function
requires two inputs.
For the selections, see parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1
source.
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function Selects a function between the setpoint sources selected In1
by parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and 40.17
Set 1 setpoint 2 source.
In1 Source 1. 0
In1+In2 Sum of sources 1 and 2. 1
In1-In2 Source 2 subtracted from source 1. 2
In1*In2 Source 1 multiplied by source 2. 3
In1/In2 Source 1 divided by source 2. 4
MIN(In1,In2) Smaller of the two sources. 5
MAX(In1,In2) Greater of the two sources. 6
AVE(In1,In2) Average of the two sources. 7
sqrt(In1) Square root of source 1. 8
sqrt(In1-In2) Square root of (source 1 - source 2). 9
sqrt(In1+In2) Square root of (source 1 + source 2). 10
sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2) Square root of source 1 + square root of source 2. 11
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint Selects together with 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 the Not selected
sel1 internal setpoint out of the presets defined by parameters
40.21…40.23.
Note: Parameters 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source and
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source must be set to Internal
setpoint
.
Source defined by Source defined by
Internal setpoint active
par. 40.19 par. 40.20
0 0 Setpoint source
1 0 1 (par. 40.21)
0 1 2 (par. 40.22)
1 1 3 (par. 40.23)

Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 21
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 22
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23
ACS180 [Link] Page 239 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 239

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint Selects together with 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 the Not selected
sel2 internal setpoint used out of the three internal setpoints
defined by parameters 40.21…40.23. See table at 40.19
Set 1 internal setpoint sel1.
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status 23
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint Internal process setpoint 1. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 0.00 PID
1 internal setpoint sel11. customer
units
-200000.00… Internal process setpoint 1. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint Internal process setpoint 2. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 0.00 PID
2 internal setpoint sel1. customer
units
-200000.00… Internal process setpoint 2. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint Internal process setpoint 3. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 0.00 PID
3 internal setpoint sel1. customer
units
-200000.00… Internal process setpoint 3. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint Internal process setpoint 0. See parameter 40.19 Set 1 0.00 PID
0 internal setpoint sel1. customer
units
-200000.00… Internal process setpoint 0. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Defines a minimum limit for the process PID controller 0.00
setpoint.
-200000.00… Minimum limit for process PID controller setpoint. 1=1
200000.00
40.27 Set 1 setpoint max Defines a maximum limit for the process PID controller 200000.00
setpoint.
-200000.00… Maximum limit for process PID controller setpoint. 1=1
200000.00
ACS180 [Link] Page 240 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

240 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to 0.0 s
time increase from 0% to 100%.
0.0…1800.0 s Setpoint increase time. 1=1
40.29 Set 1 setpoint Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to 0.0 s
decrease time decrease from 100% to 0%.
0.0…1800.0 s Setpoint decrease time. 1=1
40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, Not selected
enable the setpoint of the process PID controller. This feature is
useful when the reference is based on a process feedback
connected to an analog input, and the sensor must be
serviced without stopping the process.
1 = Process PID controller setpoint frozen
See also parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable
Not selected Process PID controller setpoint not frozen. 0
Selected Process PID controller setpoint frozen. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.31 Set 1 deviation Inverts the input of the process PID controller. Not inverted
inversion 0 = Deviation not inverted (Deviation = Setpoint - (Ref - Fbk)
Feedback)
1 = Deviation inverted (Deviation = Feedback - Setpoint)
See also section Sleep and boost functions for process
PID control (page 87).
Not inverted 0. 0
(Ref - Fbk)
Inverted (Fbk - Ref) 1. 1
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.32 Set 1 gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See 1.00
parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time.
0.01…100.00 Gain for PID controller. 100 = 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 241 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 241

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.33 Set 1 integration time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller. 60.0 s
This time needs to be set to the same order of magnitude
as the reaction time of the process being controlled,
otherwise instability will result.

Error/Controller output

O
I

G×I

G×I

Time
Ti

I = controller input (error)

O = controller output
G = gain
Ti = integration time

Note: Setting this value to 0 disables the “I” part, turning

the PID controller into a PD controller.
0.0…9999.0 s Integration time. 1=1s
40.34 Set 1 derivation time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. 0.000 s
The derivative component at the controller output is
calculated on basis of two consecutive error values (EK-
1 and EK) according to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME × (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which
TS = 2 ms sample time
E = Error = Process reference - process feedback.
0.000…10.000 s Derivation time. 1000 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 242 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

242 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to 0.0 s
time smooth the derivative component of the process PID
controller.

%
Unfiltered signal
100

63 Filtered signal

t
T

O = I × (1 - e-t/T)

I = filter input (step)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant

0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant. 10 = 1 s

40.36 Set 1 output min Defines the minimum limit for the process PID controller 0.00
output. Using the minimum and maximum limits, it is
possible to restrict the operation range.
-200000.00… Minimum limit for process PID controller output. 1=1
200000.00
40.37 Set 1 output max Defines the maximum limit for the process PID controller 100.00
output. See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min.
-200000.00… Maximum limit for process PID controller output. 1=1
200000.00

40.38 Set 1 output freeze Freezes (or defines a source that can be used to freeze) Not selected
enable the output of the process PID controller, keeping the
output at the value it was before freeze was enabled. This
feature can be used when, for example, a sensor
providing process feedback must to be serviced without
stopping the process.
1 = Process PID controller output frozen
See also parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable.
Not selected Process PID controller output not frozen. 0
Selected Process PID controller output frozen. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22
ACS180 [Link] Page 243 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 243

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.39 Set 1 deadband range Defines a deadband around the setpoint. Whenever 0.0
process feedback enters the deadband, a delay timer
starts. If the feedback remains within the deadband longer
than the delay (40.40 Set 1 deadband delay), the PID
controller output is frozen. Normal operation resumes
after the feedback value leaves the deadband.

40.39 Set 1
deadband range

Setpoint

Feedback

PID controller
output
PID controller
output frozen

40.40 Set 1 deadband delay

Time

0……200000.0 Deadband range. 1=1

40.40 Set 1 deadband delay Delay for the deadband. See parameter 40.39 Set 1 0.0 s
deadband range.
0.0 … 3600.0 s Delay for deadband area. 1=1s
40.43 Set 1 sleep level Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the value is 0.0
0.0, set 1 sleep mode is disabled.
The sleep function compares the motor speed to the value
of this parameter. If the motor speed remains below this
value longer than the sleep delay defined by 40.44 Set 1
sleep delay, the drive enters the sleep mode and stops the
motor.
0.0…200000.0 Sleep start level. 1=1
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay Defines a delay before the sleep function actually 60.0 s
becomes enabled, to prevent nuisance sleeping.
The delay timer starts when the sleep mode is enabled by
parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level, and resets when the
sleep mode is disabled.
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep start delay. 1=1s
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Defines a boost time for the sleep boost step. See 0.0 s
parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step.
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep boost time. 1=1s
ACS180 [Link] Page 244 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

244 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step When the drive is entering sleep mode, the process 0.0 PID
setpoint is increased by this value for the time defined by customer
parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time. units
If active, sleep boost is aborted when the drive wakes up.
0.0…200000.0 PID Sleep boost step. 1 = 1 PID
customer units customer
unit
40.47 Set 1 wake-up Defines the wake-up level as deviation between process 0.00 PID
deviation setpoint and feedback. customer
When the deviation exceeds the value of this parameter, units
and remains there for the duration of the wake-up delay
(40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay), the drive wakes up.
See also parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion.
-200000.00...200000.0 Wake-up level (as deviation between process setpoint 1 = 1 PID
PID customer units and feedback). customer
unit
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Defines a wake-up delay for the sleep function to prevent 0.50 s
nuisance wake-ups. See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up
deviation.
The delay timer starts when the deviation exceeds the
wake-up level (40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation), and resets
if the deviation falls below the wake-up level.
0.00…60.00 s Wake-up delay. 1=1s
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Activates (or selects a source that activates) tracking Not selected
mode. In tracking mode, the value selected by parameter
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection is substituted for the PID
controller output. See also section Tracking (page 89).
1 = Tracking mode enabled
Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 21
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 22
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status 24
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status 25
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status 26
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref Selects the value source for tracking mode. See Not selected
selection parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode.
Not selected None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value. 2
ACS180 [Link] Page 245 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 245

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.51 Set 1 trim mode Activates the trim function and selects between direct and Off
proportional trimming (or a combination of both). With
trimming, it is possible to apply a corrective factor to the
drive reference (setpoint). The output after trimming is
available as parameter 40.05 Process PID trim output act.
See the control chain diagram on page 391.
Off The trim function is inactive. 0
Direct The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative 1
to the maximum speed, torque or frequency; the selection
between these is made by parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim
selection.
Proportional The trim function is active. The trimming factor is relative 2
to the reference selected by parameter 40.53 Set 1
trimmed ref pointer.
Combined The trim function is active. The trimming factor is a 3
combination of both Direct and Proportional modes; the
proportions of each are defined by parameter 40.53 Set 1
trim mix.
40.52 Set 1 trim selection Selects whether trimming is used for correcting the speed, Torque
torque or frequency reference.
Torque Torque reference trimming. 1
Speed Speed reference trimming. 2
Frequency Frequency reference trimming. 3
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not selected
pointer
Not selected None. 0
AI1 scaled 12.12 AI1 scaled value (see page 148). 1
AI2 scaled 12.22 AI2 scaled value (see page 150). 2
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
118).
40.54 Set 1 trim mix When parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode is set to 0.000
Combined, defines the effect of direct and proportional
trim sources in the final trimming factor.
0.000 = 100% proportional
0.500 = 50% proportional, 50% direct
1.000 = 100% direct
0.000 … 1.000 Trim mix. 1=1
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Defines a multiplier for the trimming factor. This value is 1.000
multiplied by the result of parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim
mode. Consequently, the result of the multiplication is
used to multiply the result of parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim
source.
-100.000 … 100.000 Multiplier for trimming factor. 1=1
40.56 Set 1 trim source Selects the reference to be trimmed. PID ref
PID ref PID setpoint. 1
PID output PID controller output. 2
ACS180 [Link] Page 246 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

246 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.57 PID set1/set2 Selects the source that determines whether process PID PID set 1
selection parameter set 1 (parameters 40.07…40.50) or set 2
(group 41 Process PID set 2) is used.
0 = PID set 1 in use
1 = PID set 2 in use
PID set 1 PID set 1. 0
PID set 2 PID set 2. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 21
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 22
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 23
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
40.58 Set 1 increase Prevention of PID integration term increase for PID set 1. No
prevention
No Increase prevention not in use. 0
Limiting The PID integration term is not increased if the maximum 1
value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is
valid for the PID set 1.
Ext PID min lim The process PID integration term is not increased when 2
the output of the external PID has reached it's minimum
limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for
the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
Ext PID max lim The process PID integration term is not increased when 3
the output of the external PID has reached it's maximum
limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for
the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
40.59 Set 1 decrease Prevention of PID integration term decrease for PID set 1. No
prevention
No Decrease prevention not in use. 0
Limiting The PID integration term is not decreased if the minimum 1
value for the PID output is reached. This parameter is
valid for the PID set 1.
Ext PID min lim The process PID integration term is not decreased when 2
the output of the external PID has reached it's minimum
limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for
the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
Ext PID max lim The process PID integration term is not decreased when 3
the output of the external PID has reached it's maximum
limit. In this setup, the external PID is used as a source for
the process PID. This parameter is valid for the PID set 1.
40.60 Set 1 PID activation Selects the source of process PID set 1 activation. On
source
Off Set 1 PID activation source is Off. 0
On Set 1 PID activation source is On. 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 247 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 247

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Follow Ext1/Ext2 Selection follows the value of parameter 19.11 Ext1/Ext2 2
selection selection.
By changing to Ext2 control location, Process PID set 1 is
activated.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 3
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 4
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 5
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 6
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 7
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
118).
40.61 Setpoint scaling actual Actual setpoint scaling. See parameter 40.14 Set 1 0.00
setpoint scaling.
-200000.00… Scaling. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.62 PID internal setpoint Displays the value of the internal setpoint. See the control 0.00 PID unit
actual chain diagram on page 402. 1
This parameter is read-only.
-200000.00… Process PID internal setpoint. 1 = 1 PID
200000.00 PID customer
customer units unit
40.65 Trim auto connection Enables the PID trim auto connection and connects PID Disable
trim40.05 Process PID trim output act to either speed,
torque or frequency chains, based on the trim selection
parameter40.52 Set 1 trim selection.
See control chain diagram on page 402.
Disable Disable PID trim auto connection. 0
Enable Enable PID trim auto connection. 1
40.79 Set 1 units Selects the units used for Process PID setpoint, feedback 8
and deviation.
User text User editable text. User text default is “PID unit 1”. 0
% Percentage. 4
bar Bar. 74
kPa Kilopascal. 75
Pa Pascal, 77
psi Pound per square inch. 76
CFM Cubic feet per minute. 26
inH2O Inch of water. 58
°C Centigrade. 150
°F Fahrenheit. 151
mbar Millibar. 44
m3/h Cubic meters per hour. 78
dm3/h Cubic decimeters per hour. 21
l/s Liters per second. 79
ACS180 [Link] Page 248 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

248 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
l/min Liters per minute. 37
l/h Liters per hour. 38
m3/s Cubic meter per second. 88
m3/min Cubic meter per minute. 40
km3/h Cubic kilometers per hour. 131
gal/s Gallons per second. 47
ft3/s Cubic feet per second. 50
ft3/min Cubic feet per minute. 51
ft3/h Cubic feet per hour. 52
ppm Parts per million. 34
inHg Inch of mercury. 29
kCFM Thousands of cubic feet per hour. 126
inWC Inch water column. 65
gpm Gallons per minute. 80
gal/min Gallons per minute. 48
in wg Inch of water. 59
MPa Megapascal. 94
ftWC Foot water column. 125
40.80 Set 1 PID output min Selects the source for set 1 PID output minimum. Set1 output
source min
None None. 0
Set1 output min 40.36 Set 1 output min. 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
118).
40.81 Set 1 PID output max Selects the source for set 1 PID output maximum. Set1 output
source max
None None. 0
Set1 output max 40.37 Set 1 output max 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations on page -
118).
40.89 Set 1 setpoint Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function 1.00
multiplier specified by parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function is
multiplied.
-200000.00… Multiplier. 1=1
200000.00
40.90 Set 1 feedback Defines the multiplier with which the result of the function 1.00
multiplier specified by parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function is
multiplied.
-200000.00… Multiplier. 1=1
200000.00
ACS180 [Link] Page 249 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 249

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
40.91 Feedback data Storage parameter for receiving a process feedback value 0.00
storage eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface.
The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data.
Set the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114) to Feedback data storage. In 40.08 Set
1 feedback 1 source (or 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source),
select Feedback storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for process feedback. 100 = 1
40.92 Setpoint data storage Storage parameter for receiving a process setpoint value 0.00
eg. through the embedded fieldbus interface.
The value can be sent to the drive as Modbus I/O data.
Set the target selection parameter of that particular data
(58.101…58.114) to Setpoint data storage. In 40.16 Set 1
setpoint 1 source (or 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source),
select Setpoint data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 Storage parameter for process setpoint. 100 = 1
40.96 Process PID output % Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.01 Process PID 0.00%
feedback actual.
-100.00…100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1%
40.97 Process PID feedback Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.02 Process PID 0.00%
% feedback actual.
-100.00…100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1%
40.98 Process PID setpoint Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.03 Process PID 0.00%
% setpoint actual.
-100.00…100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1%
40.99 Process PID deviation Percentage scaled signal of parameter 40.04 Process PID 0.00%
% deviation actual.
-100.00…100.00% Percentage. 100 = 1%
41
41 Process PID set 2 A second set of parameter values for process PID control.
The selection between this set and first set (parameter
group 40 Process PID set 1) is made by parameter 40.57
PID set1/set2 selection.
See also parameters 40.01…40.06, and the control chain
diagrams on pages 402 and 403.
41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source. Not selected
source
41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 See parameter 40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source. Not selected
source
41.10 Set 2 feedback See parameter 40.10 Set 1 feedback function. In1
function
41.11 Set 2 feedback filter See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time. 0.000 s
time
41.14 Set 2 setpoint scaling See parameter 40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling. 100.00
41.15 Set 2 output scaling See parameter 40.15 Set 1 output scaling. 1500.00;
1800.00
(95.20 b0)
41.16 Set 2 setpoint 1 See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source. Not selected
source
ACS180 [Link] Page 250 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

250 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 See parameter 40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source. Not selected
source
41.18 Set 2 setpoint function See parameter 40.18 Set 1 setpoint function. In1
41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1. Not selected
sel1
41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2. Not selected
sel2
41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1. 0.00 PID
1 customer
units
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2. 0.00 PID
2 customer
units
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3. 0.00 PID
3 customer
units
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0. 0.00 PID
0 customer
units
41.26 Set 2 setpoint min See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min. 0.00
41.27 Set 2 setpoint max See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. 200000.00
41.28 Set 2 setpoint increase See parameter 40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time. 0.0 s
time
41.29 Set 2 setpoint See parameter 40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time. 0.0 s
decrease time
41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze See parameter 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable. Not selected
enable
41.31 Set 2 deviation See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. Not inverted
inversion (Ref - Fbk)
41.32 Set 2 gain See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain. 1.00
41.33 Set 2 integration time See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time. 60.0 s
41.34 Set 2 derivation time See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time. 0.000 s
41.35 Set 2 derivation filter See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time. 0.0 s
time
41.36 Set 2 output min See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. 0.00
41.37 Set 2 output max See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max. 100.00
41.38 Set 2 output freeze See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable. Not selected
enable
41.39 Set 2 deadband range See parameter 40.39 Set 1 deadband range. 0.0
41.40 Set 2 deadband delay See parameter 40.40 Set 1 deadband delay. 0.0 s
41.43 Set 2 sleep level See parameter 40.43 Set 1 sleep level. 0.0
41.44 Set 2 sleep delay See parameter 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay. 60.0 s
41.45 Set 2 sleep boost time See parameter 40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time. 0.0 s
41.46 Set 2 sleep boost step See parameter 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step. 0.0 PID
customer
units
ACS180 [Link] Page 251 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 251

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
41.47 Set 2 wake-up See parameter 40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation. 0.00 PID
deviation customer
units
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay See parameter 40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay. 0.50 s
41.49 Set 2 tracking mode See parameter 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode. Not selected
41.50 Set 2 tracking ref See parameter 40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection. Not selected
selection
41.51 Set 2 trim mode See parameter 40.51 Set 1 trim mode. Off
41.52 Set 2 trim selection See parameter 40.52 Set 1 trim selection. Speed
41.53 Set 2 trimmed ref See parameter 40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer. Not selected
pointer
41.54 Set 2 trim mix See parameter 40.54 Set 1 trim mix. 0.000
41.55 Set 2 trim adjust See parameter 40.55 Set 1 trim adjust. 1.000
41.56 Set 2 trim source See parameter 40.56 Set 1 trim source. PID output
41.56 Set 2 increase See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention. No
prevention
41.59 Set 2 decrease See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention. No
prevention
41.60 Set 2 PID activation See parameter 40.60 Set 1 PID activation source. On
source
41.79 Set 2 units See parameter 40.79 Set 1 units. 8
41.80 Set 2 PID output min Selects the source for set 2 PID output minimum. Set2 output
source min
None None. 0
Set2 output min 41.36 Set 2 output min. 1
41.81 Set 2 PID output max Selects the source for set 2 PID output maximum. Set2 output
source max
None None. 0
Set2 output max 40.47 Set 2 output max 1
41.89 Set 2 setpoint See parameter 40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier. 1.00
multiplier
41.90 Set 2 feedback Defines the multiplier k used in formulas of parameter 1.00
multiplier 41.10 Set 2 feedback function. See parameter 40.90 Set 1
feedback multiplier.
ACS180 [Link] Page 252 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

252 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
43
44 Mechanical brake Configuration of mechanical brake control.
control
44.01 Brake control status Displays the mechanical brake control status word. 0000h
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Information

0 Open command Close/open command to brake actuator (0 = close, 1 = open).
Connect this bit to desired output.
1 Opening torque 1 = Opening torque requested from drive logic
request
2 Hold stopped 1 = Hold requested from drive logic
request
3 Ramp to stopped 1 = Ramping down to zero speed requested from drive logic
4 Enabled 1 = Brake control is enabled
5 Closed 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSED state
6 Opening 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPENING state
7 Open 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE OPEN state
8 Closing 1 = Brake control logic in BRAKE CLOSING state
9…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Mechanical brake control status word. 1=1

44.06 Brake control enable Activates/deactivates (or selects a source that Not selected
activates/deactivates) the mechanical brake control logic.
0 = Brake control inactive
1 = Brake control active
Not selected The brake control function is disabled. 0
Selected The brake control function is enabled. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status. 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status.x 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
ACS180 [Link] Page 253 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 253

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
44.08 Brake open delay Defines the brake open delay, ie. the delay between the 0.00 s
internal open brake command and the release of motor
speed control. The delay timer starts when the drive has
magnetized the motor. Simultaneously with the timer start,
the brake control logic energizes the brake control output
and the brake starts to open.
Set this parameter to the value of mechanical opening
delay specified by the brake manufacturer.
0.00…5.00 s Brake open delay. 100 = 1 s
44.13 Brake close delay Specifies a delay between a close command (that is, 0.00 s
when the brake control output is de-energized) and when
the drive stops modulating. This is to keep the motor live
and under control until the brake actually closes.
Set this parameter equal to the value specified by the
brake manufacturer as the mechanical make-up time of
the brake.
0.00…60.00 s Brake close delay. 100 = 1 s
44.14 Brake close level Defines the brake close speed as an absolute value. 10.00 rpm
After motor speed has decelerated to this level, a close
command is given.
0.00…1000.00 rpm Brake close speed. See par.
46.01
45
45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators.
See also section Energy saving calculators (page 111).
45.01 Saved GW hours Energy saved in GWh compared to direct-on-line motor -
connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.02
Saved MW hours rolls over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…65535 GWh Energy savings in GWh. 1 = 1 GWh
45.02 Saved MW hours Energy saved in MWh compared to direct-on-line motor -
connection. This parameter is incremented when 45.03
Saved kW hours rolls over.
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.01 Saved
GW hours is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…999 MWh Energy savings in MWh. 1 = 1 MWh
45.03 Saved kW hours Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor -
connection.
If the internal brake chopper of the drive is enabled, all
energy fed by the motor to the drive is assumed to be
converted into heat, but the calculation still records
savings made by controlling the speed. If the chopper is
disabled, then regenerated energy from the motor is also
recorded here.
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.02 Saved
MW hours is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.0…999.9 kWh Energy savings in kWh. 10 = 1 kWh
ACS180 [Link] Page 254 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

254 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
45.04 Saved energy Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor -
connection.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.0…214748364.7 Energy savings in kWh. 1 = 1 kWh
kWh
45.05 Saved money x1000 Displays the monetary savings in thousands compared to -
direct-on-line motor connection. This parameter is
incremented when parameter 45.06 Saved money rolls
over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…4294967295 Monetary savings in thousands of units. 1 = 1 unit
thousands
45.06 Saved money Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor -
connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the
saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff
(45.14 Tariff selection).
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.05 Saved
money x1000 is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.00…999.99 units Monetary savings. 1 = 1 unit
45.07 Saved amount Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor -
connection. This value is a calculated by multiplying the
saved energy in kWh by the currently active energy tariff
(45.14 Tariff selection).
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.00… 21474836.47 Monetary savings. 1 = 1 unit
units
45.08 CO2 reduction in Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons compared -
kilotons to direct-on-line motor connection. This value is
incremented when parameter 45.09 CO2 reduction in tons
rolls over.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0…65535 metric Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric kilotons. 1 = 1 metric
kilotons kiloton
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to -
direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated
by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of
parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5
metric tons/MWh).
When this parameter rolls over, parameter 45.08 CO2
reduction in kilotons is incremented.
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset)
0.0…999.9 metric tons Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons. 1 = 1 metric
ton
ACS180 [Link] Page 255 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 255

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
45.10 Total saved CO2 Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to -
direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated
by multiplying the saved energy in MWh by the value of
parameter 45.18 CO2 conversion factor (by default, 0.5
metric tons/MWh).
This parameter is read-only (see parameter 45.21 Energy
calculations reset).
0.0…214748364.7 Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons. 1 = 1 metric
metric tons ton
45.11 Energy optimizer Enables/disables the energy optimization function. The Disable
function optimizes the motor flux so that total energy
consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the
drive operates below the nominal load. The total efficiency
(motor and drive) can be improved by 1…20% depending
on load torque and speed.
Note: With a permanent magnet motor or a synchronous
reluctance motor, energy optimization is always enabled
regardless of this parameter.
Disable Energy optimization disabled. 0
Enable Energy optimization enabled. 1
45.12 Energy tariff 1 Defines energy tariff 1 (price of energy per kWh). 1.000 units
Depending on the setting of parameter 45.14 Tariff
selection, either this value or 45.13 Energy tariff 2 is used
for reference when monetary savings are calculated.
Note: Tariffs are read only at the instant of selection, and
are not applied retroactively.
0.000… 4294967.295 Energy tariff 1. -
units
45.13 Energy tariff 2 Defines energy tariff 2 (price of energy per kWh). 2.000 units
See parameter 45.12 Energy tariff 1.
0.000… 4294967.295 Energy tariff 2. -
units
45.14 Tariff selection Selects (or defines a source that selects) which pre- Energy tariff
defined energy tariff is used. 1
0 = 45.12 Energy tariff 1
1 = 45.13 Energy tariff 2
Energy tariff 1 0. 0
Energy tariff 2 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
45.18 CO2 conversion factor Defines a factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 0.500
emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). For example, tn/MWh
45.10 Total saved CO2 = 45.02 Saved kW hours × 45.18
CO2 conversion factor (tn/MWh).
0.000…65.535 Factor for conversion of saved energy into CO2 1 = 1 tn/MWh
tn/MWh emissions.
ACS180 [Link] Page 256 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

256 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
45.19 Comparison power Actual power that the motor absorbs when connected 0.00 kW
direct-on-line and operating the application. The value is
used for reference when energy savings are calculated.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is
directly dependent on the accuracy of this value. If nothing
is entered here, then the nominal motor power is used by
the calculation, but that may inflate the energy savings
reported as many motors do not absorb nameplate power.
0.00…100000.00 kW Motor power. 1 = 1 kW
45.21 Energy calculations Resets the savings counter parameters 45.01…45.10. Done
reset
Done Reset not requested (normal operation), or reset 0
complete.
Reset Reset the savings counter parameters. The value reverts 1
automatically to Done.
45.24 Hourly peak power Value of the peak power during the last hour, that is, the 0.00 kW
value most recent 60 minutes after the drive has been powered
up.
The parameter is updated once every 10 minutes unless
the hourly peak is found in the most recent 10 minutes. In
that case, the values is shown immediately.
-3000.00 … 3000.00 Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
kW
45.25 Hourly peak power Time of the peak power value during the last hour. 00:00:00
time
Time. N/A
45.26 Hourly total energy Total energy consumption during the last hour, that is, the 0.00 kWh
(resettable) most recent 60 minutes.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
-3000.00 … 3000.00 Total energy. 10 = 1 kWh
kWh
45.27 Daily peak power Value of the peak power since midnight of the present 0.00 kW
value (resettable) day.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
-3000.00 … 3000.00 Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
kW
45.28 Daily peak power time Time of the peak power since midnight of the present day. 00:00:00
Time. N/A
45.29 Daily total energy Total energy consumption since midnight of the present 0.00 kWh
(resettable) day.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
-30000.00 … Total energy. 1 = 1 kWh
30000.00 kWh
45.30 Last day total energy Total energy consumption during the previous day, that is, 0.00 kWh
between midnight of the previous day and midnight of the
present day
-30000.00 … Total energy. 1 = 1 kWh
30000.00 kWh
ACS180 [Link] Page 257 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 257

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
45.31 Monthly peak power Value of the peak power during the present month, that is, 0.00 kW
value (resettable) since midnight of the first day of the present month.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
-3000.00 … 3000.00 Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
kW
45.32 Monthly peak power Date of the peak power during the present month. 1/1/1980
date
1/1/1980...6/5/2159 Date. N/A
45.33 Monthly peak power Time of the peak power during the present month. 00:00:00
time
Time. N/A
45.34 Monthly total energy Total energy consumption from the beginning of the 0.00 kWh
(resettable) present month.
You can reset the value by setting it to zero.
-1000000.00 … Total energy. 0.01 = 1 kWh
1000000.00 kWh
45.35 Last month total Total energy consumption during the previous month, that 0.00 kWh
energy is, between midnight of the first day or the previous month
and midnight of the first day of the present month.
-1000000.00 … 0.01 = 1 kWh
1000000.00 kWh
45.36 Lifetime peak power Value of the peak power over the drive lifetime. 0.00 kW
value
-3000.00 … 3000.00 Peak power value. 10 = 1 kW
kW
45.37 Lifetime peak power Date of the peak power over the drive lifetime. 1/1/1980
date
Date. N/A
45.38 Lifetime peak power Time of the peak power over the drive lifetime. 00:00:00
time
Time. N/A
46
46 Monitoring/scaling Speed supervision settings; actual signal filtering; general
settings scaling settings.

46.01 Speed scaling Defines the maximum speed value used to define the 1500.00 rpm
acceleration ramp rate and the initial speed value used to
define the deceleration ramp rate (see parameter group
23 Speed reference ramp). The speed acceleration and
deceleration ramp times are therefore related to this value
(not to parameter 30.12 Maximum speed).
Also defines the 16-bit scaling of speed-related
parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to
20000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
0.10…30000.00 rpm Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed. 1 = 1 rpm
ACS180 [Link] Page 258 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

258 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
46.02 Frequency scaling Defines the maximum frequency value used to define the 50.00 Hz
acceleration ramp rate and the initial frequency value
used to define deceleration ramp rate (see parameter
group 28 Frequency reference chain). The frequency
acceleration and deceleration ramp times are therefore
related to this value (not to parameter 30.14 Maximum
frequency.
Also defines the 16-bit scaling of frequency-related
parameters. The value of this parameter corresponds to
20000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
0.10…1000.00 Hz Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial frequency. 10 = 1 Hz
46.03 Torque scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of torque parameters. The value 100.0%
of this parameter (in percent of nominal motor torque)
corresponds to 10000 in eg. fieldbus communication.
0.1…1000.0% Torque corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 10 = 1%
46.04 Power scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of power parameters. The value 100.00
of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in the fieldbus
communication. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16
Unit selection.
0.10…30000.00 Power corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 1 = 1 unit
46.05 Current scaling Defines the 16-bit scaling of current parameters. The 100 A
value of this parameter corresponds to 10000 in fieldbus,
master/follower, etc. communication.
0…30000 A Current corresponding to 10000 on fieldbus. 1=1A
46.06 Speed ref zero scaling Defines a speed corresponding to a zero reference 0.00 rpm
received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus
interface, or interface FBA A). For example, with a setting
of 500, the fieldbus reference range of 0…20000 would
correspond to a speed of 500…[46.01] rpm.
Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives
communication profile.
0.00 … 30000.00 rpm Speed corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference. 1 = 1 rpm
46.07 Frequency ref zero Defines a frequency corresponding to a zero reference 0.00 Hz
scaling received from fieldbus (either the embedded fieldbus
interface, or interface FBA A or FBA B). For example, with
a setting of 30, the fieldbus reference range of 0…20000
would correspond to a speed of 30…[46.02] Hz.
Note: This parameter is effective only with the ABB Drives
communication profile.
0.00 … 1000.00 Hz Speed corresponding to minimum fieldbus reference. 10 = 1 Hz
46.11 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signals 01.01 Motor speed used. 500 ms
speed
2…20000 ms Motor speed signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
46.12 Filter time output Defines a filter time for signal 01.06 Output frequency. 500 ms
frequency
2…20000 ms Output frequency signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
46.13 Filter time motor Defines a filter time for signal 01.10 Motor torque. 100 ms
torque
2…20000 ms Motor torque signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
ACS180 [Link] Page 259 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 259

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
46.14 Filter time power Defines a filter time for signal 01.14 Output power. 100 ms
2…20000 ms Output power signal filter time. 1 = 1 ms
46.21 At speed hysteresis Defines the “at setpoint” limits for speed control of the 50.00 rpm
drive.
When the difference between reference (22.87 Speed
reference act 7) and the speed (24.02 Used speed
feedback) is smaller than 46.21 At speed hysteresis, the
drive is considered to be “at setpoint”. This is indicated by
bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word.

24.02 (rpm)

22.87 + 46.21 (rpm)

Drive at setpoint 22.87 (rpm)
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
22.87 - 46.21 (rpm)

0 rpm

0.00…30000.00 rpm Limit for “at setpoint” indication in speed control. See par.
46.01
46.22 At frequency Defines the “at setpoint” limits for frequency control of the 2.00 Hz
hysteresis drive. When the absolute difference between reference
(28.96 Frequency ref ramp input) and actual frequency
(01.06 Output frequency) is smaller than 46.22 At
frequency hysteresis, the drive is considered to be “at
setpoint”. This is indicated by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status
word.

01.06 (Hz)

28.96 + 46.22 (Hz)

Drive at setpoint 28.96 (Hz)
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
28.96 - 46.22 (Hz)

0 Hz

0.00…1000.00 Hz Limit for “at setpoint” indication in frequency control. See par.
46.02
ACS180 [Link] Page 260 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

260 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
46.23 At torque hysteresis Defines the “at setpoint” limits for torque control of the 5.0%
drive. When the absolute difference between reference
(26.73 Torque reference act 4) and actual torque (01.10
Motor torque) is smaller than 46.23 At torque hysteresis,
the drive is considered to be “at setpoint”. This is indicated
by bit 8 of 06.11 Main status word

01.10 (%)

26.73 + 46.23(%)
Drive at setpoint 26.73 (%)
(06.11 bit 8 = 1)
26.73 - 46.23 (%)

0%

0.0…300.0% Limit for “at setpoint” indication in torque control. See par.
46.03
46.31 Above speed limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.00 rpm
speed control. This is indicated by bit 10 of parameter
06.11 and parameter 06.17. When actual speed exceeds
the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.00…30000.00 rpm “Above limit” indication trigger level for speed control. See par.
46.01
46.32 Above frequency limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.00 Hz
frequency control. This is indicated by bit 10 of parameter
06.11 and parameter 06.17. When actual frequency
exceeds the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is
set.
0.00…1000.00 Hz “Above limit” indication trigger level for frequency control. See par.
46.02
46.33 Above torque limit Defines the trigger level for “above limit” indication in 0.0%
torque control. This is indicated by bit 10 of parameter
06.11 and parameter 06.17. When actual torque exceeds
the limit, bit 10 of 06.17 Drive status word 2 is set.
0.0…1600.0% “Above limit” indication trigger level for torque control. See par.
46.03
46.41 kWh pulse scaling Defines the trigger level for the “kWh pulse” on for 50 ms. 1.000 kWh
The output of the pulse is bit 9 of 05.22 Diagnostic word 3.
0.001… “kWh pulse” on trigger level. 1 = 1 kWh
1000.000 kWh
ACS180 [Link] Page 261 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 261

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
47
47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read
from using other parameters’ source and target settings.
Note that there are different storage parameters for
different data types.
See also section Data storage parameters (page 114).
47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Data storage parameter 1. 0.000
Parameters 47.01…47.04 are real 32-bit numbers that
can be used as source values of other parameters.
-2147483.008… 32-bit real (floating point) number. -
2147483.008
47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Data storage parameter 2. 0.000
See also parameter 47.01.
-2147483.008… 32-bit real (floating point) number. -
2147483.008
47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Data storage parameter 3. 0.000
See also parameter 47.01.
-2147483.008… 32-bit real (floating point) number. -
2147483.008
47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Data storage parameter 4. 0.000
See also parameter 47.01.
-2147483.008… 32-bit real (floating point) number. -
2147483.008
47.11 Data storage 1 int32 Data storage parameter 9. 0
-2147483648… 32-bit integer. -
2147483647
47.12 Data storage 2 int32 Data storage parameter 10. 0
-2147483648… 32-bit integer. -
2147483647
47.13 Data storage 3 int32 Data storage parameter 11. 0
-2147483648… 32-bit integer. -
2147483647
47.14 Data storage 4 int32 Data storage parameter 12. 0
-2147483648… 32-bit integer. -
2147483647
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 Data storage parameter 17. 0
-32768…32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.22 Data storage 2 int16 Data storage parameter 18. 0
-32768…32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.23 Data storage 3 int16 Data storage parameter 19. 0
-32768…32767 16-bit data. 1=1
47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Data storage parameter 20. 0
-32768…32767 16-bit data. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 262 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

262 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
49
49 Panel port Communication settings for the control panel port on the
communication drive.

49.01 Node ID number Defines the node ID of the drive. All devices connected to 1
the network must have a unique node ID.
Note: For networked drives, it is advisable to reserve ID 1
for spare/replacement drives.
1…32 Node ID. 1=1
49.03 Baud rate Defines the transfer rate of the link. 115.2 kbps
38.4 kbps 38.4 kbit/s. 1
57.6 kbps 57.6 kbit/s. 2
86.4 kbps 86.4 kbit/s. 3
115.2 kbps 115.2 kbit/s. 4
230.4 kbps 230.4 kbit/s. 5
49.04 Communication loss Sets a timeout for control panel (or PC tool) 10.0 s
time communication. If a communication break lasts longer
than the timeout, the action specified by parameter 49.05
Communication loss action is taken.
0.3…3000.0 s Panel/PC tool communication timeout. 10 = 1 s
49.05 Communication loss Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel (or PC tool) Fault
action communication break.
No action No action taken. 0
Fault Drive trips on 7081 Control panel loss. 1
Last speed Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and freezes 2
the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The
speed is determined on the basis of actual speed using
850 ms low-pass filtering.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7EE Panel loss warning and sets the 3
speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41 Speed ref
safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when frequency
reference is being used).
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
49.06 Refresh settings Applies the settings of parameters 49.01…49.05. Done
Note: Refreshing may cause a communication break, so
reconnecting the drive may be required.
Done Refresh done or not requested. 0
Configure Refresh parameters 49.01…49.05. The value reverts 1
automatically to Done.
49.19 Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 1 of Auto
view 1 the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
Auto Shows the factory default parameters. 0
Motor speed used 01.01 Motor speed used 1
Output frequency 01.06 Output frequency 3
Motor current 01.07 Motor current 4
ACS180 [Link] Page 263 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 263

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Motor current % of 01.08 Motor current % of motor nom 5
motor nominal
Motor torque 01.10 Motor torque 6
DC voltage 01.11 DC voltage 7
Output power 01.14 Output power 8
Speed ref ramp in 23.01 Speed ref ramp input 10
Speed ref ramp out 23.02 Speed ref ramp output 11
Speed ref used 24.01 Used speed reference 12
Freq ref used 28.02 Frequency ref ramp output 14
Process PID out 40.01 Process PID output actual 16
Temp sensor 1 The output is used to feed an excitation current to the 20
excitation temperature sensor 1, see parameter 35.11 Temperature
1 source. See also section Motor thermal protection
(page 106).
Abs motor speed used 01.61 Abs motor speed used 26
Abs motor speed % 01.62 Abs motor speed % 27
Abs output frequency 01.63 Abs output frequency 28
Abs motor torque 01.64 Abs motor torque 30
Abs output power 01.66 Abs output power 31
Abs motor shaft power 01.68 Abs motor shaft power 32
External PID1 out 71.01 External PID act value 33
AO1 data storage 13.91 AO1 data storage. 37
Other
49.20 Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 2 of Auto
view 2 the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
See parameter 49.19 for the selection.
49.21 Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 3 of Auto
view 3 the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
See parameter 49.19 for the selection.
49.30 Basic panel menu Parameter to hide main level menus in the integrated or 0000h
hiding Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
Values are:
0 = Menu visible
1 = Menu hidden

Bit Value
0 Motor data
1 Motor control
2 Control macros
3 Diagnostics
4 Energy efficiency
5 Parameters
6...15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 264 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

264 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
49.219 Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 4 of Auto
view 4 the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19.
49.220 Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 5 of Auto
view 5 the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19.
49.221 Basic panel home Selects the parameters that are shown in Home view 6 of Auto
view 6 the integrated or Basic panel (ACS-BP-S).
For the selections, see parameter 49.19.
40
58 Embedded fieldbus Configuration of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface.
See chapter Fieldbus control through the embedded
fieldbus interface (EFB).
58.01 Protocol enable Enables/disables the embedded fieldbus interface and None
selects the protocol to use.
None None (communication disabled). 0
Modbus RTU Embedded fieldbus interface is enabled and uses the 1
Modbus RTU protocol.
58.02 Protocol ID Displays the protocol ID and revision. -
This parameter is read-only.
Protocol ID and revision. 1=1
58.03 Node address Defines the node address of the drive on the fieldbus link. 1
Values 1…247 are allowable. Two devices with the same
address are not allowed on-line.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
0…255 Node address (values 1…127 are allowed). 1=1
58.04 Baud rate Selects the transfer rate of the Modbus fieldbus link. 19.2 kbps
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
4.8 kbps 4.8 kbit/s. 1
9.6 kbps 9.6 kbit/s. 2
19.2 kbps 19.2 kbit/s. 3
38.4 kbps 38.4 kbit/s. 4
57.6 kbps 57.6 kbit/s. 5
76.8 kbps 76.8 kbit/s. 6
115.2 kbps 115.2 kbit/s. 7
58.05 Parity Selects the type of parity bit and number of stop bits. 8 EVEN 1
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
8 NONE 1 Eight data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit. 0
8 NONE 2 Eight data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits. 1
8 EVEN 1 Eight data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit. 2
8 ODD 1 Eight data bits, odd parity bit, one stop bit. 3
ACS180 [Link] Page 265 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 265

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
58.06 Communication Takes changed EFB settings in use, or activates silent Enabled
control mode.
Enabled Normal operation. 0
Refresh settings Refreshes settings (Modbus parameters 58.01…58.05, 1
58.14…58.17, 58.25, 58.28…58.34) and takes changed
EFB configuration settings in use.

Reverts automatically to Enabled.

Silent mode Activates silent mode (no messages are transmitted). 2
Silent mode can be terminated by activating the Refresh
settings selection of this parameter.
58.07 Communication Displays the status of the EFB communication. -
diagnostics This parameter is read-only.
Note that the name is only visible when the error is
present (bit value is 1).

Bit Name Description

0 Init failed 1 = EFB initialization failed
1 Addr config err 1 = Node address not allowed by protocol
2 Silent mode 1 = Drive not allowed to transmit
0 = Drive allowed to transmit
3 Autobauding
4 Wiring error 1 = Errors detected (A/B wires possibly swapped)
5 Parity error 1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.04 and 58.05
6 Baud rate error 1 = Error detected: check parameters 58.05 and 58.04
7 No bus activity 1 = 0 bytes received during last 5 seconds
8 No packets 1 = 0 packets (addressed to any device) detected during last 5
seconds
9 Noise or addressing 1 = Errors detected (interference, or another device with the
error same address on line)
10 Comm loss 1 = 0 packets addressed to the drive received within timeout
(58.16)
11 CW/Ref loss 1 = No control word or references received within timeout (58.16)
12 Not active Reserved
13 Protocol 1 Reserved
14 Protocol 2 Reserved
15 Internal error 1 = Internal errors detected

0000h…FFFFh EFB communication status. 1=1

58.08 Received packets Displays a count of valid packets addressed to the drive. -
During normal operation, this number increases
constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset
down for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Number of received packets addressed to the drive. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 266 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

266 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
58.09 Transmitted packets Displays a count of valid packets transmitted by the drive. -
During normal operation, this number increases
constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset
down for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Number of transmitted packets. 1=1
58.10 All packets Displays a count of valid packets addressed to any device -
on the bus. During normal operation, this number
increases constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset
down for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Number of all received packets. 1=1
58.11 UART errors Displays a count of character errors received by the drive. -
An increasing count indicates a configuration problem on
the bus.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset
down for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Number of UART errors. 1=1
58.12 CRC errors Displays a count of packets with a CRC error received by -
the drive. An increasing count indicates interference on
the bus.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset
down for over 3 seconds.
0…4294967295 Number of CRC errors. 1=1
58.14 Communication loss Selects how the drive reacts to an EFB communication Fault
action break. The drive does not trip if only reference is coming
from EFB and the communication is lost.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameters 58.15 Communication loss mode
and 58.16 Communication loss time.
No action No action taken (monitoring disabled). 0
Fault Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This occurs only if 1
control in the currently active control location is expected
from the EFB.
Last speed Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and 2
freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at.
The speed is determined on the basis of actual speed
using 850 ms low-pass filtering. This occurs only if control
is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
Speed ref safe Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning and 3
sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 22.41
Speed ref safe (or 28.41 Frequency ref safe when
frequency reference is being used). This occurs only if
control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
ACS180 [Link] Page 267 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 267

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Fault always Drive trips on 6681 EFB comm loss. This happens even 4
thought the drive is in a control location where the EFB
start/stop or reference is not used.
Warning Drive generates an A7CE EFB comm loss warning. This 5
occurs even though no control is expected from the EFB.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
58.15 Communication loss Defines which message types reset the timeout counter Cw / Ref1 /
mode for detecting an EFB communication loss. Ref2
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameters 58.14 Communication loss action
and 58.16 Communication loss time.
Any message Any message addressed to the drive resets the timeout. 1
Cw / Ref1 / Ref2 A write of the control word or a reference resets the 2
timeout.
58.16 Communication loss Sets a timeout for EFB communication. If a 3.0 s
time communication break lasts longer than the timeout, the
action specified by parameter 58.14 Communication loss
action is taken.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
See also parameter 58.15 Communication loss mode.
Notes:
• There is a 30-second boot-up delay immediately after
power-up. During the delay, the communication break
monitoring is disabled (but communication itself can be
active).
0.0…6000.0 s EFB communication timeout. 1=1
58.17 Transmit delay Defines a minimum response delay in addition to any fixed 0 ms
delay imposed by the protocol.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
0…65535 ms Minimum response delay. 1=1
58.18 EFB control word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by the -
drive to the Modbus controller. For debugging purposes.
This parameter is read-only.
0...FFFFFFFFh Control word sent by the controller to the drive. 1=1
58.19 EFB status word Displays the raw (unmodified) status word for debugging -
purposes.
This parameter is read-only.
0...FFFFFFFFh Status word sent by the drive to the controller. 1=1
58.25 Control profile Defines the communication profile used by the protocol. ABB Drives
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
ABB Drives ABB Drives control profile (with a 16-bit control word) 0
DCU Profile DCU control profile (with a 16 or 32-bit control word) 5
ACS180 [Link] Page 268 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

268 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
58.26 EFB ref1 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 1 received Speed or
through the embedded fieldbus interface. frequency
The scaled reference is displayed by 03.09 EFB reference
1.
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the 0
currently active operation mode as follows.

Operation mode
Reference 1 type
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control Speed
Torque control Speed
Frequency control Frequency

Transparent No scaling is applied. 1

General Generic reference without a specific unit. Scaling: 1 = 100. 2
Torque Torque reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 3
46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed Speed reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 4
46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency Frequency reference. The scaling is defined by parameter 5
46.02 Frequency scaling.
58.27 EFB ref2 type Selects the type and scaling of reference 2 received Speed or
through the embedded fieldbus interface. frequency
The scaled reference is displayed by 03.10 EFB reference
2.
58.28 EFB act1 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 1 Speed or
transmitted to the [Link] through the embedded frequency
fieldbus interface.
Speed or frequency Type and scaling is chosen automatically according to the 0
currently active operation mode as follows:

Operation mode
Actual 1 type (source) Scaling
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control Speed
46.01 Speed scaling
Torque control (01.01 Motor speed used)
Frequency
Frequency control 46.02 Frequency scaling
(01.06 Output frequency)

Transparent The value selected by parameter 58.31 EFB act1 1

transparent source is sent as actual value 1. No scaling is
applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
General The value selected by parameter 58.31 EFB act1 2
transparent source is sent as actual value 1 with a 16-bit
scaling of 100 =1 unit (ie. integer and two decimals).
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 1. Scaling is 3
defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scaling.
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 1. Scaling 4
is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 1. Scaling 5
is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
ACS180 [Link] Page 269 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 269

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
58.29 EFB act2 type Selects the type/source and scaling of actual value 2 Transparent
transmitted to the fieldbus network through the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Speed or frequency Type/source and scaling are chosen automatically 0
according to the currently active operation mode as
follows:

Operation mode
Actual 1 type (source) Scaling
(see par. 19.01)
Speed control Speed
46.01 Speed scaling
Torque control (01.01 Motor speed used)
Frequency
Frequency control 46.02 Frequency scaling
(01.06 Output frequency)

Transparent The value selected by parameter 58.32 EFB act2 1

transparent source is sent as actual value 2. No scaling is
applied (the 16-bit scaling is 1 = 1 unit).
General The value selected by parameter 58.32 EFB act2 2
transparent source is sent as actual value 2 with a 16-bit
scaling of 100 =1 unit (i.e. integer and two decimals).
Torque 01.10 Motor torque is sent as actual value 2. Scaling is 3
defined by parameter 46.03 Torque scalingg.
Speed 01.01 Motor speed used is sent as actual value 2. Scaling 4
is defined by parameter 46.01 Speed scaling.
Frequency 01.06 Output frequency is sent as actual value 2. Scaling 5
is defined by parameter 46.02 Frequency scaling.
58.31 EFB act1 transparent Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter Not selected
source 58.28 EFB act1 type is set to Transparent.
Not selected None. 0
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
58.32 EFB act2 transparent Selects the source of actual value 1 when parameter Not selected
source 58.29 EFB act2 type is set to Transparent.
Not selected None. 0
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
58.33 Addressing mode Defines the mapping between parameters and holding Mode 0
registers in the 400101…465535 Modbus register range.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
Mode 0 16-bit values (groups 1…99, indexes 1…99): 0
Register address = 400000 + 100 × parameter group +
parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be
mapped to register 400000 + 2200 + 80 = 402280.
32-bit values (groups 1…99, indexes 1…99):
Register address = 420000 + 200 × parameter group +
2 × parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80
would be mapped to register 420000 + 4400 + 160 =
424560.
ACS180 [Link] Page 270 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

270 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Mode 1 16-bit values (groups 1…255, indexes 1…255): 1
Register address = 400000 + 256 × parameter group +
parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80 would be
mapped to register 400000 + 5632 + 80 = 405712.
Mode 2 32-bit values (groups 1…127, indexes 1…255): 2
Register address = 400000 + 512 × parameter group +
2 × parameter index. For example, parameter 22.80
would be mapped to register 400000 + 11264 + 160 =
411424.
58.34 Word order Selects in which order 16-bit registers of 32-bit LO-HI
parameters are transferred.
For each register, the first byte contains the high order
byte and the second byte contains the low order byte.
Changes to this parameter take effect after the control unit
is rebooted or the new settings validated by parameter
58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).
HI-LO The first register contains the high order word, the second 0
contains the low order word.
LO-HI The first register contains the low order word, the second 1
contains the high order word.
58.101 Data I/O 1 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master CW 16bit
accesses when it reads from or writes to the register
address corresponding to Modbus register 1 (400001).
The master defines the type of the data (input or output).
The value is transmitted in a Modbus frame consisting of
two 16-bit words. If the value is 16-bit, it is transmitted in
the LSW (least significant word). If the value is 32-bit, the
subsequent parameter is also reserved for it and must be
set to None.
None No mapping, register is always zero. 0
CW 16bit ABB Drives, CiA402 and Transparent 16 profiles: 16-bit 1
control word; DCU Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU
control word
Ref1 16bit Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
Ref2 16bit Reference REF2 (16 bits) 3
SW 16bit ABB Drives profile: 16-bit ABB drives status word; DCU 4
Profile: lower 16 bits of the DCU status word
Act1 16bit Actual value ACT1 (16 bits) 5
Act2 16bit Actual value ACT2 (16 bits) 6
CW 32bit Control Word (32 bits) 11
Ref1 32bit Reference REF1 (32 bits) 12
Ref2 32bit Reference REF2 (32 bits) 13
SW 32bit Status Word (32 bits) 14
Act1 32bit Actual value ACT1 (32 bits) 15
Act2 32bit Actual value ACT2 (32 bits) 16
CW2 16bit ABB Drives profile: not used; DCU Profile: upper 16 bits of 21
the DCU control word
SW2 16bit ABB Drives profile: not used / always zero; DCU Profile: 24
upper 16 bits of the DCU status word.
ACS180 [Link] Page 271 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 271

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
RO/DIO control word Parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control word. 31
AO1 data storage Parameter 13.91 AO1 data storage. 32
Feedback data Parameter 40.91 Feedback data storage. 40
storage
Setpoint data storage Parameter 40.92 Setpoint data storage 41
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
58.102 Data I/O 2 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master Ref1 16bit
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400002.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.103 Data I/O 3 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master Ref2 16bit
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400003.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.104 Data I/O 4 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master SW 16bit
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400004.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.105 Data I/O 5 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master Act1 16bit
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400005.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.106 Data I/O 6 Defines the address in the drive which the Modbus master Act2 16bit
accesses when it reads from or writes to register address
400006.
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.107 Data I/O 7 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400007. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.108 Data I/O 8 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400008. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.109 Data I/O 9 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400009. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.110 Data I/O 10 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400010. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.111 Data I/O 11 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400011. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.112 Data I/O 12 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400012. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.113 Data I/O 13 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400013. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.114 Data I/O 14 Parameter selector for Modbus register address 400014. None
For the selections, see parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
71
71 External PID1 Configuration of external PID.
71.01 External PID act value See parameter 40.01 Process PID output actual. -
71.02 Feedback act value See parameter 40.02 Process PID feedback actual. -
71.03 Setpoint act value See parameter 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual. -
71.04 Deviation act value See parameter 40.04 Process PID deviation actual. -
ACS180 [Link] Page 272 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

272 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
71.06 PID status word Displays status information on process external PID -
control.
This parameter is read-only.

Bit Name Value

0 PID active 1 = Process PID control active.
1 Reserved
2 Output frozen 1 = Process PID controller output frozen. Bit is set if parameter
71.38 Output freeze enable is TRUE, or the deadband function is
active (bit 9 is set).
3…6 Reserved
7 Output limit high 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.37.
8 Output limit low 1 = PID output is being limited by par. 40.36.
9 Deadband active 1 = Deadband is active.
10…11 Reserved
12 Internal setpoint 1 = Internal setpoint active (see par. 40.16…40.16)
active
13…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Process PID control status word. 1=1

71.07 PID operation mode See parameter 40.07 Process PID operation mode. Off
71.08 Feedback 1 source See parameter 40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source. Not selected
71.11 Feedback filter time See parameter 40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time. 0.000 s
71.14 Setpoint scaling Defines, together with parameter 71.15 Output scaling, a 1500.00
general scaling factor for the external PID control chain.
The scaling can be utilized when, for example, the
process setpoint is input in Hz, and the output of the PID
controller is used as an rpm value in speed control. In this
case, this parameter might be set to 50, and parameter
71.15 to the nominal motor speed at 50 Hz.
In effect, the output of the PID controller [71.15] when
deviation (setpoint - feedback) = [71.14] and [71.32] = 1.
Note: The scaling is based on the ratio between 71.14
and 71.15. For example, the values 50 and 1500 would
produce the same scaling as 1 and 3.
-200000.00... Process setpoint base. 1=1
200000.00
71.15 Output scaling See parameter 71.14 Setpoint scaling. 1500.00
-200000.00... Process PID controller output base. 1=1
200000.00
71.16 Setpoint 1 source See parameter 40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source. Not selected
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1 See parameter 40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1. Not selected
71.20 Internal setpoint sel2 See parameter 40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2. Not selected
71.21 Internal setpoint 1 See parameter 40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1. 0.00 PID
customer
units
71.22 Internal setpoint 2 See parameter 40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2. 0.00 PID
customer
units
ACS180 [Link] Page 273 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 273

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
71.23 Internal setpoint 3 See parameter 40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3. 0.00 PID
customer
units
71.26 Setpoint min See parameter 40.26 Set 1 setpoint min. 0.00
71.27 Setpoint max See parameter 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max. 200000.00
71.31 Deviation inversion See parameter 40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion. Not inverted
(Ref - Fbk)
71.32 Gain See parameter 40.32 Set 1 gain. 1.00
71.33 Integration time See parameter 40.33 Set 1 integration time. 60.0 s
71.34 Derivation time See parameter 40.34 Set 1 derivation time. 0.000 s
71.35 Derivation filter time See parameter 40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time. 0.0 s
71.36 Output min See parameter 40.36 Set 1 output min. -200000.00
71.37 Output max See parameter 40.37 Set 1 output max. 200000.00
71.38 Output freeze enable See parameter 40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable. Not selected
71.39 Deadband range The control program compares the absolute value of 0.0
parameter 71.04 Deviation act value to the deadband
range defined by this parameter. If the absolute value is
within the deadband range for the time period defined by
parameter 71.40 Deadband delay, PID's deadband mode
is activated and 71.06 PID status word bit 9 Deadband
active is set. Then PID's output is frozen and 71.06 PID
status word bit 2 Output frozen is set.
If the absolute value is equal or greater than the
deadband range, PID's deadband mode is deactivated.
0.0…200000.0 Range 1=1
71.40 Deadband delay Defines the deadband delay for the deadband function. 0.0 s
See parameter 71.39 Deadband range.
0.0…3600.0 s Delay 1=1s
71.58 Increase prevention See parameter 40.58 Set 1 increase prevention. No
71.59 Decrease prevention See parameter 40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention. No
71.62 Internal setpoint actual See parameter 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual. -
71.79 External PID units See parameter 40.79 Set 1 units. 1
76
95 HW configuration Various hardware-related settings.
95.01 Supply voltage Selects the supply voltage range. This parameter is used Automatic /
by the drive to determine the nominal voltage of the supply not selected
network. The parameter also affects the current ratings
and the DC voltage control functions (trip and brake
chopper activation limits) of the drive.
WARNING! An incorrect setting may cause the
motor to rush uncontrollably, or the brake chopper
or resistor to overload.
Note: The selections shown depend on the hardware of
the drive. If only one voltage range is valid for the drive in
question, it is selected by default.
Automatic / not No voltage range selected. The drive will not start 0
selected modulating before a range is selected, unless parameter
95.02 Adaptive voltage limits is set to Enable, in which
case the drive estimates the supply voltage itself.
ACS180 [Link] Page 274 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

274 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
208…240 V 200…240 V, available for ACS180-04-xxxx-1/-2 drives 1
180…480 V 180…480 V, available for ACS180-04-xxxx-4 drives 2
95.02 Adaptive voltage limits Enables adaptive voltage limits. Enable
Adaptive voltage limits can be used if, for example, an
IGBT supply unit is used to raise the DC voltage level. If
the communication between the inverter and IGBT supply
unit is active, the voltage limits are related to the DC
voltage reference from the IGBT supply unit. Otherwise
the limits are calculated based on the measured DC
voltage at the end of the pre-charging sequence.
This function is also useful if the AC supply voltage to the
drive is high, as the warning levels are raised accordingly.
Disable Adaptive voltage limits disabled. 0
Enable Adaptive voltage limits enabled. 1
95.03 Estimated AC supply AC supply voltage estimated by calculation. Estimation is -
voltage done every time the drive is powered up and is based on
the rise speed of voltage level of the DC bus while the
drive charges the DC bus.
0.0…65535.0 V Voltage. 10 = 1 V
95.20 HW options word 1 Specifies hardware-related options that require -
differentiated parameter defaults.
This parameter is not affected by a parameter restore.

Bit Name Value

0 Supply frequency If you change the value of this bit, you have to do a complete reset to
60 Hz the drive after the change. After reset you have to reselect the macro
to be used.
See section Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and
60 Hz supply frequency settings on page 312. 0 = 50 Hz.
1 = 60 Hz.
1…12 Reserved
13 du/dt filter When active, an external du/dt filter is connected to the drive/inverter
activation output. The setting will limit the output switching frequency, and
force the fan of the drive/inverter module to full speed.
0 = du/dt filter inactive.
1 = du/dt filter active.
14…15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Hardware options configuration word. 1=1

ACS180 [Link] Page 275 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 275

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
95.26 Motor disconnect Enables the use of the motor disconnect switch, or selects Disable
switch the source for the enable signal. When enabled, the drive
does not trip to a fault when it detects the disconnection
but remains operational and returns to normal operation
after a reconnection.
When this parameter is enabled, the drive will go through
the following sequence:
1. Motor is disconnected: Drive detects the disconnection
and indicates it with warning A784. The drive remains
in operation and waits for motor reconnection.
2. Motor is reconnected: Drive detects the reconnection,
removes the warning and returns to normal operation.
The last active reference before the disconnection is in
use.
Note: This feature is only available in scalar mode. This
parameter does not affect vector mode behavior.
0 Disable. 1=1
1 Enable. 1=1
95.200 Cooling fan mode Change the cooling fan control mode Auto
Auto Cooling fan is controlled automatically 0
Always on Cooling fan is always running 1
96
96 System Language selection; access levels; macro selection;
parameter save and restore; control unit reboot; user
parameter sets; unit selection; parameter checksum
calculation; user lock.
96.01 Language Selects the language of the parameter interface and other Not selected
displayed information when viewed on the control panel.
Notes:
• Not all languages listed below are necessarily
supported.
• This parameter does not affect the languages visible in
the Drive composer PC tool. (Those are specified
under View – Settings – Drive default language.)
Not selected Select a language. 0
English English. 1033
Deutsch German. 1031
Italiano Italian. 1040
Español Spanish. 3082
Portugues Portuguese. 2070
Nederlands Dutch. 1043
Français French. 1036
Suomi Finnish. 1035
Svenska Swedish. 1053
Russki Russian. 1049
Polski Polish. 1045
Türkçe Turkish. 1055
Chinese (Simplified, Simplified Chinese. 2052
PRC)
ACS180 [Link] Page 276 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

276 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
96.02 Pass code Pass codes can be entered into this parameter to activate 0
further access levels, for example additional parameters,
parameter lock, etc. See parameter 96.03 Access levels
status.
Entering “358” toggles the parameter lock, which prevents
the changing of all other parameters through the control
panel or the Drive composer PC tool.
Entering the user pass code (by default, “10000000”)
enables parameters 96.100…96.102, which can be used
to define a new user pass code and to select the actions
that are to be prevented.
Entering an invalid pass code will close the user lock if
open, ie. hide parameters 96.100…96.102. After entering
the code, check that the parameters are in fact hidden.
Note: We recommend that you change the default user
pass code.
See also section User lock (page 116).
0…99999999 Pass code. -
96.03 Access levels status Shows which access levels have been activated by pass 0b0000
codes entered into parameter 96.02 Pass code.

Bit Name
0 End user
1 Service
2 Advanced users
3…10 Reserved
11 OEM access level 1
12 OEM access level 2
13 OEM access level 3
14 Parameter lock
15 Reserved

0b0000...0b1111 Active access levels. -

96.04 Macro select Selects the control macro. See chapter Control macros for Done
more information.
After a selection is made, the parameter reverts
automatically to Done.
Note: When you change the default parameter values of a
macro, the new settings become valid immediately and
stay valid even if the power of the drive is switched off and
on. However, backup of the default parameter settings
(factory settings) of each standard macro is still available.
Done Macro selection complete; normal operation. 0
ABB standard ABB standard macro. For scalar motor control. 1
Hand/Auto Hand/Auto macro. 2
Hand/PID Hand/PID macro. 3
Modbus RTU Modbus RTU 5
Alternate Alternate macro 12
Motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer macro 13
PID PID macro 14
ACS180 [Link] Page 277 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 277

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
96.05 Macro active Shows which control macro is currently selected. See ABB
chapter Control macros for more information. standard
To change the macro, use parameter 96.04 Macro select.
Done Macro selection complete; normal operation. 0
ABB standard ABB standard macro. For scalar motor control. 1
Hand/Auto Hand/Auto macro. 5
Hand/PID Hand/PID macro. 8
Modbus RTU Modbus RTU 9
Alternate Alternate macro 12
Motor potentiometer Motor potentiometer macro 13
PID PID macro 14
96.06 Parameter restore Restores the original settings of the control program, ie. Done
parameter default values.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
Done Restoring is completed. 0
Restore defaults All editable parameter values are restored to default 8
values, except
• motor data and ID run results
• end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults
(external faults and changed), and the drive name
• control panel/PC communication settings
• fieldbus adapter settings
• control macro selection and the parameter defaults
implemented by it
• parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it.
• user lock configuration parameters 96.100…96.102.
Clear all All editable parameter values are restored to default 62
values, except
• end user texts, such as customized warnings and faults
(external faults and changed), and the drive name
• control panel/PC communication settings
• fieldbus adapter settings (clears entire existing
settings)
• control macro selection and the parameter defaults
implemented by it
• parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 and the
differentiated defaults implemented by it.
• user lock configuration parameters 96.100…96.102.
PC tool communication is interrupted during the restoring.
Reset all fieldbus Restores all fieldbus and communication related settings 32
settings to default values.
Note: Fieldbus, control panel and PC tool communication
are interrupted during the restore.
Reset home view Restores the Home view layout to show the values of the 512
default parameters defined by the control macro use.
ACS180 [Link] Page 278 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

278 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Reset end user texts Restores all end user texts to default values, including the 1024
drive name, contact info, customized fault and warning
texts and currency unit.
If the value of parameter 40.79 is set to User Text, then
the PID unit is also reset. If parameter 40.79 has some
other value, the PID unit cannot be reset.
Reset motor data Restores all motor nominal values and motor ID run 2
results to default values.
All to factory defaults Restores settings and all editable parameters back to 34560
initial factory values, except
the differentiated defaults implemented by parameter
95.20.
96.07 Parameter save Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent Done
manually memory on the drive control board to ensure that
operation can continue after cycling the power. Save the
parameters with this parameter
• to store values sent from the fieldbus
• when using external +24 V DC power supply to the
control unit: to save parameter changes before you
power down the control unit. The supply has a very
short hold-up time when powered off.
Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically
when changed from the PC tool or control panel but not
when altered through a fieldbus adapter connection.
Done Save completed. 0
Save Save in progress. 1
96.08 Control board boot Changing the value of this parameter to 1 reboots the 0
control unit (without requiring a power off/on cycle of the
complete drive module).
The value reverts to 0 automatically.
0 No action 1=1
1 Reboot the control unit.
96.10 User set status Shows the status of the user parameter sets. -
This parameter is read-only.
See also section User parameter sets (page 113).
n/a No user parameter sets have been saved. 0
Loading A user set is being loaded. 1
Saving A user set is being saved. 2
Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set. 3
User1 IO active User set 1 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User 4
set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User2 IO active User set 2 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User 5
set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User3 IO active User set 3 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User 6
set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User4 IO active User set 4 has been selected by parameters 96.12 User 7
set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
User1 backup User set 1 has been saved or loaded. 20
User2 backup User set 2 has been saved or loaded. 21
ACS180 [Link] Page 279 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 279

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
User3 backup User set 3 has been saved or loaded. 22
User4 backup User set 4 has been saved or loaded. 23
96.11 User set save/load Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets No action
of parameter settings.
The set that was in use before powering down the drive is
in use after the next power-up.
Notes:
• Some hardware configuration settings, such as fieldbus
and encoder configuration parameters (groups 14…16,
47, 50…58 and 92…93) are not included in user
parameter sets.
• Parameter changes made after loading a set are not
automatically stored – they must be saved using this
parameter.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running
No action Load or save operation complete; normal operation. 0
User set I/O mode Load user parameter set using parameters 96.12 User set 1
I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O mode in2.
Load set 1 Load user parameter set 1. 2
Load set 2 Load user parameter set 2. 3
Load set 3 Load user parameter set 3. 4
Load set 4 Load user parameter set 4. 5
Save to set 1 Save user parameter set 1. 18
Save to set 2 Save user parameter set 2. 19
Save to set 3 Save user parameter set 3. 20
Save to set 4 Save user parameter set 4. 21
96.12 User set I/O mode in1 When parameter 96.11 User set save/load is set to User Not selected
set I/O mode, selects the user parameter set together with
parameter 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 as follows:

Status of Status of source User parameter

source defined defined by par. set selected
by par. 96.12 96.13
0 0 Set 1
1 0 Set 2
0 1 Set 3
1 1 Set 4

Not selected 0. 0
Selected 1. 1
DI1 Digital input DI1 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 0). 2
DI2 Digital input DI2 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 1). 3
DI3 Digital input DI3 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 2). 4
DI4 Digital input DI4 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 3). 5
DI5 Digital input DI5 (10.02 DI delayed status, bit 4). 6
ACS180 [Link] Page 280 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

280 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Supervision 1 Bit 0 of 32.01 Supervision status. 24
Supervision 2 Bit 1 of 32.01 Supervision status. 25
Supervision 3 Bit 2 of 32.01 Supervision status. 26
Supervision 4 Bit 3 of 32.01 Supervision status 27
Supervision 5 Bit 4 of 32.01 Supervision status. 28
Supervision 6 Bit 5 of 32.01 Supervision status. 29
Other [bit] Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
96.13 User set I/O mode in2 See parameter 96.12 User set I/O mode in1. Not selected
96.16 Unit selection Selects the unit of parameters indicating power, 0b0000
temperature and torque.

Bit Name Information

0 Power unit 0 = kW
(mechanical) 1 = hp
1 Reserved
2 Temperature 0 = °C
unit 1 = °F
3 Reserved
4 Torque unit 0 = Nm (N·m)
1 = lbft (lb·ft)
5…15 Reserved

0b0000...0b1111 Unit selection word. 1=1

96.51 Clear fault and event Clears all events from the drive’s fault and event logs. Done
logger
Done 0 = No action. 0
Reset 1 = Resets (clears) fault and event logger. 1
96.54 Checksum action Selects how the drive reacts No action
• when 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 8 = 1
(Approved checksum A): if the parameter checksum
96.68 Actual checksum A does not match 96.71
Approved checksum A, and/or
• when 96.55 Checksum control word, bit 9 = 1
(Approved checksum B): if the parameter checksum
96.69 Actual checksum B does not match 96.72
Approved checksum B.
No action No action taken. (The checksum feature is not in use.) 0
Pure event The drive generates an event log entry (B686 Checksum 1
mismatch).
Warning The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum 2
mismatch).
Warning and prevent The drive generates a warning (A686 Checksum 3
start mismatch).
Starting the drive is prevented.
Fault The drive trips on 6200 Checksum mismatch. 4
ACS180 [Link] Page 281 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 281

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
96.55 Checksum control Bits 8…9 select which comparison(s) are made: 0b0000
word • Bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A): 96.68 Actual
checksum A is compared to 96.71 Approved checksum
A, and/or
• Bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum A): if 96.69 Actual
checksum B is compared to 96.72 Approved checksum
B.
Bits 12…13 select approved (reference) checksum
parameter(s) into which the actual checksum(s) from
parameter(s) are copied:
• Bit 12 = 1 (Set approved checksum A): Value of 96.68
Actual checksum A is copied into 96.71 Approved
checksum A and/or
• Bit 13 = 1 (Set approved checksum B): Value of 96.69
Actual checksum B copied into 96.72 Approved
checksum B.

Bit Name Information

0...7 Reserved
8 Approved checksum A 1 = Enabled: Checksum A (96.71) is observed. 0 =
Disabled.
9 Approved checksum B 1 = Enabled: Checksum B (96.72) is observed. 0 =
Disabled.
10...11 Reserved
12 Set approved checksum A 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.68 into 96.71. 0 = Done (copy has
been made).
13 Set approved checksum B 1 = Set: Copy value of 96.69 into 96.72. 0 = Done (copy has
been made).
14...15 Reserved

0b0000...0b1111 Checksum control word. 1=1

96.68 Actual checksum A Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum A. 0x0000
The checksum A is generated and updated whenever an
action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action and 96.55
Checksum control word, bit 8 = 1 (Approved checksum A)
The set of parameters for checksum A calculation does
not include fieldbus settings parameters.
The parameters included in the checksum A calculation
are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 15,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 35, 36, 37, 40,
41, 45, 46, 71, 95, 96, 97, 98, and 99.
See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page
114).
0x0000...0xffff Actual checksum A. 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 282 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

282 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
96.69 Actual checksum B Displays the actual parameter configuration checksum B. 0x0000
The checksum B is generated and updated whenever an
action is selected in 96.54 Checksum action and 96.55
Checksum control word, bit 9 = 1 (Approved checksum B)
The set of parameters for checksum B does not include:
• fieldbus settings
• motor data settings, and
• energy data settings parameters.
The parameters included in the checksum B calculation
are user editable parameters in parameter groups 10, 15,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 32, 35, 36, 37, 40,
41, 46, 71, 95, 96, and 97.
See also section Parameter checksum calculation (page
114).
0x0000...0xffff Actual checksum B. 1=1
96.71 Approved checksum A Approved (reference) checksum A. 0x0000
0x0000...0xffff Approved checksum A. -
96.72 Approved checksum B Approved (reference) checksum B. 0x0000
0x0000...0xffff Approved checksum B. -
96.78 550 compatibility Enables/disables a Modbus user to access a select set of Disabled
mode parameters using 550 register numbering.
See the supported parameters in section Parameters
supported by Modbus backwards compatibility with 550
on page 313.
Disable Using 550 compatibility mode is disabled 0
Enable Using 550 compatibility mode is enabled 1
96.100 Change user pass (Visible when user lock is open) 10000000
code To change the current user pass code, enter a new code
into this parameter as well as 96.101 Confirm user pass
code. A warning will be active until the new pass code is
confirmed. To cancel changing the pass code, close the
user lock without confirming. To close the lock, enter an
invalid pass code in parameter 96.02 Pass code, activate
parameter 96.08 Control board boot, or cycle the power.
See also section User lock (page 116).
10000000… New user pass code. -
99999999
96.101 Confirm user pass (Visible when user lock is open)
code Confirms the new user pass code entered in 96.100
Change user pass code.
10000000… Confirmation of new user pass code. -
99999999
ACS180 [Link] Page 283 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 283

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
96.102 User lock functionality (Visible when user lock is open) 0000h
Selects the actions or functionalities to be prevented by
the user lock. Note that the changes made take effect only
when the user lock is closed. See parameter 96.02 Pass
code.

Bit Name Information

0 Disable ABB access 1 = ABB access levels (service, advanced programmer, etc.; see
levels 96.03) disabled
1 Freeze parameter 1 = Changing the parameter lock state prevented, ie. pass code
lock state 358 has no effect
2 Disable file 1 = Loading of files to drive prevented. This applies to
download • firmware upgrades
• parameter restore
• loading of adaptive or application programs
• changing home view of control panel
• editing drive texts
• editing the favorite parameters list on control panel
• configuration settings made through control panel such as
time/date formats and enabling/disabling clock display.
3 Disable FB write to 1 = Disable fieldbus write to closed access level.
hidden
4 Disable backups 1 = Disable backup file download.
5…10 Reserved
11 Disable OEM access 1 = Disable OEM access level 1.
level 1
12 Disable OEM access 1 = Disable OEM access level 2.
level 2
13 Disable OEM access 1 = Disable OEM access level 3.
level 3
14, 15 Reserved

0000h…FFFFh Selection of actions to be prevented by user lock. -

ACS180 [Link] Page 284 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

284 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
97
97 Motor control Switching frequency; slip gain; voltage reserve; flux
braking; anti-cogging (signal injection); IR compensation.
97.01 Switching frequency Defines the switching frequency of the drive that is used 4 kHz
reference as long as the drive does not heat too much. See section
Switching frequency on page 84.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic
noise.
In multimotor systems, do not change the switching
frequency from the default value.
4 kHz 4 kHz. 4
8 kHz 8 kHz. 8
12 kHz 12 kHz. 12
97.02 Minimum switching Lowest switching frequency that is allowed. Depends on 1.5 kHz
frequency the frame size.
1.5 kHz 1.5 kHz. In some larger frame sizes 1 kHz is used instead. 1.5
2 kHz 2 kHz. 2
4 kHz 4 kHz. 4
8 kHz 8 kHz. 8
12 kHz 12 kHz. 12
97.03 Slip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the 100%
estimated motor slip. 100% means full slip gain; 0%
means no slip gain. The default value is 100%. Other
values can be used if a static speed error is detected
despite having the setting at full slip gain.
Example (with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm):
A 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the
drive. Despite having full slip gain (= 100%), a manual
tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a
speed value of 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000
rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip
gain should be increased to 105% (2 rpm / 40 rpm = 5%).
0…200% Slip gain. 1 = 1%
97.04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the -2%
voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive
enters the field weakening area.
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the
voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum
output voltage in steady-state operation is
0.95 × 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 V
The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field
weakening area can be improved by increasing the
voltage reserve value, but the drive enters the field
weakening area earlier.
-4…50% Voltage reserve. 1 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 285 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 285

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
97.05 Flux braking Defines the level of flux braking power. (Other stopping Disabled
and braking modes can be configured in parameter group
21 Start/stop mode).
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
Disabled Flux braking is disabled. 0
Moderate Flux level is limited during the braking. Deceleration time 1
is longer compared to full braking.
Full Maximum braking power. Almost all available current is 2
used to convert the mechanical braking energy to thermal
energy in the motor.
WARNING! Using full flux braking heats up the
motor especially in cyclic operation. Make sure
that the motor can withstand this if you have a
cyclic application.
97.06 Flux reference select Defines the source of flux reference. User flux
Notes: reference
• This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
• Do not use this parameter in scalar control mode, if the
parameter 97.20 U/F ratio is set to Squared.
Zero Minimum value of parameter 97.07 User flux reference. 0
User flux reference Parameter 97.07 User flux reference. 1
Other Source selection (see Terms and abbreviations). -
97.07 User flux reference Defines the flux reference when parameter 97.06 Flux 100.00%
reference select select is set to User flux reference.
Note:
• ABB recommends the range of 20.00%...120.00%.
0.00...200.00% User-defined flux reference. 100 = 1%
97.08 Optimizer minimum This parameter can be used to improve the control 0.0%
torque dynamics of a synchronous reluctance motor or a salient
permanent magnet synchronous motor.
As a rule of thumb, define a level to which the output
torque must rise with minimum delay. This will increase
the motor current and improve the torque response at low
speeds.
0.0...1600.0% Optimizer torque limit. 10 = 1%
97.11 TR tuning Rotor time constant tuning. 100%
This parameter can be used to improve torque accuracy in
closed-loop control of an induction motor. Normally, the
motor identification run provides sufficient torque
accuracy, but manual fine-tuning can be applied in
exceptionally demanding applications to achieve optimal
performance.
Note: This is an expert level parameter and should not be
adjusted without appropriate skill.
25…400% Rotor time constant tuning. 1 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 286 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

286 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
97.13 IR compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR 3.20%
compensation). The function is useful in applications with
a high break-away torque where vector control cannot be
applied.

U / UN
(%)

Relative output voltage. IR

compensation set to 15%.

100%

15% Relative output voltage. No

IR compensation.
f (Hz)
Field weakening point

50% of nominal
frequency

See also section IR compensation for scalar motor control

on page 67.
Typical IR compensation values are shown below.
3-phase 180…480V drives
PN (kW) 0, 37 0, 75 1, 1 2, 2 4 7, 5 15 22
IR 3, 5 3, 5 3, 2 2, 5 2 1, 5 1, 25 1, 2
compens
-ation
(%)
3-phase 200...240V drives
PN (kW) 0, 37 0, 75 1, 1 2, 2 3 7, 5 11
IR 3, 5 3, 5 2, 6 2, 4 2, 2 1, 7 1, 5
compens
-ation
(%)
1-phase 200…240V drives
PN (kW) 0, 37 0, 75 1, 1 1, 5 2, 2
IR 3, 0 2, 3 2, 0 1, 7 1, 5
compens
-ation
(%)

WARNING! Set IR compensation value as low as

possible. Large IR compensation value can lead to
overheating of the motor and damage to the drive,
if operated for longer periods at low speed.
0.00…50.00% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor 1 = 1%
voltage.
ACS180 [Link] Page 287 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 287

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
97.15 Motor model Selects whether the temperature-dependent parameters Disabled
temperature (such as stator or rotor resistance) of the motor model
adaptation adapt to actual (measured or estimated) temperature or
not.
See parameter group 35 Motor thermal protection for
selection of temperature measurement sources.
Disabled Temperature adaptation of motor model disabled. 0
Estimated temperature Estimated temperature (35.01 Motor estimated 1
temperature) used for adaptation of motor model.
97.16 Stator temperature Tunes the motor temperature dependence of stator 50
factor parameters (stator resistance).
0…200 % Tuning factor.
97.17 Rotor temperature Tunes the motor temperature dependence of rotor 100
factor parameters (eg. rotor resistance).
0…200 % Tuning factor.
97.20 U/F ratio Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio Disabled
below field weakening point. For scalar control only.
Linear Linear ratio for constant torque applications. 0
Squared Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications. 1
With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most
operating frequencies. Not recommended for permanent
magnet motors.
97.33 Speed estimate filter Defines a filtering time for estimated speed. 5.00
time
0.00...100.00 ms Filtering time for estimated speed. 1 = 1 ms
97.48 Udc stabilizer Enables or disables the DC bus voltage stabilizer. Disabled

Disabled DC bus voltage stabilizer disabled. 0

Enabled min DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, minimum stabilization. 50
Enabled mild DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, mild stabilization. 100
Enabled medium DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, medium stabilization. 300
Enabled strong DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, strong stabilization. 500
Enabled max DC bus voltage stabilizer enabled, maximum stabilization. 800
97.49 Slip gain for scalar Sets gain for slip compensation (in %) while drive is 0
operating in scalar control mode.
• A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the
frequency as the motor torque increases compensates
for the slip.
• Requires parameter 99.04 Motor control mode =
Scalar.
0 = No slip compensation.
1...200 = Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full
slip compensation according to parameters 99.08 Motor
nominal frequency and 99.09 Motor nominal speed.

0...200 % Slip compensation in %. 1 = 1%

ACS180 [Link] Page 288 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

288 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
97.94 IR comp max Sets the frequency at which IR compensation (set by 80.0
frequency parameter 97.13 IR compensation) reaches 0 V. The unit
is % of motor nominal frequency.
IR compensation
When enabled, IR compensation provides an extra
voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR
compensation, for example, in applications that require a
high breakaway torque.

Motor voltage

A = IR compensated
B = No compensation
97.13

f (Hz)
B
97.94

1.0...200.0 % IR compensation maximum frequency in %. 1 = 1%

97.135 Udc ripple Calculates ripple voltage. 0.0 V
0.0…200.0 V Voltage. 1=1V
98
98 User motor parameters Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the
motor model.
These parameters are useful for non-standard motors, or
to just get more accurate motor control of the motor on
site. A better motor model always improves the shaft
performance.
98.01 User motor model Activates the motor model parameters 98.02…98.12 and Not selected
mode 98.14.
Notes:
• Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID
run is selected by parameter 99.13 ID run requested.
The values of parameters 98.02…98.12 are then
updated according to the motor characteristics
identified during the ID run.
• Measurements made directly from the motor terminals
during the ID run are likely to produce slightly different
values than those on a data sheet from a motor
manufacturer.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Not selected Parameters 98.02…98.12 inactive. 0
Motor parameters The values of parameters 98.02…98.12are used as the 1
motor model.
ACS180 [Link] Page 289 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 289

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
98.02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. 0.00000 p.u.
With a star-connected motor, RS is the resistance of one
winding. With a delta-connected motor, RS is one-third of
the resistance of one winding.
0.00000…0.50000 Stator resistance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. 0.00000 p.u.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00000…0.50000 Rotor resistance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.04 Lm user Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. 0.00000 p.u.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00000… 10.00000 Main inductance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance LS. 0.00000 p.u.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00000…1.00000 Leakage inductance in per unit. -
p.u.
98.06 Ld user Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance. 0.00000 p.u.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00000 … 10.00000 Direct axis inductance in per unit. -
p.u
98.07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance. 0.00000 p.u.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00000 … 10.00000 Quadrature axis inductance in per unit. -
p.u
98.08 PM flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux. 0.00000 p.u.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00000 … 2.00000 Permanent magnet flux in per unit. -
p.u
98.09 Rs user SI Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model. 0.00000 ohm
0.00000… Stator resistance. -
100.00000 ohm
98.10 Rs user SI Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model. 0.00000 ohm
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00000… Rotor resistance. -
100.00000 ohm
98.11 Lm user SI Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model. 0.00 mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00…100000.00 mH Main inductance. 1 = 10000
mH
ACS180 [Link] Page 290 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

290 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
98.12 SigmaL user SI Defines the leakage inductance LS. 0.00 mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous
motors.
0.00…100000.00 mH Leakage inductance. 1 = 10000
mH
98.13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance. 0.00 mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 …100000.00 mH Direct axis inductance. 1 = 10000
mH
98.14 Lq user SI Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance. 0.00 mH
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00 …100000.00 mH Quadrature axis inductance. 1 = 10000
mH
99
99 Motor data Motor configuration settings.
99.03 Motor type Selects the motor type. Asynchro-
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive nous motor
is running.
Asynchronous motor Standard squirrel cage AC induction motor (asynchronous 0
induction motor).
Permanent magnet Permanent magnet motor. Three-phase AC synchronous 1
motor motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal
BackEMF voltage.
Note: With permanent magnet motors special attention
must be paid on setting the motor nominal values correctly
in this parameter group (99 Motor data). You must use
vector control. If the nominal BackEMF voltage of the
motor is not available, a full ID run should be performed
for improving performance.
99.04 Motor control mode Selects the motor control mode. Vector
Vector Vector control. Vector control has better accuracy than 0
scalar control but cannot be used in all situations (see
selection Scalar below).
Requires motor identification run (ID run). See parameter
99.13 ID run requested.
Note: In vector control the drive performs a standstill ID
run at the first start if ID run has not been previously
performed. A new start command is required after
standstill ID run.
Note: To achieve a better motor control performance, you
can perform a normal ID run without load.
See also section Operating modes of the drive (page 62).
ACS180 [Link] Page 291 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 291

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Scalar Scalar control. Suitable for most applications, if top 1
performance is not required.
Motor identification run is not required.
Note: Scalar control must be used in the following
situations:
• with multimotor applications 1) if the load is not equally
shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of
different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be
changed after the motor identification (ID run)
• if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the
nominal output current of the drive
• if the drive is used with no motor connected (for
example, for test purposes).
Note: Correct motor operation requires that the
magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90% of
the nominal current of the inverter.
See also section Speed control performance figures
(page 78), and section Operating modes of the drive
(page 62).
99.06 Motor nominal current Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the 4.0 A
value on the motor rating plate. If multiple motors are
connected to the drive, enter the total current of the
motors.
Notes:
• Correct motor operation requires that the magnetizing
current of the motor does not exceed 90% of the
nominal current of the drive.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.0…4.8 A Nominal current of the motor. 1 = 0.01 A
The allowable range: (see par.
• vector control mode: 1/6…2 × IN of the drive 46.05)
• scalar control mode: 0…2 × IN of the drive.
Note: When using flying start in scalar control mode (see
parameter 21.19), the nominal current must be in the
range allowed for vector control mode.
99.07 Motor nominal voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage supplied to the motor. 230.0 V
This setting must match the value on the rating plate of
the motor.
Notes:
• With permanent magnet motors, the nominal voltage is
the BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor. If
the voltage is given as voltage per rpm, e.g. 60 V per
1000 rpm, the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm
is 3 × 60 V = 180 V. Note that the nominal voltage is not
equal to the equivalent DC motor voltage (EDCM)
specified by some motor manufacturers. The nominal
voltage can be calculated by dividing the EDCM
voltage by 1.7 (or square root of 3).
• The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent
on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the
case where the motor voltage rating is lower than that
of the drive and the supply.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
40.0…480.0 Nominal voltage of the motor. 10 = 1 V
ACS180 [Link] Page 292 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

292 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
99.08 Motor nominal Defines the nominal motor frequency. This setting must 50.00 Hz
frequency match the value on the rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0.00…500.00 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor. 10 = 1 Hz
99.09 Motor nominal speed Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must match 1435 rpm
the value on the rating plate of the motor.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0…30000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor. 1 = 1 rpm
99.10 Motor nominal power Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must match 1.10 kW or
the value on the rating plate of the motor. If multiple hp
motors are connected to the drive, enter the total power of
the motors. The unit is selected by parameter 96.16 Unit
selection.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0.00… 10000.00 kW Nominal power of the motor. 1 = 0.01 unit
or 0.00… 13404.83 hp (see par.
46.04)
99.11 Motor nominal cos Φ Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor 0.00
model. This value is not obligatory, but is useful with an
asynchronous motor, especially when performing a
standstill identification run. With a permanent magnet or
synchronous reluctance motor, this value is not needed.
Notes:
• Do not enter an estimated value. If you do not know the
• exact value, leave the parameter at zero.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
0.00…1.00 Cosphi of the motor. 100 = 1
99.12 Motor nominal torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more 0.000
accurate motor model. Not obligatory. The unit is selected N·m or lb·ft
by parameter 96.16 Unit selection.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive
is running.
0.000…4000000.000 Nominal motor torque. 1 = 100 unit
N·m or
0.000…2950248.597
lb·ft
ACS180 [Link] Page 293 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 293

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
99.13 ID run requested Selects the type of the motor identification routine (ID run) None
performed at the next start of the drive. During the ID run,
the drive will identify the characteristics of the motor for
optimum motor control.
If no ID run has been performed yet (or if default
parameter values have been restored using parameter
96.06 Parameter restore), this parameter is automatically
set to Standstill, signifying that an ID run must be
performed.
After the ID run, the drive stops and this parameter is
automatically set to None.
Notes:
• To ensure that the ID run can work properly, the drive
limits in group 30 Limits (maximum speed and
minimum speed, and maximum torque and minimum
torque) must to be large enough (the range specified by
the limits must be wide enough. If eg. speed limits are
less than the motor nominal speed, the ID run cannot
be completed.
• For the Advanced ID run, the machinery must always
be de-coupled from the motor.
• With a permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance
motor, a Normal, Reduced or Standstill ID run requires
that the motor shaft is NOT locked and the load torque
is less than 10%.
• Once the ID run is activated, it can be canceled by
stopping the drive.
• The ID run must be performed every time any of the
motor parameters (99.04, 99.06…99.12) have been
changed.
• With scalar control mode (99.04 Motor control mode =
Scalar), the ID run is not requested automatically.
However, an ID run can be performed for more
accurate torque estimation.
• Ensure that the Safe torque off and emergency stop
circuits (if any) are closed during the ID run.
• Mechanical brake (if present) is not opened by the logic
for the ID run.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
None No motor ID run is requested. This mode can be selected 0
only if the ID run (Normal/Reduced/Standstill/Advanced)
has already been performed once.
ACS180 [Link] Page 294 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

294 Parameters

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Normal Normal ID run. Guarantees good control accuracy for all 1
cases. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode
should be selected whenever it is possible.
Notes:
• If the load torque will be higher than 20% of motor
nominal torque, or if the machinery is not able to
withstand the nominal torque transient during the ID
run, then the driven machinery must be de-coupled
from the motor during a Normal ID run.
• Check the direction of rotation of the motor before
starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate
in the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to
approximately 50…100% of the nominal speed
during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID
RUN!
Reduced Reduced ID run. This mode should be selected instead of 2
the Normal or Advanced ID Run if
• mechanical losses are higher than 20% (ie. the motor
cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment), or if
• flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running
(ie. in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied
from the motor terminals).
With this ID run mode, the resultant motor control in the
field weakening area or at high torques is not necessarily
as accurate as motor control following a Normal ID run.
Reduced ID run is completed faster than the Normal ID
Run (< 90 seconds).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before
starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in
the forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to
approximately 50…100% of the nominal speed
during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID
RUN!
Standstill Standstill ID run. The motor is injected with DC current. 3
With an AC induction (asynchronous) motor, the motor
shaft is not rotated. With a permanent magnet motor, the
shaft can rotate up to half a revolution.
Note: This mode should be selected only if the Normal,
Reduced or Advanced ID run is not possible due to the
restrictions caused by the connected mechanics (e.g. with
lift or crane applications).
ACS180 [Link] Page 295 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 295

No. Name/Value Description Default

FbEq 16
Advanced Advanced ID run. 6
Guarantees the best possible control accuracy. The ID run
takes a very long time to complete. This mode should be
selected when top performance is needed across the
whole operating area.
Note: The driven machinery must be de-coupled from the
motor because of high torque and speed transients that
are applied.
WARNING! The motor may run at up to the
maximum (positive) and minimum (negative)
allowed speed during the ID run. Several
accelerations and decelerations are done. The maximum
torque, current and speed allowed by the limit parameters
may be utilized. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE
MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE ID RUN!
Adaptive The drive makes a Standstill ID run first. After that, the 8
motor parameters will be refined during the normal
operation to achieve more optimal performance. After the
motor model adaptation process is complete, parameter
99.14 will be changed from Standstill to Adaptive.
99.14 Last ID run performed Shows the type of ID run that was performed last. None
None No ID run has been performed. 0
Normal Normal ID run. 1
Reduced Reduced ID run. 2
Standstill Standstill ID run. 3
Advanced Advanced ID run. 6
Adaptive Adaptive ID run.
99.15 Motor polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor. 0
calculated
0…1000 Number of pole pairs. 1=1
99.16 Motor phase order Switches the rotation direction of motor. This parameter UVW
can be used if the motor turns in the wrong direction (for
example, because of the wrong phase order in the motor
cable), and correcting the cabling is considered
impractical.
Notes:
• Changing this parameter does not affect speed
reference polarities, so positive speed reference will
rotate the motor forward. The phase order selection
just ensures that “forward” is in fact the correct
direction.
UVW Normal. 0
UWV Reversed rotation direction. 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 296 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

296 Parameters

Differences in the default values between 50 Hz and 60 Hz

supply frequency settings
Parameter 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 changes the drive parameter default values
according to the supply frequency, 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The bit is set according to the
market before the drive is delivered.
If you need to change from 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or vice versa, change the value of the bit
and then do a complete reset to the drive (96.06 Parameter restore). After that you
have to reselect the macro to be used.
The table below shows the parameters whose default values depend on the supply
frequency setting. The supply frequency setting, with the type designation of the
drive, also affects group 99 Motor data parameter values (not listed in the table).
No Name 95.20 HW options word 1 bit 0 95.20 HW options word 1
Supply frequency 60 Hz = bit 0 Supply frequency 60 Hz =
50 Hz 60 Hz
11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max 1500.000 1800.000
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max 1500.000 1800.000
13.18 AO1 source max 1500.0 1800.0
22.26 Constant speed 1 300.00 rpm 360.00 rpm
22.27 Constant speed 2 600.00 rpm 720.00 rpm
22.28 Constant speed 3 900 .00 rpm 1080.00 rpm
22.29 Constant speed 4 1200.00 rpm 1440.00 rpm
22.30 Constant speed 5 1500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm
22.31 Constant speed 6 2400.00 rpm 2880.00 rpm
22.32 Constant speed 7 3000.00 rpm 3600.00 rpm
28.26 Constant frequency 1 5.00 Hz 6.00 Hz
28.27 Constant frequency 2 10.00 Hz 12.00 Hz
28.28 Constant frequency 3 15.00 Hz 18.00 Hz
28.29 Constant frequency 4 20.00 Hz 24.00 Hz
28.30 Constant frequency 5 25.00 Hz 30.00 Hz
28.31 Constant frequency 6 40.00 Hz 48.00 Hz
28.32 Constant frequency 7 50.00 Hz 60.00 Hz
30.11 Minimum speed -1500.00 rpm -1800.00 rpm
30.12 Maximum speed 1500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm
30.13 Minimum frequency -50.00 Hz -60.00 Hz
30.14 Maximum frequency 50.00 Hz 60.00 Hz
31.26 Stall speed limit 150.00 rpm 180.00 rpm
31.27 Stall frequency limit 15.00 Hz 18.00 Hz
31.30 Overspeed trip margin 500.00 rpm 500.00 rpm
46.01 Speed scaling 1500.00 rpm 1800.00 rpm
46.02 Frequency scaling 50.00 Hz 60.00 Hz
ACS180 [Link] Page 297 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 297

Parameters supported by Modbus backwards compatibility

with 550
ACx550 compatibility mode is a way to communicate with an ACxx80 drive in such a
way that it looks like an ACx550 drive over Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP. This mode
can be enabled by changing parameter 96.78 550 compatibility mode to Enable.
In the 550 compatibility mode all supported parameters can be read as if the drive
were an ACx550. Some parameters are read only and do not support writes. See the
table below to see which parameters support writes.

ACx550 Name Read/Write ACx550 Name Read/Write

parameter parameter
01.01 SPEED & DIR Read only 01.34 COMM RO WORD Read only
01.02 SPEED Read only 01.35 COMM VALUE 1 Read only
01.03 OUTPUT FREQ Read only 01.36 COMM VALUE 2 Read only
01.04 CURRENT Read only 01.41 MWH COUNTER Read only
01.05 TORQUE Read only 01.43 DRIVE ON TIME Read only
01.06 POWER Read only 01.45 MOTOR TEMP Read only
01.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE Read only 01.50 CB TEMP Read only
01.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Read only 01.74 SAVED KWH Read only
01.10 DRIVE TEMP Read only 01.75 SAVED MWH Read only
01.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 Read only 01.77 SAVED AMOUNT 2 Read only
01.13 CTRL LOCATION Read only 01.78 SAVED CO2 Read only
01.14 RUN TIME Read only 03.01 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only
01.15 KWH COUNTER Read only 03.02 FB CMD WORD 2 Read only
01.18 DI 1-3 STATUS Read only 03.03 FB STS WORD 1 Read only
01.19 DI 4-6 STATUS Read only 03.04 FB STS WORD 2 Read only
01.20 AI 1 Read only 03.05 FAULT WORD 1 Read only
01.21 AI 2 Read only 03.06 FAULT WORD 2 Read only
01.22 RO 1-3 STATUS Read only 03.07 FAULT WORD 3 Read only
01.23 RO 4-6 STATUS Read only 03.08 ALARM WORD 1 Read only
01.24 AO 1 Read only 03.09 ALARM WORD 2 Read only
01.25 AO 2 Read only 04.01 LAST FAULT Read only
01.26 PID 1 OUTPUT Read only 04.12 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Read only
01.27 PID 2 OUTPUT Read only 04.13 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Read only
01.28 PID 1 SETPNT Read only 10.01 EXT1 COMMANDS Read/Write
01.29 PID 2 SETPNT Read only 10.02 EXT2 COMMANDS Read/Write
01.30 PID 1 FBK Read only 10.03 DIRECTION Read/Write
01.31 PID 2 FBK Read only 10.04 JOGGING SEL Read/Write
01.32 PID 1 DEVIATION Read only 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SEL Read/Write
01.33 PID 2 DEVIATION Read only 11.03 REF1 SELECT Read/Write
ACS180 [Link] Page 298 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

298 Parameters

ACx550 Name Read/Write ACx550 Name Read/Write

parameter parameter
11.04 REF1 MIN Read/Write 21.05 DC HOLD SPEED Read/Write
11.05 REF1 MAX Read/Write 21.06 DC CURR REF Read/Write
11.06 REF2 SEL Read/Write 21.09 EMERG STOP SEL Read/Write
11.07 REF2 MIN Read/Write 21.12 ZERO SPEED DELAY Read/Write
11.08 REF2 MAX Read/Write 21.13 START DELAY Read/Write
12.01 CONST SPEED SEL Read/Write 22.02 ACCELER TIME 1 Read/Write
12.02 CONST SPEED 1 Read/Write 22.03 DECELER TIME 1 Read/Write
12.03 CONST SPEED 2 Read/Write 22.04 RAMP SHAPE 1 Read/Write
12.04 CONST SPEED 3 Read/Write 22.05 ACCELER TIME 2 Read/Write
12.05 CONST SPEED 4 Read/Write 22.06 DECELER TIME 2 Read/Write
12.06 CONST SPEED 5 Read/Write 22.07 RAMP SHAPE 2 Read/Write
12.07 CONST SPEED 6 Read/Write 22.08 EMERG DEC TIME Read/Write
15.02 CONST SPEED 7 Read/Write 23.01 PROP GAIN Read/Write
15.03 AO1 CONTENT MAX Read/Write 23.02 INTEGRATION TIME Read/Write
15.04 MINIMUM AO1 Read/Write 23.03 DERIVATION TIME Read/Write
15.05 MAXIMUM AO1 Read/Write 23.04 ACC COMPENSATION Read/Write
15.08 AO2 CONTENT MIN Read/Write 30.02 PANEL COMM ERR Read/Write
15.09 AO2 CONTENT MAX Read/Write 30.03 EXTERNAL REF 1 Read/Write
15.10 MINIMUM AO2 Read/Write 30.04 EXTERNAL REF 2 Read/Write
15.11 MAXIMUM AO2 Read/Write 30.05 MOT THERM POT Read/Write
16.01 RUN ENABLE Read/Write 30.06 MOT THERM TIME Read/Write
16.02 PARAMETER LOCK Read/Write 30.07 MOT LOAD CURVE Read/Write
16.03 PASS CODE Read/Write 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD Read/Write
16.08 START ENABLE 1 Read/Write 30.09 BREAK POINT FREQ Read/Write
16.09 START ENABLE 2 Read/Write 30.10 STALL FUNCTION Read/Write
20.01 MINIMUM SPEED Read/Write 30.11 STALL FREQUENCY Read/Write
20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED Read/Write 30.12 STALL TIME Read/Write
20.03 MAX CURRENT Read/Write 30.17 EARTH FAULT Read/Write
20.06 UNDERVOLT CRTL Read/Write 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC Read/Write
20.07 MINIMUM FREQ Read/Write 30.19 COMM FAULT TIME Read/Write
20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ Read/Write 30.22 AI2 FAULT LIMIT Read/Write
20.13 MIN TORQUE SEL Read/Write 30.23 WIRING FAULT Read/Write
20.14 MAX TORQUE SEL Read/Write 33.01 FIRMWARE Read only
20.15 MIN TORQUE 1 Read/Write 33.02 LOADING PACKAGE Read only
20.16 MIN TORQUE 2 Read/Write 33.03 TEST DATE Read only
20.17 MAX TORQUE 1 Read/Write 33.04 DRIVE RATING Read only
20.18 MAX TORQUE 2 Read/Write 40.01 GAIN Read/Write
21.02 STOP FUNCTION Read/Write 40.02 INTEGRATION TIME Read/Write
21.03 DC MAGN TIME Read/Write 40.03 DERIVATION TIME Read/Write
ACS180 [Link] Page 299 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Parameters 299

ACx550 Name Read/Write ACx550 Name Read/Write

parameter parameter
40.04 PID DERIV FILTER Read/Write 41.11 INTERNAL SETPNT Read/Write
40.08 0% VALUE Read/Write 41.12 SETPOINT MIN Read/Write
40.09 100% VALUE Read/Write 41.13 SETPOINT MAX Read/Write
40.10 SET POINT SEL Read/Write 41.14 FBK SEL Read/Write
40.11 INTERNAL SETPNT Read/Write 41.15 FBK MULTIPLIER Read/Write
40.12 SETPOINT MIN Read/Write 41.16 ACT 1 INPUT Read/Write
40.13 SETPOINT MAX Read/Write 41.17 ACT 2 INPUT Read/Write
40.14 FBK SEL Read/Write 41.24 PID SLEEP DELAY Read/Write
40.15 FBK MULTIPLIER Read/Write 41.25 WAKE-UP DEV Read/Write
40.16 ACT 1 INPUT Read/Write 41.26 WAKE-UP DELAY Read/Write
40.17 ACT 2 INPUT Read/Write 42.11 INTERNAL SETPNT Read/Write
40.24 PID SLEEP DELAY Read/Write 53.05 EFB CTRL PROFILE Read/Write
40.25 WAKE-UP DEV Read/Write 99.01 LANGUAGE Read/Write
40.26 WAKE-UP DELAY Read/Write 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE Read/Write
40.27 PID 1 PARAM SET Read/Write 99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLT Read/Write
41.01 GAIN Read/Write 99.06 MOTOR NOM CURR Read/Write
41.02 INTEGRATION TIME Read/Write 99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ Read/Write
41.03 DERIVATION TIME Read/Write 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED Read/Write
41.04 PID DERIV FILTER Read/Write 99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER Read/Write
41.08 0% VALUE Read/Write 99.10 ID RUN Read/Write
41.09 100% VALUE Read/Write 99.15 MOTOR COS PHI Read/Write
41.10 SET POINT SEL Read/Write
ACS180 [Link] Page 300 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

300 Parameters
ACS180 [Link] Page 301 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 301

7
Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains
• Terms and abbreviations
• Fieldbus addresses
• Parameter groups 1…9
• Parameter groups 10…99

Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition

Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Usually can only be monitored
but not adjusted; some counter-type signals can however be reset.

Analog src Analog source: the parameter can be set to the value of another parameter
by choosing “Other”, and selecting the source parameter from a list.
In addition to the “Other” selection, the parameter may offer other pre-
selected settings.

Binary src Binary source: the value of the parameter can be taken from a specific bit
in another parameter value (“Other”). Sometimes the value can be fixed to
0 (false) or 1 (true). In addition, the parameter may offer other pre-selected
settings.

Data Data parameter.

FbEq32 32-bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the
panel and the integer used in communication when a 32-bit value is
selected for transmission to an external system.
The corresponding 16-bit scalings are listed in chapter Parameters.
ACS180 [Link] Page 302 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

302 Additional parameter data

Term Definition

List Selection list.

No. Parameter number.

PB Packed Boolean (bit list).

Real Real number.

Type Parameter type. See Analog src, Binary src, List, PB, Real.

Uint16 16-bit unsigned integer.

Fieldbus addresses
Refer to Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB).
ACS180 [Link] Page 303 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 303

Parameter groups 1…9

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
01 Actual values
01.01 Motor speed used Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
01.03 Motor speed % Real -1000.00…1000.00 % 100 = 1%
01.06 Output frequency Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
01.07 Motor current Real 0.00…30000.00 A 100 = 1 A
01.08 Motor current % of motor nom Real 0.0…1000.0 % 10 = 1%
01.09 Motor current % of drive nom Real 0.0…1000.0 % 10 = 1%
01.10 Motor torque Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
01.11 DC voltage Real 0.00…2000.00 V 100 = 1 V
01.13 Output voltage Real 0…2000 V 1=1V
01.14 Output power Real -32768.00…32767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
01.15 Output power % of motor nom Real -300.00…300.00 % 100 = 1%
01.17 Motor shaft power Real -32768.00…32767.00 kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
01.18 Inverter GWh counter Real 0…65535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh
01.19 Inverter MWh counter Real 0…1000 MWh 1 = 1 MWh
01.20 Inverter kWh counter Real 0…1000 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
01.24 Flux actual % Real 0…200 % 1 = 1%
01.30 Nominal torque scale Real 0.000…4000000 N·m or 1000 = 1 unit
lb·ft
01.50 Current hour kWh Real -21474836.48… kWh 100 = 1 kWh
21474836.47
01.51 Previous hour kWh Real -21474836.48… kWh 100 = 1 kWh
21474836.47
01.52 Current day kWh Real -21474836.48… kWh 100 = 1 kWh
21474836.47
01.53 Previous day kWh Real -21474836.48… kWh 100 = 1 kWh
21474836.47
01.54 Cumulative inverter energy Real -200000000.0… kWh 1 = 1 kWh
200000000.0
01.55 Inverter GWh counter Real 0…65535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh
(resettable)
01.56 Inverter MWh counter Real 0…1000 MWh 1 = 1 MWh
(resettable)
01.57 Inverter kWh counter Real 0…1000 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
(resettable)
01.58 Cumulative inverter energy Real -200000000.0… kWh 1 = 1 kWh
(resettable) 200000000.0
01.61 Abs motor speed used Real 0.00… 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
01.62 Abs motor speed % Real 0.00… 100.00% % 100 = 1%
01.63 Abs output frequency Real 0.00…500.00 Hz Hz 100 = 1 Hz
01.64 Abs motor torque Real 0.00…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
01.65 Abs output power Real 0.00… 32767.00 kW 100 = 1 kW
ACS180 [Link] Page 304 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

304 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

01.66 Abs output power % motor Real 0.00…300.00 % 100 = 1%
nom
01.68 Abs motor shaft power Real 0.00… 32767.00 kW 100 = 1 kW
03 Input references
03.01 Panel reference Real -100000.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.02 Panel reference remote Real -100000.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1 unit
03.09 EFB reference 1 Real -30000.00…30000.00 - 100 = 1
03.10 EFB reference 2 Real -30000.00…30000.00 - 100 = 1
03.17 Integrated Panel ref Real -100000.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
03.18 Integrated Panel ref remote Real -100000.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
04 Warnings and faults
04.01 Tripping fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.02 Active fault 2 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.03 Active fault 3 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.06 Active warning 1 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.07 Active warning 2 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.08 Active warning 3 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.11 Latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.12 2nd latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.13 3rd latest fault Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.16 Latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.17 2nd latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.18 3rd latest warning Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.40 Event word 1 Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.41 Event word 1 bit 0 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.43 Event word 1 bit 1 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.45 Event word 1 bit 2 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.47 Event word 1 bit 3 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.49 Event word 1 bit 4 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.51 Event word 1 bit 5 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.53 Event word 1 bit 6 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.55 Event word 1 bit 7 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.57 Event word 1 bit 8 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.59 Event word 1 bit 9 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.61 Event word 1 bit 10 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.63 Event word 1 bit 11 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.65 Event word 1 bit 12 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.67 Event word 1 bit 13 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.69 Event word 1 bit 14 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
04.71 Event word 1 bit 15 code Data 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 305 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 305

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

05 Diagnostics
05.01 On-time counter Real 0…65535 d 1=1d
05.02 Run-time counter Real 0…65535 d 1=1d
05.03 Hours run Real 0.0…429496729.5 h 10 = 1 h
05.04 Fan on-time counter Real 0…65535 d 1=1d
05.10 Control board temperature Real -100…300 °C °C or °F 10 = 1 °C
05.11 Inverter temperature Real -40.0…160.0 % 10 = 1%
05.20 Diagnostic word 1 PB 0b0000…0b1111 - -
05.21 Diagnostic word 2 PB 0b0000…0b1111 - -
05.22 Diagnostic word 3 PB 0b0000…0b1111 - -
05.80 Motor speed at fault Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
05.81 Output frequency at fault Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
05.82 DC voltage at fault Real 0.00…2000.00 V 100 = 1 V
05.83 Motor current at fault Real 0.00…30000.00 A 100 = 1 A
05.84 Motor torque at fault Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
05.85 Main status word at fault PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
05.86 DI delayed status at fault PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
05.87 Inverter temperature at fault PB -40.0…160.0 °C 10 = 1°C
05.88 Reference used at fault Real -500.00...500.00 Hz/ Hz/ 100 = 1 Hz/
-1600.0…1600.0%/ %/ 10 = 1%/
30000.00...30000.00 rpm rpm 100 = 1 rpm
06 Control and status words
06.01 Main control word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.11 Main status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.16 Drive status word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.17 Drive status word 2 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.18 Start inhibit status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.19 Speed control status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.20 Constant speed status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.21 Drive status word 3 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
06.29 MSW bit 10 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
06.30 MSW bit 11 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
06.31 MSW bit 12 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
06.32 MSW bit 13 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
06.33 MSW bit 14 selection Binary - - 1=1
src
07 System info
07.03 Drive rating id List - - 1=1
07.04 Firmware name List - - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 306 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

306 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

07.05 Firmware version Data - - 1=1
07.06 Loading package name List - - 1=1
07.07 Loading package version Data - - 1=1
07.11 Cpu usage Real 0…100 % 1 = 1%
07.25 Customization package name Data - - 1=1
07.26 Customization package Data - - 1=1
version
ACS180 [Link] Page 307 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 307

Parameter groups 10…99

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32
10 Standard DI, RO
10.01 DI status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.02 DI delayed status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.03 DI force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.04 DI forced data PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.04 DI forced data PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.05 DI1 ON delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.06 DI1 OFF delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.07 DI2 ON delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.08 DI2 OFF delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.09 DI3 ON delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.10 DI3 OFF delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.11 DI4 ON delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.12 DI4 OFF delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.13 DI5 ON delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.14 DI5 OFF delay PB 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.21 RO status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.22 RO force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.23 RO forced data PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.24 RO1 source Binary src - - 1=1
10.25 RO1 ON delay Real 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.26 RO1 OFF delay Real 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
10.99 RO/DIO control word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
10.101 RO1 toggle counter Real 0…4294967000 - 1=1
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
11.02 DIO delayed status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
11.03 DIO force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
11.04 DO1 force data PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
11.06 DO1 output source Binary src - - 1=1
11.07 DO1 ON delay Real 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
11.08 DO1 OFF delay Real 0.0…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
11.13 DI3 configuration List 0, 1 - 1=1
11.17 DI4 configuration List 0, 1 - 1=1
11.21 DI5 configuration List 0, 1 - 1=1
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value Real 0…16000 Hz 1 = 1 Hz
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled value Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
11.42 Freq in 1 min Real 0…16000 Hz 1 = 1 Hz
11.43 Freq in 1 max Real 0…16000 Hz 1 = 1 Hz
11.44 Freq in 1 at scaled min Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 308 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

308 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
11.46 Freq in 2 actual value Real 0…16000 Hz 1=1
11.47 Freq in 2 scaled Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
11.50 Freq in 2 min Real 0…16000 Hz 1=1
11.51 Freq in 2 max Real 0…16000 Hz 1=1
11.52 Freq in 2 at scaled min Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1=1
11.53 Freq in 2 at scaled max Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1=1
12 Standard AI
12.02 AI force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
12.03 AI supervision function List 0…4 - 1=1
12.04 AI supervision selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
12.11 AI1 actual value Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.12 AI1 scaled value Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.13 AI1 forced value Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.15 AI1 unit selection List 2, 10 - 1=1
12.16 AI1 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
12.17 AI1 min Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.18 AI1 max Real 0.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.21 AI2 actual value Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.22 AI2 scaled value Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.23 AI2 forced value Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.25 AI2 unit selection List 2, 10 - 1=1
12.26 AI2 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
12.27 AI2 min Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.28 AI2 max Real 4.000…20.000 mA or mA or V 1000 = 1 unit
0.000…10.000 V
12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max Real -32768.000…32767.000 - 1000 = 1
12.101 AI1 percent value Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
12.102 AI2 percent value Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
13 Standard AO
13.02 AO force selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
13.11 AO1 actual value Real 0.000…22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.12 AO1 source Analog src - - 1=1
13.13 AO1 forced value Real 0.000…22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
ACS180 [Link] Page 309 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 309

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

13.15 AO1 unit selection List 2, 10 - 1=1
13.16 AO1 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
13.17 AO1 source min Real -32768.0…32767.0 - 10 = 1
13.18 AO1 source max Real -32768.0…32767.0 - 10 = 1
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min Real 0.000…22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max Real 0.000…22.000 mA 1000 = 1 mA
13.91 AO1 data storage Real -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
19 Operation mode
19.01 Actual operation mode List 1…5, 10, 20 - 1=1
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Binary src - - 1=1
19.12 Ext1 control mode List 1…5 - 1=1
19.14 Ext2 control mode List 1…5 - 1=1
19.16 Local control mode List 0…1 - 1=1
19.17 Local control disable List 0…1 - 1=1
20 Start/stop/direction
20.01 Ext1 commands List 0…6, 11…12, 14...16, - 1=1
21...23
20.02 Ext1 start trigger type List 0…1 - 1=1
20.03 Ext1 in1 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.04 Ext1 in2 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.05 Ext1 in3 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.06 Ext2 commands List 0…6, 11…12, 14, 21...23 - 1=1
20.07 Ext2 start trigger type List 0…1 - 1=1
20.08 Ext2 in1 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.09 Ext2 in2 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.10 Ext2 in3 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.11 Run enable stop mode List 0…2 - 1=1
20.12 Run enable 1 source Binary src - - 1=1
20.19 Enable start command Binary src - - 1=1
20.21 Direction List 0…2 - 1=1
20.22 Enable to rotate Binary src - - 1=1
20.25 Jogging enable Binary src - - 1=1
20.26 Jogging 1 start source Binary src - - 1=1
20.27 Jogging 2 start source Binary src - - 1=1
20.30 Enable signals warning PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
function
21 Start/stop mode
21.01 Start mode List 0…2 - 1=1
21.02 Magnetization time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
21.03 Stop mode List 0…2 - 1=1
21.04 Emergency stop mode List 0…3 - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 310 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

310 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

21.05 Emergency stop source Binary src - - 1=1
21.06 Zero speed limit Real 0.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
21.07 Zero speed delay Real 0…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
21.08 DC current control PB 0b0000...0b1111 - 1=1
21.09 DC hold speed Real 0.00…1000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
21.10 DC current reference Real 0.0…100.0 % 10 = 1%
21.11 Post magnetization time Real 0…3000 s 1=1s
21.14 Pre-heating input source Binary src - - 1=1
21.15 Pre-heating time delay Real 10...3000 s 1=1s
21.16 Pre-heating current Real 0.0…30.0 % 10 = 1%
21.18 Auto restart time Real 0.0, 0.1…10.0 s 10 = 1 s
21.19 Scalar start mode List 0…6 - 1=1
21.21 DC hold frequency Real 0.00…1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
21.22 Start delay Real 0.00…60.00 s 100 = 1 s
21.23 Smooth start Real 0…2 - 1=1
21.24 Smooth start current Real 10.0…100.0 % 100 = 1%
21.25 Smooth start speed Real 2.0…100.0 % 100 = 1%
21.26 Torque boost current Real 15.0…300.0 % 100 = 1%
21.27 Torque boost time Real 0.0...60.0 % 100 = 1%
21.30 Speed compensated stop Real 0…3 - 1=1
mode
21.31 Speed comp stop delay Real 0.00…1000.00 s 100 = 1 s
21.32 Speed comp stop threshold Real 0…100 % 1 = 1%
22 Speed reference selection
22.01 Speed ref unlimited Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Analog src - - 1=1
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2 Analog src - - 1=1
22.13 Ext1 speed function List 0…6 - 1=1
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 Analog src - - 1=1
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 Analog src - - 1=1
22.20 Ext2 speed function List 0…6 - 1=1
22.21 Constant speed function PB 0b0000...0b1111 - 1=1
22.22 Constant speed sel1 Binary src - - 1=1
22.23 Constant speed sel2 Binary src - - 1=1
22.24 Constant speed sel3 Binary src - - 1=1
22.26 Constant speed 1 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.27 Constant speed 2 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.28 Constant speed 3 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.29 Constant speed 4 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.30 Constant speed 5 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.31 Constant speed 6 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
ACS180 [Link] Page 311 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 311

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

22.32 Constant speed 7 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.41 Speed ref safe Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.42 Jogging 1 ref Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.51 Critical speed function PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
22.52 Critical speed 1 low Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.53 Critical speed 1 high Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.54 Critical speed 2 low Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.55 Critical speed 2 high Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.56 Critical speed 3 low Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.57 Critical speed 3 high Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.71 Motor potentiometer function List 0…3, 5 - 1=1
22.72 Motor potentiometer initial Real -32768.00…32767.00 - 100 = 1
value
22.73 Motor potentiometer up Binary src - - 1=1
source
22.74 Motor potentiometer down Binary src - - 1=1
source
22.75 Motor potentiometer ramp Real 0.0…3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
time
22.76 Motor potentiometer min Real -32768.00…32767.00 - 100 = 1
value
22.77 Motor potentiometer max Real -32768.00…32767.00 - 100 = 1
value
22.80 Motor potentiometer ref act Real -32768.00…32767.00 - 100 = 1
22.86 Speed reference act 6 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
22.87 Speed reference act 7 Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23 Speed reference ramp
23.01 Speed ref ramp input Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23.02 Speed ref ramp output Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
23.11 Ramp set selection Binary src - - 1=1
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.13 Deceleration time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.14 Acceleration time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.15 Deceleration time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.20 Acc time jogging Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.21 Dec time jogging Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.23 Emergency stop time Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.28 Variable slope enable Real 2…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
23.29 Variable slope rate Real 2…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
23.32 Shape time 1 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
23.33 Shape time 2 Real 0.000 …1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 312 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

312 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

24 Speed reference conditioning
24.01 Used speed reference Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.02 Used speed feedback Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.03 Speed error filtered Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.04 Speed error inverted Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.11 Speed correction Real -10000.00…10000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
24.12 Speed error filter time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
25 Speed control
25.01 Torque reference speed Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
control
25.02 Speed proportional gain Real 0.00…250.00 - 100 = 1
25.03 Speed integration time Real 0.00…1000.00 s 100 = 1 s
25.04 Speed derivation time Real 0.000…10.000 s 1000 = 1 s
25.05 Derivation filter time Real 0…10000 ms 1 = 1 ms
25.06 Acc comp derivation time Real 0.00…1000.00 s 100 = 1 s
25.07 Acc comp filter time Real 0.0…1000.0 ms 10 = 1 ms
25.15 Proportional gain em stop Real 1.00…250.00 - 100 = 1
25.30 Flux adaptation enable List - - 1=1
25.33 Speed controller autotune List - - 1=1
25.34 Speed controller autotune List - - 1=1
mode
25.37 Mechanical time constant Real 0.00…1000.00 - 100 = 1 s
25.38 Autotune torque step Real 0.00…100.00 - 100 = 1%
25.39 Autotune speed step Real 0.00…100.00 - 100 = 1%
25.40 Autotune repeat times Real 1…10 - 1=1
25.53 Torque prop reference Real -30000.0…30000.0 % 10 = 1%
25.54 Torque integral reference Real -30000.0…30000.0 % 10 = 1%
25.55 Torque deriv reference Real -30000.0…30000.0 % 10 = 1%
25.56 Torque acc compensation Real -30000.0…30000.0 % 10 = 1%
26 Torque reference chain
26.01 Torque reference to TC Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.02 Torque reference used Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.08 Minimum torque ref Real -1000.0…0.0 % 10 = 1%
26.09 Maximum torque ref Real 0.0…1000.0 % 10 = 1%
26.11 Torque ref1 source Analog src - - 1=1
26.12 Torque ref2 source Analog src - - 1=1
26.13 Torque ref1 function List 0…5 - 1=1
26.14 Torque ref1/2 selection Binary src - - 1=1
26.17 Torque ref filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
26.18 Torque ramp up time Real 0.000…60.000 s 1000 = 1 s
26.19 Torque ramp down time Real 0.000…60.000 s 1000 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 313 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 313

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

26.20 Torque reversal List - - 1=1
26.70 Torque reference act 1 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.71 Torque reference act 2 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.72 Torque reference act 3 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.73 Torque reference act 4 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.74 Torque ref ramp out Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.75 Torque reference act 5 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.76 Torque reference act 6 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
26.81 Rush control gain Real 0.0 … 10000.0 - 10 = 1
26.82 Rush control integration time Real 0.0 … 10.0 s 10 = 1 s
28 Frequency reference chain
28.01 Frequency ref ramp input Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.02 Frequency ref ramp output Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 Analog src - - 1=1
28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2 Analog src - - 1=1
28.13 Ext1 frequency function List 0…6 - 1=1
28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1 Analog src - - 1=1
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 Analog src - - 1=1
28.17 Ext2 frequency function List 0…6 - 1=1
28.21 Constant frequency function PB 0000h...FFFFh - 1=1
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Binary src - - 1=1
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Binary src - - 1=1
28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Binary src - - 1=1
28.26 Constant frequency 1 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.28 Constant frequency 3 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.29 Constant frequency 4 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.30 Constant frequency 5 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.31 Constant frequency 6 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.41 Frequency ref safe Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.42 Jogging 1 frequency ref Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.43 Jogging 2 frequency ref Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.51 Critical frequency function PB 00b…11b - 1=1
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.53 Critical frequency 1 high Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.54 Critical frequency 2 low Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.55 Critical frequency 2 high Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.57 Critical frequency 3 high Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.71 Freq ramp set selection Binary src - - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 314 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

314 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 Real 0.000…1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 Real 0.000…1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 Real 0.000…1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 Real 0.000…1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.76 Freq ramp in zero source Binary src - - 1=1
28.82 Shape time 1 Real 0.000…1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.83 Shape time 2 Real 0.000…1800.000 s 1000 = 1 s
28.92 Frequency ref act 3 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
28.97 Frequency ref unlimited Real -500.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
30 Limits
30.01 Limit word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
30.02 Torque limit status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
30.11 Minimum speed Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
30.12 Maximum speed Real -30000.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
30.13 Minimum frequency Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
30.14 Maximum frequency Real -500.00…500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
30.17 Maximum current Real 0.00…30000.00 A 100 = 1 A
30.18 Torq lim sel Binary src - - 1=1
30.19 Minimum torque 1 Real -1600.0…0.0 % 10 = 1%
30.20 Maximum torque 1 Real 0.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
30.21 Min torque 2 source Analog src - - 1=1
30.22 Max torque 2 source Analog src - - 1=1
30.23 Minimum torque 2 Real -1600.0…0.0 % 10 = 1%
30.24 Maximum torque 2 Real 0.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
30.26 Power motoring limit Real 0.00…600.00 % 100 = 1%
30.27 Power generating limit Real -600.00…0.00 % 100 = 1%
30.30 Overvoltage control List 0…1 - 1=1
30.31 Undervoltage control List 0…1 - 1=1
30.35 Thermal current limitation List 0...1 - 1=1
30.36 Speed limit selection Binary src - - 1=1
30.37 Min speed source Analog src - - 1=1
30.38 Max speed source Analog src - - 1=1
31 Fault functions
31.01 External event 1 source Binary src - - 1=1
31.02 External event 1 type List 0…1 - 1=1
31.03 External event 2 source Binary src - - 1=1
31.04 External event 2 type List 0…1 - 1=1
31.05 External event 3 source Binary src - - 1=1
31.06 External event 3 type List 0…1 - 1=1
31.07 External event 4 source Binary src - - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 315 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 315

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

31.08 External event 4 type List 0…1 - 1=1
31.09 External event 5 source Binary src - - 1=1
31.10 External event 5 type List 0…1 - 1=1
31.11 Fault reset selection Binary src - - 1=1
31.12 Autoreset selection PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
31.13 Selectable fault Real 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
31.14 Number of trials Real 0…5 - 1=1
31.15 Total trials time Real 1.0…600.0 s 10 = 1 s
31.16 Delay time Real 0.0…120.0 s 10 = 1 s
31.19 Motor phase loss List 0…1 - 1=1
31.21 Supply phase loss List 0…1 - 1=1
31.22 STO indication run/stop List 0…5 - 1=1
31.23 Wiring or earth fault List 0…1 - 1=1
31.24 Stall function List 0…2 - 1=1
31.25 Stall current limit Real 0.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
31.26 Stall speed limit Real 0.00…10000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
31.27 Stall frequency limit Real 0.00…1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
31.28 Stall time Real 0…3600 s 1=1s
31.30 Overspeed trip margin Real 0.00…10000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
31.31 Frequency trip margin Real 0.00…10000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
31.32 Emergency ramp supervision Real 0…300 % 1 = 1%
31.33 Emergency ramp supervision Real 0…100 s 1=1s
delay
31.40 Disable warning messages List 0…2 - 1=1
31.54 Fault action List 0…2 - 1=1
32 Supervision
32.01 Supervision status PB 0000h...FFFFh - 1=1
32.05 Supervision 1 function List 0…7 - 1=1
32.06 Supervision 1 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.07 Supervision 1 signal Analog src - - 1=1
32.08 Supervision 1 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.09 Supervision 1 low Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.10 Supervision 1 high Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.11 Supervision 1 hysteresis Real 0.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
32.15 Supervision 2 function List 0…7 - 1=1
32.16 Supervision 2 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.17 Supervision 2 signal Analog src - - 1=1
32.18 Supervision 2 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.19 Supervision 2 low Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
ACS180 [Link] Page 316 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

316 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

32.20 Supervision 2 high Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.21 Supervision 2 hysteresis Real 0.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
32.25 Supervision 3 function List 0…7 - 1=1
32.26 Supervision 3 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.27 Supervision 3 signal Analog src - - 1=1
32.28 Supervision 3 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.29 Supervision 3 low Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.30 Supervision 3 high Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.31 Supervision 3 hysteresis Real 0.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
32.35 Supervision 4 function List 0…7 - 1=1
32.36 Supervision 4 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.37 Supervision 4 signal Analog src - - 1=1
32.38 Supervision 4 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.39 Supervision 4 low Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.40 Supervision 4 high Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.41 Supervision 4 hysteresis Real 0.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
32.45 Supervision 5 function List 0…7 - 1=1
32.46 Supervision 5 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.47 Supervision 5 signal Analog src - - 1=1
32.48 Supervision 5 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.49 Supervision 5 low Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.50 Supervision 5 high Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.51 Supervision 5 hysteresis Real 0.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
32.55 Supervision 6 function List 0…7 - 1=1
32.56 Supervision 6 action List 0…2 - 1=1
32.57 Supervision 6 signal Analog src - - 1=1
32.58 Supervision 6 filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
32.59 Supervision 6 low Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.60 Supervision 6 high Real -21474830.00… - 100 = 1
21474830.00
32.61 Supervision 6 hysteresis Real 0.00…100000.00 - 100 = 1
35 Motor thermal protection
35.01 Motor estimated temperature Real -60…1000 °C °C or °F 1 = 1°
35.02 Measured temperature 1 Real -60…5000 °C °C, °F or 1 = 1 unit
ohm
35.05 Motor overload level Real 0.0...300.0% % 10 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 317 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 317

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

35.11 Temperature 1 source List 0...2, 5…7, 11...16 - 1=1
35.12 Temperature 1 fault limit Real -60 … 5000 °C °C, °F or 1 = 1 unit
ohm
35.13 Temperature 1 warning limit Real -60 … 5000 °C °C, °F or 1 = 1 unit
ohm
35.14 Temperature 1 AI source Analog src - - 1=1
35.50 Motor ambient temperature Real -60…100 °C or °C or °F 1=1°
-75 … 212 °F
35.51 Motor load curve Real 50…150 % 1 = 1%
35.52 Zero speed load Real 25…150 % 1 = 1%
35.53 Break point Real 1.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
35.54 Motor nominal temperature Real 0…300 °C °C or °F 1 = 1°
rise
35.55 Motor thermal time constant Real 100…10000 s 1=1s
35.56 Motor overload action List - - 10 = 1
35.57 Motor overload class List - - 10 = 1
36 Load analyzer
36.01 PVL signal source Analog src - - 1=1
36.02 PVL filter time Real 0.00…120.00 s 100 = 1 s
36.06 AL2 signal source Analog src - - 1=1
36.07 AL2 signal scaling Real 0.00…32767.00 - 100 = 1
36.09 Reset loggers List 0…3 - 1=1
36.10 PVL peak value Real -32768.00…32767.00 - 100 = 1
36.11 PVL peak date Data 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 - 1=1
36.12 PVL peak time Data - - 1=1
36.13 PVL current at peak Real -32768.00…32767.00 A 100 = 1 A
36.14 PVL DC voltage at peak Real 0.00…2000.00 V 100 = 1 V
36.15 PVL speed at peak Real -30000… 30000 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
36.16 PVL reset date Data 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 - 1=1
36.17 PVL reset time Data - - 1=1
36.20 AL1 0 to 10% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.21 AL1 10 to 20% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.22 AL1 20 to 30% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.23 AL1 30 to 40% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.24 AL1 40 to 50% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.25 AL1 50 to 60% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.26 AL1 60 to 70% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.27 AL1 70 to 80% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.28 AL1 80 to 90% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.29 AL1 over 90% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.40 AL2 0 to 10% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.41 AL2 10 to 20% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
ACS180 [Link] Page 318 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

318 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

36.42 AL2 20 to 30% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.43 AL2 30 to 40% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.44 AL2 40 to 50% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.45 AL2 50 to 60% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.46 AL2 60 to 70% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.47 AL2 70 to 80% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.48 AL2 80 to 90% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.49 AL2 over 90% Real 0.00…100.00 % 100 = 1%
36.50 AL2 reset date Data 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 - 1=1
36.51 AL2 reset time Data - - 1=1
37 User load curve
37.01 ULC output status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
37.02 ULC supervision signal Analog src - - 1=1
37.03 ULC overload actions List 0…3 - 1=1
37.04 ULC underload actions List 0…3 - 1=1
37.11 ULC speed table point 1 Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm
37.12 ULC speed table point 2 Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm
37.13 ULC speed table point 3 Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm
37.14 ULC speed table point 4 Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm
37.15 ULC speed table point 5 Real -30000.0…30000.0 rpm 10 = 1 rpm
37.16 ULC frequency table point 1 Real -500.0…500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
37.17 ULC frequency table point 2 Real -500.0…500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
37.18 ULC frequency table point 3 Real -500.0…500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
37.19 ULC frequency table point 4 Real -500.0…500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
37.20 ULC frequency table point 5 Real -500.0…500.0 Hz 10 = 1 Hz
37.21 ULC underload point 1 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.22 ULC underload point 2 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.23 ULC underload point 3 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.24 ULC underload point 4 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.25 ULC underload point 5 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.31 ULC overload point 1 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.32 ULC overload point 2 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.33 ULC overload point 3 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.34 ULC overload point 4 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.35 ULC overload point 5 Real -1600.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
37.41 ULC overload timer Real 0.0…10000.0 s 10 = 1 s
37.42 ULC underload timer Real 0.0…10000.0 s 10 = 1 s
40 Process PID set 1
40.01 Process PID output actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 % 100 = 1%
40.02 Process PID feedback actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
ACS180 [Link] Page 319 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 319

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.04 Process PID deviation actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.05 Process PID trim output act Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.06 Process PID status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
40.07 Process PID operation mode List 0…2 - 1=1
40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source Analog src - - 1=1
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source Analog src - - 1=1
40.10 Set 1 feedback function List 0…11 - 1=1
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
40.15 Set 1 output scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source Analog src - - 1=1
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source Analog src - - 1=1
40.18 Set 1 setpoint function List 0…11 - 1=1
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 Binary src - - 1=1
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 Binary src - - 1=1
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units

40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1

40.27 Set 1 setpoint max Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time Real 0.0…1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time Real 0.0…1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable Binary src - - 1=1
40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion Binary src - - 1=1
40.32 Set 1 gain Real 0.10…100.00 - 100 = 1
40.33 Set 1 integration time Real 0.0…9999.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.34 Set 1 derivation time Real 0.000…10.000 s 1000 = 1 s
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time Real 0.0…10.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.36 Set 1 output min Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 10 = 1
40.37 Set 1 output max Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 10 = 1
ACS180 [Link] Page 320 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

320 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

40.38 Set 1 output freeze enable Binary src - - 1=1
40.39 Set 1 deadband range Real 0……200000.0 - 10 = 1
40.40 Set 1 deadband delay Real 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.43 Set 1 sleep level Real 0……200000.0 - 10 = 1
40.44 Set 1 sleep delay Real 0.0…3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Real 0.0…3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Real -0……200000.0 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay Real 0.00…60.00 s 100 = 1 s
40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Binary src - - 1=1
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection Analog src - - 1=1
40.51 Set 1 trim mode List 0…3 - 1=1
40.52 Set 1 trim selection List 1…3 - 1=1
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Binary src - - 1=1
40.54 Set 1 trim mix Real 0.000 … 1.000 - 1000 = 1
40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Real -100.000 … 100.000 - 1000 = 1
40.56 Set 1 trim source List 1…2 - 1=1
40.57 PID set1/set2 selection Binary src - - 1=1
40.58 Set 1 increase prevention List 0…3 - 1=1
40.59 Set 1 decrease prevention List 0…3 - 1=1
40.60 Set 1 PID activation source Binary src - - 1=1
40.61 Setpoint scaling actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
40.62 PID internal setpoint actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
40.65 Trim auto connection List 0…1 - 1=1
40.79 Set 1 units List - - 1=1
40.80 Set 1 PID output min source Analog src - - 1=1
40.81 Set 1 PID output max source Analog src - - 1=1
40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier Real --200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
40.91 Feedback data storage Real -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
40.92 Setpoint data storage Real -327.68 … 327.67 - 100 = 1
40.96 Process PID output % Real -100.00…100.00 % 100 = 1
40.97 Process PID feedback % Real -100.00…100.00 % 100 = 1
40.98 Process PID setpoint % Real -100.00…100.00 % 100 = 1
40.99 Process PID deviation % Real -100.00…100.00 % 100 = 1
41 Process PID set 2
41.08 Set 2 feedback 1 source Analog src - - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 321 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 321

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

41.09 Set 2 feedback 2 source Analog src - - 1=1
41.10 Set 2 feedback function List 0…11 - 1=1
41.11 Set 2 feedback filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
41.14 Set 2 setpoint scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
41.15 Set 2 output scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
41.16 Set 2 setpoint 1 source Analog src - - 1=1
41.17 Set 2 setpoint 2 source Analog src - - 1=1
41.18 Set 2 setpoint function List 0…11 - 1=1
41.19 Set 2 internal setpoint sel1 Binary src - - 1=1
41.20 Set 2 internal setpoint sel2 Binary src - - 1=1
41.21 Set 2 internal setpoint 1 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
41.22 Set 2 internal setpoint 2 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
41.23 Set 2 internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
41.24 Set 2 internal setpoint 0 Real -200000.00…200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units

41.26 Set 2 setpoint min Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1

41.27 Set 2 setpoint max Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
41.28 Set 2 setpoint increase time Real 0.0…1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.29 Set 2 setpoint decrease time Real 0.0…1800.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.30 Set 2 setpoint freeze enable Binary src - - 1=1
41.31 Set 2 deviation inversion Binary src - - 1=1
41.32 Set 2 gain Real 0.01…100.00 - 100 = 1
41.33 Set 2 integration time Real 0.0…9999.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.34 Set 2 derivation time Real 0.000…10.000 s 1000 = 1 s
41.35 Set 2 derivation filter time Real 0.0…10.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.36 Set 2 output min Real -200000.00… 200000.00 - 10 = 1
41.37 Set 2 output max Real -200000.00… 200000.00 - 10 = 1
41.38 Set 2 output freeze enable Binary src - - 1=1
41.39 Set 2 deadband range Real 0……200000.0 - 10 = 1
41.40 Set 2 deadband delay Real 0.0 … 3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.43 Set 2 sleep level Real 0.0…20000.00 - 10 = 1
41.44 Set 2 sleep delay Real 0.0…3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.45 Set 2 sleep boost time Real 0.0…3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
41.46 Set 2 sleep boost step Real 0.0…20000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
ACS180 [Link] Page 322 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

322 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

41.47 Set 2 wake-up deviation Real -200000.00… 200000.00 PID 100 = 1 PID
customer customer unit
units
41.48 Set 2 wake-up delay Real 0.00…60.00 s 100 = 1 s
41.49 Set 2 tracking mode Binary src - - 1=1
41.50 Set 2 tracking ref selection Analog src - - 1=1
41.51 Set 2 trim mode List 0...3 - 1=1
41.52 Set 2 trim selection List 1...3 - 1=1
41.53 Set 2 trimmed ref pointer Analog src - - 1=1
41.54 Set 2 trim mix Real 0.000...1.000 - 1=1
41.55 Set 2 trim adjust Real -100.000...100.000 - 1=1
41.56 Set 2 trim source List 1...2 - 1=1
41.58 Set 2 increase prevention List 0…3 - 1=1
41.59 Set 2 decrease prevention List 0…3 - 1=1
41.60 Set 2 PID activation source Binary src - - 1=1
41.79 Set 2 units List - - 1=1
41.80 Set 2 PID output min source List 0…1 - 1=1
41.81 Set 2 PID output max source List 0…1 - 1=1
41.89 Set 2 setpoint multiplier Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
41.90 Set 2 feedback multiplier Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
44 Mechanical brake control
44.01 Brake control status PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
44.06 Brake control enable Binary src - - 1=1
44.08 Brake open delay Real 0.00…5.00 s 100 = 1 s
44.13 Brake close delay Real 0.00…60.00 s 100 = 1 s
44.14 Brake close level Real 0.0…1000.0 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
44.202 Torque proving Binary src - - 1=1
44.203 Torque proving reference Real 0.0...300.0 % 10 = 1.0%
44.204 Brake system check time Real 0.10…30 ms 10 = 1 s
44.205 Brake slip speed limit Real 0.0 … 30000.0 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
44.206 Brake slip fault delay Real 0…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
44.207 Safety close select Binary src - - 1=1
44.208 Safety close speed Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
44.209 Safety close delay Real 0…30000 ms 1 = 1 ms
44.211 Extended runtime Real 0.0…3600.0 s 1000 = 1 s
44.212 Extended runtime sw Binary src 0000h...FFFFh - -
45 Energy efficiency
45.01 Saved GW hours Real 0…65535 GWh 1 = 1 GWh
45.02 Saved MW hours Real 0…999 MWh 1 = 1 MWh
45.03 Saved kW hours Real 0.0…999.0 kWh 10 = 1 kWh
45.04 Saved energy Real 0.0…214748364.7 kWh 10 = 1 kWh
ACS180 [Link] Page 323 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 323

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

45.05 Saved money x1000 Real 0…4294967295 thousands (selecta- 1 = 1 unit
ble)
45.06 Saved money Real 0.00…999.99 (selecta- 100 = 1 unit
ble)
45.07 Saved amount Real 0.00…21474836.47 (selecta- 100 = 1 unit
ble)

45.08 CO2 reduction in kilotons Real 0…65535 metric 1 = 1 metric

kiloton kiloton
45.09 CO2 reduction in tons Real 0.0…999.9 metric 10 = 1 metric
ton ton
45.10 Total saved CO2 Real 0.0…214748365.7 metric 10 = 1 metric
ton ton
45.11 Energy optimizer List 0…1 - 1=1
45.12 Energy tariff 1 Real 0.000…4294967.295 (selecta- 1000 = 1 unit
ble)
45.13 Energy tariff 2 Real 0.000…4294967.295 (selecta- 1000 = 1 unit
ble)
45.14 Tariff selection Binary src - - 1=1
45.18 CO2 conversion factor Real 0.000…65.535 metric 1000 = 1
ton/ metric
MWh ton/MWh
45.19 Comparison power Real 0.00…100000.00 kW 10 = 1 kW
45.21 Energy calculations reset List 0…1 - 1=1
45.24 Hourly peak power value Real -3000.00 … 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
45.25 Hourly peak power time Real N/A
45.26 Hourly total energy Real -3000.00 … 3000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
(resettable)
45.27 Daily peak power value Real -3000.00 … 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
(resettable)
45.28 Daily peak power time Real N/A
45.29 Daily total energy (resettable) Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
45.30 Last day total energy Real -30000.00 … 30000.00 kWh 1 = 1 kWh
45.31 Monthly peak power value Real -3000.00 … 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
(resettable)
45.32 Monthly peak power date Real 1/1/1980...6/5/2159 N/A
45.33 Monthly peak power time Real N/A
45.34 Monthly total energy Real -1000000.00 … kWh 1 = 1 kWh
(resettable) 1000000.00
45.35 Last month total energy Real -1000000.00 … kWh 1 = 1 kWh
1000000.00
45.36 Lifetime peak power value Real -3000.00 … 3000.00 kW 1 = 1 kW
45.37 Lifetime peak power date Real N/A
45.38 Lifetime peak power time Real N/A
46 Monitoring/scaling settings
46.01 Speed scaling Real 0.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.02 Frequency scaling Real 0.10…1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
ACS180 [Link] Page 324 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

324 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

46.03 Torque scaling Real 0.1…1000.0 % 10 = 1%
46.04 Power scaling Real 0.10…30000.00 - 10 = 1 unit
46.05 Current scaling Real 0…30000 A 1= 1A
46.06 Speed ref zero scaling Real 0.00 … 30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.07 Frequency ref zero scaling Real 0.00 … 1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.11 Filter time motor speed Real 2…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.12 Filter time output frequency Real 2…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.13 Filter time motor torque Real 2…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.14 Filter time power Real 2…20000 ms 1 = 1 ms
46.21 At speed hysteresis Real 0.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.22 At frequency hysteresis Real 0.00…1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.23 At torque hysteresis Real 0.00…300.00 % 1 = 1%
46.31 Above speed limit Real 0.00…30000.00 rpm 100 = 1 rpm
46.32 Above frequency limit Real 0.00…1000.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
46.33 Above torque limit Real 0.0…1600.0 % 10 = 1%
46.41 kWh pulse scaling Real 0.001…1000.000 kWh 1000 = 1 kWh
47 Data storage
47.01 Data storage 1 real32 Real -2147483.008… - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.02 Data storage 2 real32 Real -2147483.008… - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.03 Data storage 3 real32 Real -2147483.008… - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.04 Data storage 4 real32 Real -2147483.008… - 1000 = 1
2147483.008
47.11 Data storage 1 int32 Real -2147483648… - 1=1
2147483647
47.12 Data storage 2 int32 Real -2147483648… - 1=1
2147483647
47.13 Data storage 3 int32 Real -2147483648… - 1=1
2147483647
47.14 Data storage 4 int32 Real -2147483648… - 1=1
2147483647
47.21 Data storage 1 int16 Real -32768…32767 - 1=1
47.22 Data storage 2 int16 Real -32768…32767 - 1=1
47.23 Data storage 3 int16 Real -32768…32767 - 1=1
47.24 Data storage 4 int16 Real -32768…32767 - 1=1
49 Panel port communication
49.01 Node ID number Real 1…32 - 1=1
49.03 Baud rate List 1…5 - 1=1
49.04 Communication loss time Real 0.3…3000.0 s 10 = 1 s
49.05 Communication loss action List 0…3 - 1=1
49.06 Refresh settings List 0…1 - 1=1
49.19 Basic panel home view 1 - -
ACS180 [Link] Page 325 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 325

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

49.20 Basic panel home view 2 - -
49.21 Basic panel home view 3 - -
49.30 Basic panel menu hiding 0000h…FFFFh -
49.219 Basic panel home view 4 0000h…FFFFh -
49.220 Basic panel home view 5 0000h…FFFFh -
49.221 Basic panel home view 6 0000h…FFFFh -
58 Embedded fieldbus
58.01 Protocol enable List 0, 1, 3 - 1=1
58.02 Protocol ID Real 0…65535 - 1=1
58.03 Node address Real 0…255 - 1=1
Node ID
58.04 Baud rate List 0…7 - 1=1
58.05 Parity List 0…3 - 1=1
58.06 Communication control List 0…2 - 1=1
58.07 Communication diagnostics PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
58.08 Received packets Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
58.09 Transmitted packets Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
58.10 All packets Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
58.11 UART errors Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
58.12 CRC errors Real 0…4294967295 - 1=1
58.14 Communication loss action List 0…4 - 1=1
58.15 Communication loss mode List 0…2 - 1=1
58.16 Communication loss time Real 0.0…6000.0 s 10 = 1 s
58.17 Transmit delay Real 0…65535 ms 1 = 1 ms
58.18 EFB control word PB 0...FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
58.19 EFB status word PB 0...FFFFFFFFh - 1=1
58.25 Control profile List 0, 5, 7, 8, 9 - 1=1
58.26 EFB ref1 type List 0…5 - 1=1
58.27 EFB ref2 type List 0…5 - 1=1
58.28 EFB act1 type List 0…5 - 1=1
58.29 EFB act2 type List 0…5 - 1=1
58.31 EFB act1 transparent source Analog src - - 1=1
58.32 EFB act2 transparent source Analog src - - 1=1
58.33 Addressing mode List 0…2 - 1=1
58.34 Word order List 0…1 - 1=1
58.70 EFB debug mode List -100000...100000 - 1=1
58.71 EFB reference 1 Real -100000...100000 - 1=1
58.72 EFB reference 2 Real -100000...100000 - 1=1
58.73 EFB actual value 1 Real -100000...100000 - 1=1
58.74 EFB actual value 2 Real -100000...100000 - 1=1
58.101 Data I/O 1 Analog src - - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 326 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

326 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

58.102 Data I/O 2 Analog src - - 1=1
58.103 Data I/O 3 Analog src - - 1=1
58.104 Data I/O 4 Analog src - - 1=1
58.105 Data I/O 5 Analog src - - 1=1
58.106 Data I/O 6 Analog src - - 1=1
58.107 Data I/O 7 Analog src - - 1=1
58.108 Data I/O 8 Analog src - - 1=1
58.109 Data I/O 9 Analog src - - 1=1
58.110 Data I/O 10 Analog src - - 1=1
58.111 Data I/O 11 Analog src - - 1=1
58.112 Data I/O 12 Analog src - - 1=1
58.113 Data I/O 13 Analog src - - 1=1
58.114 Data I/O 14 Analog src - - 1=1
71 External PID1
71.01 External PID act value Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.02 Feedback act value Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.03 Setpoint act value Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.04 Deviation act value Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.06 PID status word PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
71.07 PID operation mode List 0…2 - 1=1
71.08 Feedback 1 source Analog src - - 1=1
71.11 Feedback filter time Real 0.000…30.000 s 1000 = 1 s
71.14 Setpoint scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
71.15 Output scaling Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
71.16 Setpoint 1 source Analog src - - 1=1
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1 Binary src - - 1=1
71.20 Internal setpoint sel2 Binary src - - 1=1
71.21 Internal setpoint 1 Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.22 Internal setpoint 2 Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.23 Internal setpoint 3 Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm, % 100 = 1 unit
or Hz
71.26 Setpoint min Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
71.27 Setpoint max Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 100 = 1
71.31 Deviation inversion Binary src - - 1=1
71.32 Gain Real 0.10…100.00 - 100 = 1
71.33 Integration time Real 0.0…9999.0 s 10 = 1 s
71.34 Derivation time Real 0.000…10.000 s 1000 = 1 s
ACS180 [Link] Page 327 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 327

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

71.35 Derivation filter time Real 0.0…10.0 s 10 = 1 s
71.36 Output min Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 10 = 1
71.37 Output max Real -200000.00…200000.00 - 10 = 1
71.38 Output freeze enable Binary src - - 1=1
71.39 Deadband range Real 0.0…200000.0 - 10 = 1
71.40 Deadband delay Real 0.0...3600.0 s 10 = 1 s
71.58 Increase prevention List 0…3 - 1=1
71.59 Decrease prevention List 0…3 - 1=1
71.62 Internal setpoint actual Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm,% or 100 = 1 unit
Hz
71.79 External PID units Real -200000.00…200000.00 rpm,% or 100 = 1 unit
Hz
95 HW configuration
95.01 Supply voltage List 0…5 - 1=1
95.02 Adaptive voltage limits List 0…1 - 1=1
95.03 Estimated AC supply voltage Real 0…65535 - 1=1V
95.20 HW options word 1 PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
95.26 Motor disconnect switch List 0...1 - 1=1
95.200 Cooling fan mode PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
96 System
96.01 Language List - - 1=1
96.02 Pass code Data 0…99999999 - 1=1
96.03 Access levels status PB 0b0000...0b1111 - 1=1
96.04 Macro select List 0, 1, 5, 8, 9, 12...14 - 1=1
96.05 Macro active List 0, 1, 5, 8, 9, 12...14 - 1=1
96.06 Parameter restore List 0, 8, 62 - 1=1
96.07 Parameter save manually List 0…1 - 1=1
96.08 Control board boot Real 0…1 - 1=1
96.10 User set status List 0…7, 20…23 - -
96.11 User set save/load List 0…5, 18…21 - -
96.12 User set I/O mode in1 Binary src - - -
96.13 User set I/O mode in2 Binary src - - -
96.16 Unit selection PB 0b0000...0b1111 - 1=1
96.51 Clear fault and event logger Real 0...1 - 1=1
96.54 Checksum action List 0...4 - 1=1
96.55 Checksum control word PB 0b0000...0b1111 - 1=1
96.68 Actual checksum A Real 0x0000...0xffff - 1=1
96.69 Actual checksum B Real 0x0000...0xffff - 1=1
96.71 Approved checksum A Real 0x0000...0xffff - 1=1
96.72 Approved checksum B Real 0x0000...0xffff - 1=1
96.78 550 compatibility mode List 0...1 - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 328 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

328 Additional parameter data

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

(Parameters 96.100…96.102 only visible when enabled by parameter 96.02)
96.100 Change user pass code Data 10000000…99999999 - 1=1
96.101 Confirm user pass code Data 10000000…99999999 - 1=1
96.102 User lock functionality PB 0000h…FFFFh - 1=1
97 Motor control
97.01 Switching frequency List 4…12 kHz 1=1
reference
97.02 Minimum switching frequency List 1…12 kHz 1=1
97.03 Slip gain Real 0…200 % 1 = 1%
97.04 Voltage reserve Real -4…50 % 1 = 1%
97.05 Flux braking List 0…2 - 1=1
97.06 Flux reference select Binary src - - 1=1
97.07 User flux reference Real 0.0...200.0 % 100 = 1%
97.08 Optimizer minimum torque Real 0.0...1600.0 % 10 = 1%
97.11 TR tuning Real 25…400 % 1 = 1%
97.13 IR compensation Real 0.00…50.00 % 100 = 1%
97.15 Motor model temperature List 0...1 - 1=1
adaptation
97.16 Stator temperature factor Real 0...200 % 1=1%
97.17 Rotor temperature factor Real 0...200 % 1=1%
97.20 U/F ratio List 0…1 - 1=1
97.33 Speed estimate filter time Real 0.00...100.00 - 1=1
97.48 Udc stabilizer List 0, 50, 100, 300, 500, 800 % 1 = 1%
97.49 Slip gain for scalar Real 0...200 % 1 = 1%
97.94 IR comp max frequency Real 1.0...200.0 % 10 = 1%
97.135 Udc ripple Real 0.0...200.0 V 10 = 1V
98 User motor parameters
98.01 User motor model mode List 0…1 - 1=1
98.02 Rs user Real 0.0000…0.50000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.03 Rr user Real 0.0000…0.50000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.04 Lm user Real 0.00000…10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.05 SigmaL user Real 0.00000…1.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.06 Ld user Real 0.00000…10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.07 Lq user Real 0.00000…10.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.08 PM flux user Real 0.00000…2.00000 p.u. 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.09 Rs user SI Real 0.00000…100.00000 ohm 100000 = 1
p.u.
ACS180 [Link] Page 329 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Additional parameter data 329

No. Name Type Range Unit FbEq32

98.10 Rr user SI Real 0.00000…100.00000 ohm 100000 = 1
p.u.
98.11 Lm user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH
98.12 SigmaL user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH
98.13 Ld user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH
98.14 Lq user SI Real 0.00…100000.00 mH 100 = 1 mH
99 Motor data
99.03 Motor type List 0…1 - 1=1
99.04 Motor control mode List 0…1 - 1=1
99.06 Motor nominal current Real 0.0…6400.0 A 10 = 1 A
99.07 Motor nominal voltage Real 0.0…800.0 V 10 = 1 V
99.08 Motor nominal frequency Real 0.00 … 500.00 Hz 100 = 1 Hz
99.09 Motor nominal speed Real 0 … 30000 rpm 1 = 1 rpm
99.10 Motor nominal power Real -10000.00…10000.00 kW kW or hp 100 = 1 unit
or
-13405.83 … 13405.83 hp
99.11 Motor nominal cos Φ Real 0.00 … 1.00 - 100 = 1
99.12 Motor nominal torque Real 0.000… N·m or 1000 = 1 unit
lb·ft
99.13 ID run requested List 0…4, 6 - 1=1
99.14 Last ID run performed List 0…4, 6 - 1=1
99.15 Motor polepairs calculated Real 0…1000 - 1=1
99.16 Motor phase order List 0…1 - 1=1
ACS180 [Link] Page 330 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

330 Additional parameter data

ACS180 [Link] Page 331 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 331

8
Fault tracing
What this chapter contains
• Safety
• Indications
• Warning/fault history
• QR Code generation for mobile service application
• Warning messages
• Fault messages
If the warnings and faults cannot be identified and corrected using the information in
this chapter, contact an ABB service representative. If you use the Drive composer
PC tool, send the Support package created by the Drive composer to the ABB service
representative.
Warnings and faults are listed in separate tables. Each table is sorted by a
warning/fault code.

Safety

WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to service the drive. Read
the instructions in chapter Safety instructions at the beginning of the hardware
manual of the drive before working on the drive.
ACS180 [Link] Page 332 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

332 Fault tracing

Indications
 Warnings and faults
Warnings and faults indicate an abnormal drive status. The codes and names of
active warnings and faults are displayed on the control panel of the drive as well as in
the Drive composer PC tool. Only the codes of warnings and faults are available over
fieldbus.
Warnings do not need to be reset; they stop showing when the cause of the warning
ceases. Warnings do not latch and the drive will continue to operate the motor.
Faults latch inside the drive and cause the drive to trip, and the motor stops. After the
cause of a fault has been removed, the fault can be reset from parameter 31.11 Fault
reset selection) such as the control panel, Drive composer PC tool, the digital inputs
of the drive, or fieldbus. Reseting the fault creates an event 64FF Fault reset. After
the reset, the drive can be restarted.
Note that some faults require a reboot of the control unit either by switching the power
off and on, or using parameter 96.08 Control board boot – this is mentioned in the
fault listing wherever appropriate.

 Pure events
In addition to warnings and faults, there are pure events that are only recorded in the
event log of the drive. The codes of these events are included in the Warning
messages table on page 350.

Warning/fault history
 Event log
All indications are stored in the event log. The event log stores information on
• the last 8 fault recordings, that is, faults that tripped the drive or fault resets
• the last 10 warnings or pure events that occurred.
See section Viewing warning/fault information on page 349. The logs can be cleared
using parameter 96.51 Clear fault and event logger.

Auxiliary codes
Some events generate an auxiliary code that often helps in pinpointing the problem.
On the control panel, the auxiliary code is stored as part of the details of the event; in
the Drive composer PC tool, the auxiliary code is shown in the event listing.
ACS180 [Link] Page 333 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 333

 Viewing warning/fault information

The drive is able to store a list of the active faults actually causing the drive to trip at
the present time. The drive also stores a list of faults and warnings that have
previously occurred.
For each stored fault, the panel shows the fault code, time and values of nine
parameters (actual signals and status words) stored at the time of the fault. The
values of the parameters for the latest fault are in parameters 05.80…05.88.
For active faults and warnings, see
• Main menu - Diagnostics - Active faults
• Main menu - Diagnostics - Active warnings
• Options menu - Active faults
• Options menu - Active warnings
• parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 128).
For previously occurred faults and warnings, see
• Main menu - Diagnostics - Fault & event log
Note: Active faults are also stored in the fault and event log.
• parameters in group 04 Warnings and faults (page 128).
The event log can also be accessed (and reset) using the Drive composer PC tool.
See Drive composer PC tool user’s manual (3AUA0000094606 [English]).

QR Code generation for mobile service application

A QR Code (or a series of QR Codes) can be generated by the drive for display on
the assistant control panel. The QR Code contains drive identification data,
information on the latest events, and values of status and counter parameters. The
code can be read with a mobile device containing the ABB service application, which
then sends the data to ABB for analysis. For more information on the application,
contact your local ABB service representative.
ACS180 [Link] Page 334 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

334 Fault tracing

Warning messages
Note: The list also contains events that only appear in the Event log.
Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
64FF Fault reset A fault has been reset from the Event. Informative only.
panel, Drive composer PC tool,
fieldbus or I/O.
A2A1 Current calibration Current offset and gain Informative warning. (See parameter
measurement calibration will 99.13 ID run requested.)
occur at next start.
A2B1 Overcurrent Output current has exceeded Check motor load.
internal fault limit. Check acceleration times in parameter
In addition to an actual group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed
overcurrent situation, this control), 26 Torque reference chain
warning may also be caused (torque control) or 28 Frequency
by an earth fault or supply reference chain (frequency control). Also
phase loss. check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling,
46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03
Torque scaling.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the hardware manual of the
drive.
Check there are no contactors opening
and closing in motor cable.
Check that the start-up data in parameter
group 99 Motor data corresponds to the
motor rating plate.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
A2B3 Earth leakage Drive has detected load Check there are no power factor
unbalance typically due to correction capacitors or surge absorbers
earth fault in motor or motor in motor cable.
cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the hardware manual of the
drive. If an earth fault is found, fix or
change the motor cable and/or motor.
If no earth fault can be detected, contact
your local ABB representative.
ACS180 [Link] Page 335 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 335

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
A2B4 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor cable(s) Check motor and motor cable for cabling
or motor. errors.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the hardware manual of the
drive.
Check there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
A2BA IGBT overload Excessive IGBT junction to Check motor cable.
case temperature. This Check ambient conditions.
warning protects the IGBT(s) Check air flow and fan operation.
and can be activated by a short Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
circuit in the motor cable.
Check motor power against drive power.
A3A1 DC link overvoltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage Check the supply voltage setting
too high (when the drive is (parameter 95.01 Supply voltage). Note
stopped). that the wrong setting of the parameter
may cause the motor to rush
A3A2 DC link undervoltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage
uncontrollably, or may overload the brake
too low (when the drive is
chopper or resistor.
stopped).
Check the supply voltage.
A3AA DC not charged The voltage of the intermediate If the problem persists, contact your local
DC circuit has not yet risen to ABB representative.
operating level.
A490 Incorrect temperature Sensor type mismatch. Check the settings of temperature source
sensor setup parameters 35.11.
A491 External temperature Measured temperature 1 has Check the value of parameter 35.02
1 exceeded warning limit. Measured temperature 1.
(Editable message text) Check the cooling of the motor (or other
equipment whose temperature is being
measured).
Check the value of 35.13 Temperature 1
warning limit.
A4A1 IGBT overtemperature Estimated drive IGBT Check ambient conditions.
temperature is excessive. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A4A9 Cooling Drive module temperature is Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
excessive. 50 °C /122 °F, ensure that load current
does not exceed derated load capacity of
drive. See chapter Technical data,
section Derating in the hardware manual
of the drive.
Check drive module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
drive module for dust pick-up. Clean
whenever necessary.
ACS180 [Link] Page 336 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

336 Fault tracing

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
A4B0 Excess temperature Power unit module Check ambient conditions.
temperature is excessive. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A4B1 Excess temperature High temperature difference Check the motor cabling.
difference between the IGBTs of different Check cooling of drive module(s).
phases.
A4F6 IGBT temperature Drive IGBT temperature is Check ambient conditions.
excessive. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
A580 PU communication Communication errors Check the connections between the drive
detected between the drive control unit and the power unit.
control unit and the power unit.
A591 Drive HW initialization Initialization of the drive Check the auxiliary code. See actions for
hardware. each code below.
0000 Drive hardware setup is Wait for the setup to initialize.
initializing.
0001 Initializing HW settings for the Wait for the setup to initialize.
first time.
A5A0 Safe torque off Safe torque off function is Check safety circuit connections. For
Programmable warning: active, ie safety circuit signal(s) more information, chapter The Safe
31.22 STO indication connected to connector STO is torque off function in the hardware
run/stop lost. manual of the drive and description of
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 225).
A5EA Measurement circuit Problem with internal Contact your local ABB representative.
temperature temperature measurement of
the drive.
A5EB PU board powerfail Power unit power supply Contact your local ABB representative.
failure.
A5EC PU communication Communication errors Check the connections between the drive
internal detected between the drive control unit and the power unit.
control unit and the power unit.
A5ED Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
ADC
A5EE Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
DFF
A5EF PU state feedback State feedback from output Contact your local ABB representative.
phases does not match control
signals.
A5F0 Charging feedback Charging feedback signal Check the feedback signal coming from
missing. the charging system.
A686 Checksum mismatch The calculated parameter Check that all necessary approved
Programmable warning: checksum does not match any (reference) checksums (96.71…96.72)
96.54 Checksum action enabled reference checksum. are enabled in 96.55 Checksum control
word.
Check the parameter configuration.
Using 96.55 Checksum control word,
enable a checksum parameter and copy
the actual checksum into that parameter.
ACS180 [Link] Page 337 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 337

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
A687 Checksum An action has been defined for Contact your local ABB representative for
configuration a parameter checksum configuring the feature, or disable the
mismatch but the feature has feature in 96.54 Checksum action.
not been configured.
A6A4 Motor nominal value The motor parameters are set Check the settings of the motor
incorrectly. configuration parameters in group 99.
The drive is not dimensioned Check that the drive is sized correctly for
correctly. the motor.
A6A5 No motor data Parameters in group 99 have Check that all the required parameters in
not been set. group 99 have been set.
Note: It is normal for this warning to
appear during the start-up and continue
until the motor data is entered.
A6A6 Voltage category The voltage category has not Set voltage category in parameter 95.01
unselected been defined. Supply voltage.
A6B0 User lock is open The user lock is open, ie. user Close the user lock by entering an invalid
lock configuration parameters pass code in parameter 96.02 Pass
96.100…96.102 are visible. code. See section User lock (page 116).
A6E5 AI parametrization The current/voltage hardware Check the event log for an auxiliary code.
setting of an analog input does The code identifies the analog input
not correspond to parameter whose settings are in conflict.
settings. Adjust parameter 12.15/12.25.
Note: Control board reboot (either by
cycling the power or through parameter
96.08 Control board boot) is required to
validate any changes in the hardware
settings.
A6E6 ULC configuration User load curve configuration Check the auxiliary code. See actions for
error. each code below.
0000 Speed points inconsistent. Check that each speed point (parameters
37.11…37.15) has a higher value than
the previous point.
0001 Frequency points inconsistent. Check that each frequency point
(37.16…37.20) has a higher value than
the previous point.
0002 Underload point above Check that each overload point
overload point. (37.31…37.35) has a higher value than
the corresponding underload point
0003 Overload point below
(37.21…37.25).
underload point.
A783 Motor overload Motor current is too high. Check the motor, and the machinery
coupled to motor, for overload.
Adjust the parameters used for the motor
overload function (35.51…35.53) and
35.55…35.56.
ACS180 [Link] Page 338 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

338 Fault tracing

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
A784 Motor disconnect All three output phases are Check if parameter 95.26 enables the
disconnected from motor. use of a motor disconnect switch. If not,
check the following:
• All switches between drive and motor
are closed.
• All cables between drive and motor
are connected and secured.
If no issue was detected and drive output
was actually connected to motor, contact
ABB.
A780 Motor stall Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings.
Programmable warning: region because of e.g. Check fault function parameters.
31.24 Stall function excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
A791 Brake resistor Brake resistor broken or not Check that a brake resistor has been
connected. connected.
Check the condition of the brake resistor.
A7CE EFB comm loss Communication break in Check the status of the fieldbus master
Programmable warning: embedded fieldbus (EFB) (online/offline/error etc.).
58.14 Communication loss communication. Check cable connections to the
action EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on
the control unit.
A7EE Panel loss Control panel or PC tool Check PC tool or control panel
Programmable warning: selected as active control connection.
49.05 Communication loss location for drive has ceased Check control panel connector.
action communicating. Check mounting platform if being used.
Disconnect and reconnect the control
panel.
A71C I/O Module internal Calibration data is not stored in Replace drive.
error the IO module. Analog signals
are not working with full
accuracy.
A8A0 AI supervision An analog signal is outside the Check signal level at the analog input.
Programmable warning: limits specified for the analog Check the wiring connected to the input.
12.03 AI supervision input. Check the minimum and maximum limits
function
of the input in parameter group 12
Standard AI.
A8A1 RO life warning The relay has changed states Change the control board or stop using
more than the recommended the relay output.
number of times.
0001 Relay output 1 Change the control board or stop using
relay output 1.
A8A2 RO toggle warning The relay output is changing Replace the signal connected to the relay
states faster than output source with a less frequently
recommended, eg. if a fast changing signal.
changing frequency signal is
connected to it. The relay
lifetime will be exceeded
shortly.
0001 Relay output 1 Select a different signal with parameter
10.24 RO1 source.
ACS180 [Link] Page 339 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 339

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
A8B0 Signal supervision Warning generated by a signal Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) supervision function. (parameter 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.06 Supervision 1 action
A8B1 Signal supervision Warning generated by a signal Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) supervision function. (parameter 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.16 Supervision 2 action
A8B2 Signal supervision Warning generated by a signal Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) supervision function. (parameter 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.26 Supervision 3 action
A8B3 Signal supervision Warning generated by a signal Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) supervision function. (parameter 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.36 Supervision 4 action
A8B4 Signal supervision Warning generated by a signal Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) supervision function. (parameter 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.46 Supervision 5 action
A8B5 Signal supervision Warning generated by a signal Check the source of the warning
(Editable message text) supervision function. (parameter 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
Programmable warning:
32.56 Supervision 6 action
A8C0 ULC invalid speed User load curve: X-axis points Check that points fulfill conditions. See
table (speed) are not valid. parameter 37.11 ULC speed table point
1.
A8C1 ULC overload warning User load curve: Signal has See parameter 37.03 ULC overload
been too long over the actions.
overload curve.
A8C4 ULC underload User load curve: Signal has See parameter 37.04 ULC underload
warning been too long under the actions.
underload curve.
A8C5 ULC invalid underload User load curve: Underload Check that points fulfill conditions. See
table curve points are not valid. parameter 37.21 ULC underload point 1.
A8C6 ULC invalid overload User load curve: Overload Check that points fulfill conditions. See
table curve points are not valid. parameter 37.31 ULC overload point 1.
A8C8 ULC invalid frequency User load curve: X-axis points Check that points fulfill conditions. -
table (frequency) are not valid. 500.0 Hz < 37.16 < 37.17 < 37.18 <
37.19 < 37.20 < 500.0 Hz. See
parameter 37.16 ULC frequency table
point 1.
A981 External warning 1 Fault in external device 1. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.01
Programmable warning: External event 1 source.
31.01 External event 1
source
31.02 External event 1
type
A982 External warning 2 Fault in external device 2. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.03
Programmable warning: External event 2 source.
31.03 External event 2
source
31.04 External event 2
type
ACS180 [Link] Page 340 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

340 Fault tracing

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
A983 External warning 3 Fault in external device 3. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.05
Programmable warning: External event 3 source.
31.05 External event 3
source
31.06 External event 3
type
A984 External warning 4 Fault in external device 5. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.07
Programmable warning: External event 4 source.
31.07 External event 4
source
31.08 External event 4
type
A985 External warning 5 Fault in external device 5. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.09
Programmable warning: External event 5 source.
31.09 External event 5
source
31.10 External event 5
type
AF8C Process PID sleep The drive is entering sleep Informative warning. See section Sleep
mode mode. and boost functions for process PID
control, and parameters 40.43…40.48.
AF90 Autotune The autotune routine has been The code contains an auxiliary value that
interrupted. specifies the reason for the abortion. For
details, see section Speed controller
autotune.
AFAA Autoreset A fault is about to be autoreset. Informative warning. See the settings in
parameter group 31 Fault functions.
AFE1 Emergency stop (off2) Drive has received an Check that it is safe to continue
emergency stop (mode operation. Then return emergency stop
selection off2) command. push button to normal position. Restart
drive.
AFE2 Emergency stop (off1 Drive has received an
or off3) emergency stop (mode If the emergency stop was unintentional,
selection off1 or off3) check the source selected by parameter
command. 21.05 Emergency stop source.

AFEA Enable start signal No enable start signal Check the setting of (and the source
missing received. selected by) parameter 20.19 Enable
(Editable message text) start command.
AFE9 Start delay The start delay is active and Informative warning. See parameter
the drive will start the motor 21.22 Start delay.
after a predefined delay.
AFEB Run enable missing No run enable signal is Check setting of parameter 20.12 Run
received. enable 1 source. Switch signal on (e.g. in
the fieldbus Control Word) or check
wiring of selected source.
AFED Enable to rotate Signal enable to rotate has not Switch enable to rotate signal on (eg. in
been received within a fixed digital inputs).
time delay of 240s. Check the setting of (and source
selected by) parameter 20.22 Enable to
rotate.
AFF6 Identification run Motor ID run will occur at next Informative warning.
start.
AFF7 Autophasing Autophasing will occur at next Informative warning.
start.
ACS180 [Link] Page 341 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 341

Code
Warning / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
B5A0 STO event Safe torque off function is Check safety circuit connections. For
Programmable event: active, ie. safety circuit more information, see chapter The Safe
31.22 STO indication signal(s) connected to torque off function in the hardware
run/stop connector STO is lost. manual of the drive and description of
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 225).
B686 Checksum mismatch The calculated parameter See A686 Checksum mismatch (page
Programmable event: checksum does not match any 352).
96.54 Checksum action enabled reference checksum.
ACS180 [Link] Page 342 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

342 Fault tracing

Fault messages
Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
1080 Backup/Restore Panel or PC tool has failed to Request backup or restore again.
timeout communicate with the drive
when backup was being made
or restored.
1081 Rating ID fault Drive software has not been Reset the fault to make the drive try to
able to read the rating ID of the reread the rating ID.
drive. If the fault reappears, cycle the power to
the drive. You may have to be repeat
this. If the fault persists, contact your
local ABB representative.
2281 Calibration Measured offset of output Try performing the current calibration
phase current measurement or again.
difference between output If the fault persists, contact your local
phase U2 and W2 current ABB representative.
measurement is too great (the
values are updated during
current calibration).
2310 Overcurrent Output current has exceeded Check motor load.
internal fault limit. Check acceleration times in parameter
In addition to an actual group 23 Speed reference ramp (speed
overcurrent situation, this fault control), 26 Torque reference chain
may also be caused by an (torque control) or 28 Frequency
earth fault or supply phase reference chain (frequency control). Also
loss. check parameters 46.01 Speed scaling,
46.02 Frequency scaling and 46.03
Torque scaling.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check there are no contactors opening
and closing in motor cable.
Check that the start-up data in parameter
group 99 Motor data corresponds to the
motor rating plate.
Check that there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
See chapter Electrical installation,
section Checking the insulation of the
assembly in the hardware manual of the
drive.
2330 Earth leakage Drive has detected load Check there are no power factor
unbalance typically due to correction capacitors or surge absorbers
earth fault in motor or motor in motor cable.
cable. Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
Try running the motor in scalar control
mode if allowed. (See parameter 99.04
Motor control mode.)
If no earth fault can be detected, contact
your local ABB representative.
ACS180 [Link] Page 343 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 343

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
2340 Short circuit Short-circuit in motor cable(s) Check motor and motor cable for cabling
or motor. errors.
Aux code 0x0080 indicates Check there are no power factor
that the state feedback from correction capacitors or surge absorbers
output phases does not match in motor cable.
the control signals. Cycle the power to the drive.
2381 IGBT overload Excessive IGBT junction to Check motor cable.
case temperature. This fault Check ambient conditions.
protects the IGBT(s) and can Check air flow and fan operation.
be activated by a short circuit Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
in the motor cable.
Check motor power against drive power.
3130 Input phase loss Intermediate circuit DC voltage Check input power line fuses.
is oscillating due to missing Check for loose power cable
input power line phase or connections.
blown fuse. Check for input power supply imbalance.
3181 Cross connection Incorrect input power and Check input power connections.
Programmable fault: 31.23 motor cable connection (ie.
Wiring or earth fault input power cable is connected
to drive motor connection).
3210 DC link overvoltage Excessive intermediate circuit Check that overvoltage control is on
DC voltage. (parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control).
Check that the supply voltage matches
the nominal input voltage of the drive.
Check the supply line for static or
transient overvoltage.
Check deceleration time.
Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
Retrofit drive with brake chopper and
brake resistor.
Check that the brake resistor is
dimensioned properly and the resistance
is between acceptable range for the
drive.
3220 DC link undervoltage Intermediate circuit DC voltage Check supply cabling, fuses and
is not sufficient because of a switchgear.
missing supply phase, blown
fuse or fault in the rectifier
bridge.
3385 Autophasing Autophasing routine (see Check that the motor ID run has been
section Events: - on page 64) successfully completed.
has failed. Check that the motor is not already
turning when the autophasing routine
starts.
Check the setting of parameter 99.03
Motor type.
3381 Output phase loss Motor circuit fault due to Connect motor cable.
Programmable fault: 31.19 missing motor connection (any If the drive is in scalar mode and nominal
Motor phase loss of the three phases not current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the
connected). nominal output current of the drive, set
In scalar control mode, the parameter 31.19 Motor phase loss to No
drive detects fault only when action.
the output frequency is above
10% of the motor nominal
frequency.
ACS180 [Link] Page 344 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

344 Fault tracing

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
4110 Control board Control board temperature is Check proper cooling of the drive.
temperature too high. Check the auxiliary cooling fan.
4210 IGBT overtemperature Estimated drive IGBT Check ambient conditions.
temperature is excessive. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
4290 Cooling Drive module temperature is Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
excessive. 50 °C /122 °F, ensure that load current
does not exceed derated load capacity of
drive. See chapter Technical data,
section Derating in the hardware manual
of the drive.
Check drive module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
drive module for dust pick-up. Clean
whenever necessary.
42F1 IGBT temperature Drive IGBT temperature is Check ambient conditions.
excessive. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
4310 Excess temperature Power unit module Check ambient conditions.
temperature is excessive. Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against drive power.
4180 Excess temperature High temperature difference Check the motor cabling.
difference between the IGBTs of different Check cooling of drive module(s).
phases.
4981 External temperature Measured temperature 1 has Check the value of parameter 35.02
1 exceeded fault limit. Measured temperature 1.
(Editable message text) Check the cooling of the motor (or other
equipment whose temperature is being
measured).
Check the value of parameter 35.12
Temperature 1 fault limit.
5090 STO hardware failure STO hardware diagnostics has Contact your local ABB representative for
detected hardware failure. hardware replacement.
5091 Safe torque off Safe torque off function is Check safety circuit connections. For
Programmable fault: 31.22 active, ie. safety circuit more information, see chapter The Safe
STO indication run/stop signal(s) connected to torque off function in the hardware
connector STO is broken manual of the drive and description of
during start or run. parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
(page 225).
5092 PU logic error Power unit memory has Contact your local ABB representative.
cleared.
5093 Rating ID mismatch The hardware of the drive does Cycle the power to the drive. You may
not match the information have to be repeat this.
stored in the memory. This
may occur eg. after a firmware
update.
5094 Measurement circuit Problem with internal Contact your local ABB representative.
temperature temperature measurement of
the drive.
ACS180 [Link] Page 345 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 345

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
5098 I/O communication Communication failure to Try resetting the fault or cycle the power
loss standard I/O. to the drive.
50A0 Fan Cooling fan stuck or Check fan operation and connection.
disconnected. Replace fan if faulty.
5681 PU communication Communication errors Check the connection between the drive
detected between the drive control unit and the power unit.
control unit and the power unit.
5682 Power unit lost Connection between the drive Check the connection between the
control unit and the power unit control unit and the power unit.
is lost.
5690 PU communication Internal communication error. Contact your local ABB representative.
internal
5691 Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
ADC
5692 PU board powerfail Power unit power supply Contact your local ABB representative.
failure.
5693 Measurement circuit Measurement circuit fault. Contact your local ABB representative.
DFF
5696 PU state feedback State feedback from output Contact your local ABB representative.
phases does not match control
signals.
5697 Charging feedback Charging feedback signal Check the feedback signal coming from
missing. the charging system.
6181 FPGA version Firmware and FPGA versions Reboot the control unit (using parameter
incompatible are incompatible. 96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
6200 Checksum mismatch The calculated parameter See A686 Checksum mismatch (page
Programmable event: checksum does not match any 352).
96.54 Checksum action enabled reference checksum.
6481 Task overload Internal fault. Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
6487 Stack overflow Internal fault. Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
64A1 Internal file load File read error. Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
64A6 Adaptive program file Adaptive program has faulted. Check the auxiliary code. See actions for
incompatible or each code below.
corrupted
000A Program corrupted or block Restore the template program or
non-existent. download the program to the drive.
000C Required block input missing. Check the inputs of the block.
000E Program corrupted or block Restore the template program or
non-existent. download the program to the drive.
ACS180 [Link] Page 346 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

346 Fault tracing

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
0011 Program too large. Remove blocks until the error stops.
0012 Program is empty. Correct the program and download it to
the drive.
001C A non-existing parameter or Edit the program to correct the parameter
block is used in the parameter. reference, or use an existing block.
001E Output to parameter failed Check the parameter reference in the
because the parameter was program.
write-protected. Check for other sources affecting the
target parameter.
0023 Program file incompatible with Adapt the program to current block
current firmware version. library and firmware version.
0024 Program file incompatible with Adapt the program to current block
current firmware version. library and firmware version.
Other - Contact your local ABB representative,
quoting the auxiliary code.
64B2 User set fault Loading of user parameter set Ensure that a valid user parameter set
failed because exists. Reload if uncertain.
• requested set does not exist
• set is not compatible with
control program
• drive was switched off
during loading.
64E1 Kernel overload Operating system error. Reboot the control unit (using parameter
96.08 Control board boot) or by cycling
power. If the problem persists, contact
your local ABB representative
6581 Parameter system Parameter load or save failed. Try forcing a save using parameter 96.07
Parameter save manually. Retry.
6681 EFB comm loss Communication break in Check the status of the fieldbus master
Programmable fault: 58.14 embedded fieldbus (EFB) (online/offline/error etc.).
Communication loss communication. Check cable connections to the
action EIA-485/X5 terminals 29, 30 and 31 on
the control unit.
6682 EFB config file Embedded fieldbus (EFB) Contact your local ABB representative.
configuration file could not be
read.
6683 EFB invalid Embedded fieldbus (EFB) Check the settings in parameter group 58
parameterization parameter settings Embedded fieldbus.
inconsistent or not compatible
with selected protocol.
6684 EFB load fault Embedded fieldbus (EFB) Contact your local ABB representative.
protocol firmware could not be
loaded.
Version mismatch between
EFB protocol firmware and
drive firmware.
6685 EFB fault 2 Fault reserved for the EFB Check the documentation of the protocol.
protocol application.
6686 EFB fault 3 Fault reserved for the EFB Check the documentation of the protocol.
protocol application.
ACS180 [Link] Page 347 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 347

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
6882 Text 32-bit table Internal fault. Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB
overflow representative if the fault persists.
6885 Text file overflow Internal fault. Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB
representative if the fault persists.
7081 Control panel loss Control panel or PC tool Check PC tool or control panel
Programmable fault: 49.05 selected as active control connection.
Communication loss location for drive has ceased Check control panel connector.
action communicating. Disconnect and reconnect the control
panel.
7082 I/O module comm loss Communication between IO Replace the drive.
module and drive is not
working properly.
7086 I/O module AI Over Overvoltage detected in AI. AI Check AI signal levels.
voltage is changed to voltage mode. AI
will return automatically back
to mA mode when the AI signal
level is in accepted limits.
7121 Motor stall Motor is operating in stall Check motor load and drive ratings.
Programmable fault: 31.24 region because of e.g. Check fault function parameters.
Stall function excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
7122 Motor overload Motor current is too high. Check the motor, and the machinery
coupled to motor, for overload.
Adjust the parameters used for the motor
overload function (35.51…35.53) and
35.55…35.56.
7310 Overspeed Motor is turning faster than Check minimum/maximum speed
highest allowed speed due to settings, parameters 30.11 Minimum
incorrectly set speed and 30.12 Maximum speed.
minimum/maximum speed, Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
insufficient braking torque or Check applicability of torque control.
changes in load when using Check need for brake chopper and
torque reference. resistor(s).
73F0 Overfrequency Maximum allowed output Check minimum/maximum frequency
frequency exceeded. settings, parameters 30.13 Minimum
frequency and 30.14 Maximum
frequency.
Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
Check applicability of torque control.
Check need for brake chopper and
resistor(s).
00FA Motor is turning faster than the Check minimum/maximum frequency
highest allowed frequency due settings, parameters 30.13 Minimum
to incorrectly set frequency and 30.14 Maximum
minimum/maximum frequency frequency.
or the motor rushes because of Check used supply voltage and voltage
too high supply voltage or selection parameter 95.01 Supply
incorrect supply voltage voltage.
selection in parameter 95.01
Supply voltage.
Other - Contact your local ABB representative,
quoting the auxiliary code.
ACS180 [Link] Page 348 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

348 Fault tracing

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
73B0 Emergency ramp Emergency stop did not finish Check the settings of parameters 31.32
failed within expected time. Emergency ramp supervision and 31.33
Emergency ramp supervision delay.
Check the predefined ramp times
(23.11…23.15 for mode Off1, 23.23 for
mode Off3).
8001 ULC underload fault User load curve: Signal has See parameter 37.04 ULC underload
been too long under the actions.
underload curve.
8002 ULC overload fault User load curve: Signal has See parameter 37.03 ULC overload
been too long over the actions.
overload curve.
80A0 AI supervision An analog signal is outside the Check signal level at the analog input.
Programmable fault: limits specified for the analog Check the wiring connected to the input.
12.03 AI supervision input. Check the minimum and maximum limits
function
of the input in parameter group 12
Standard AI.
80B0 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault (parameter
(Editable message text) supervision 1 function. 32.07 Supervision 1 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.06 Supervision 1 action
80B1 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault (parameter
(Editable message text) supervision 2 function. 32.17 Supervision 2 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.16 Supervision 2 action
80B2 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault (parameter
(Editable message text) supervision 3 function. 32.27 Supervision 3 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.26 Supervision 3 action
80B3 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault (parameter
(Editable message text) supervision 4 function. 32.37 Supervision 4 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.36 Supervision 4 action
80B4 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault (parameter
(Editable message text) supervision 5 function. 32.47 Supervision 5 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.46 Supervision 5 action
80B5 Signal supervision Fault generated by the signal Check the source of the fault (parameter
(Editable message text) supervision 6 function. 32.57 Supervision 6 signal).
Programmable fault:
32.56 Supervision 6 action
9081 External fault 1 Fault in external device 1. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.01
Programmable fault: 31.01 External event 1 source.
External event 1 source
31.02 External event 1
type
9082 External fault 2 Fault in external device 2. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.03
Programmable fault: 31.03 External event 2 source.
External event 2 source
31.04 External event 2
type
ACS180 [Link] Page 349 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fault tracing 349

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
9083 External fault 3 Fault in external device 3. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.05
Programmable fault: 31.05 External event 3 source.
External event 3 source
31.06 External event 3
type
9084 External fault 4 Fault in external device 5. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.07
Programmable fault: 31.07 External event 4 source.
External event 4 source
31.08 External event 4
type
9085 External fault 5 Fault in external device 5. Check the external device.
(Editable message text) Check setting of parameter 31.09
Programmable fault: 31.09 External event 5 source.
External event 5 source
31.10 External event 5
type
FA81 Safe torque off 1 Safe torque off function is Check safety circuit connections. For
active, ie. STO circuit 1 is more information, see chapter The Safe
broken. torque off function in the hardware
manual of the drive and description of
FA82 Safe torque off 2 Safe torque off function is
parameter 31.22 STO indication run/stop
active, ie. STO circuit 2 is
(page 225).
broken.
FF61 ID run Motor ID run was not Check the nominal motor values in
completed successfully. parameter group 99 Motor data.
Check that no external control system is
connected to the drive.
Cycle the power to the drive (and its
control unit, if powered separately).
Check that no operation limits prevent
the completion of the ID run. Restore
parameters to default settings and try
again.
Check that the motor shaft is not locked.
0001 Maximum current limit too low. Check settings of parameters 99.06
Motor nominal current and 30.17
Maximum current. Make sure that
30.17 > 99.06.
Check that the drive is dimensioned
correctly according to the motor.
0002 Maximum speed limit or Check settings of parameters
calculated field weakening • 30.11 Minimum speed
point too low. • 30.12 Maximum speed
• 99.07 Motor nominal voltage
• 99.08 Motor nominal frequency
• 99.09 Motor nominal speed.
Make sure that
• 30.12 > (0.55 × 99.09) >
(0.50 × synchronous speed)
• 30.11 < 0, and
• supply voltage > (0.66 × 99.07).
ACS180 [Link] Page 350 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

350 Fault tracing

Code
Fault / Aux. code Cause What to do
(hex)
0003 Maximum torque limit too low. Check settings of parameter 99.12 Motor
nominal torque, and the torque limits in
group 30 Limits.
Make sure that the maximum torque limit
in force is greater than 100%.
0004 Current measurement Contact your local ABB representative.
calibration did not finish within
reasonable time
0005…0008 Internal error. Contact your local ABB representative.
0009 (Asynchronous motors only) Contact your local ABB representative.
Acceleration did not finish
within reasonable time.
000A (Asynchronous motors only) Contact your local ABB representative.
Deceleration did not finish
within reasonable time.
000B (Asynchronous motors only) Contact your local ABB representative.
Speed dropped to zero during
ID run.
000C (Permanent magnet motors Contact your local ABB representative.
only)
First acceleration did not finish
within reasonable time.
000D (Permanent magnet motors Contact your local ABB representative.
only)
Second acceleration did not
finish within reasonable time.
000E…0010 Internal error. Contact your local ABB representative.
0011 (Synchronous reluctance Contact your local ABB representative.
motors only)
Pulse test error.
0012 Motor too large for advanced Check that the motor and drive sizes are
standstill ID run. compatible.
Contact your local ABB representative.
0013 (Asynchronous motors only) Check that the motor nominal value
Motor data error. settings in the drive are the same as in
the motor nameplate.
Contact your local ABB representative.
FF8E EFB force trip A fault trip command has been Check the fault information provided by
received through the the PLC.
embedded fieldbus interface.
ACS180 [Link] Page 351 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 351

9
Fieldbus control through the
embedded fieldbus interface
(EFB)
What this chapter contains
• System overview
• Modbus
• Connecting the fieldbus to the drive
• Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (Modbus)
• Setting the drive control parameters
• Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface
• About the control profiles
• Control Word
• Status Word
• State transition diagrams
• References
• Actual values
• Modbus holding register addresses
• Modbus function codes
• Exception codes
• Coils (0xxxx reference set)
• Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set)
• Error code registers (holding registers 400090…400100)
ACS180 [Link] Page 352 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

352 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system through a communication
link using the embedded fieldbus interface.

Modbus
The embedded fieldbus interface supports the Modbus RTU protocol. The drive
control program can handle 10 Modbus registers in a 10-millisecond time level. For
example, if the drive receives a request to read 20 registers, it will start its response
within 22 ms of receiving the request – 20 ms for processing the request and 2 ms
overhead for handling the bus. The actual response time depends on other factors as
well, such as the baud rate (a parameter setting in the drive).
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the embedded fieldbus interface
and other available sources, for example, digital and analog inputs.

 Embedded fieldbus and external control panel mode switch

ACS180's embedded fieldbus and external control panel shares same port internally
and can be switched by a jumper. You can't use external panel together with
embedded fieldbus. If you have the EFB communication enabled in the drive, but
need to change to a communication with an external panel temporarily, do these
steps:
1. Power-down the drive, wait 5 minutes.
2. Place the jumper to "panel mode".
3. Connect the external panel onto the drive.
4. Power-up the drive.
5. The drive can identify the panel automatically and you can use the external panel
as normal. Be noted that at this moment the EFB can not work.
6. After works done, power-down the drive.
7. Disconnect external panel from the drive.
8. Place the jumper J2 to "Modbus Mode".
9. Power-up the drive.

 Connecting the fieldbus to the drive

Connect the fieldbus to the EIA-485 Modbus RTU terminal on control connectors
which is on the front of the drive. The connection diagram is shown below. ACS180
has a jumper J2 on front of the drive to switch between EFB mode and external
ACS180 [Link] Page 353 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 353

control panel mode. Make sure the jumper is on the correct position before connect to
fieldbus.
Fieldbus controller
Termination ON 1)

Fieldbus

J1 J1
J1
...
Termination OFF Termination OFF Termination ON

J2 J2 J2

SHIELD
SHIELD

SHIELD
AGND

AGND
AGND
B+

B+
B+
A-

A-
A-

Modbus Mode Modbus Mode Modbus Mode

Drive Drive Drive

1) The device at both ends on the fieldbus must have termination set to ON.

 Setting up the embedded fieldbus interface (Modbus)

To take the Modbus into use
1. Select Modbus RTU from the Control macros menu (see section Submenus on
page 33).
The following parameters change automatically.
Parameter Setting
20.01 Ext1 commands Embedded fieldbus
20.03 Ext1 in1 Not selected
20.04 Ext1 in2 Not selected
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1
22.22 Constant speed sel1 Not selected
22.23 Constant speed sel2 Not selected
23.11 Ramp set selection Acc/Dec time 1
28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1 EFB ref1
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Not selected
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Not selected
28.71 Freq ramp set sel Acc/Dec time 1
31.11 Fault reset selection DI1
58.01 Protocol enable Modbus RTU

You can manually set the drive up for the embedded fieldbus communication with the
parameters shown in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column gives
either the value to use or the default value. The Function/Information column gives
a description of the parameter.
ACS180 [Link] Page 354 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

354 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

Modbus parameter settings for embedded fieldbus interface

Setting for
Parameter Function/Information
fieldbus control

COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION
58.01 Protocol enable Modbus RTU Initializes embedded fieldbus communication.

EMBEDDED MODBUS CONFIGURATION

58.03 Node address 1 (default) Node address. There must be no two nodes
with the same node address online.
58.04 Baud rate 19.2 kbps (default) Defines the communication speed of the link.
Use the same setting as in the master station.
58.05 Parity 8 EVEN 1 (default) Selects the parity and stop bit setting. Use the
same setting as in the master station.
58.14 Communication Fault (default) Defines the action taken when a
loss action communication loss is detected.
58.15 Communication Cw / Ref1 / Ref2 Enables/disables communication loss
loss mode (default) monitoring and defines the means for
resetting the counter of the communication
loss delay.
58.16 Communication 3.0 s (default) Defines the timeout limit for the
loss time communication monitoring.
58.17 Transmit delay 0 ms (default) Defines a response delay for the drive.
58.25 Control profile ABB Drives Selects the control profile used by the drive.
(default) See section Basics of the embedded fieldbus
interface (page 373).
58.26 EFB ref1 type Speed or Defines the types of fieldbus references 1 and
58.27 EFB ref2 type frequency (default 2. The scaling for each reference type is
for 58.26), defined by parameters 46.01…46.03. With
Transparent, the Speed or frequency setting, the type is
General, Torque selected automatically according to the
(default for 58.27), currently active drive control mode.
Speed, Frequency
58.28 EFB act1 type Speed or Defines the types of actual values 1 and 2.
58.29 EFB act2 type frequency (default The scaling for each actual value type is
for 58.28), defined by parameters 46.01…46.03. With
Transparent the Speed or frequency setting, the type is
(default for 58.29), selected automatically according to the
General, Torque, currently active drive control mode.
Speed, Frequency
58.31 EFB act1 Other Defines the source of actual values 1 and 2
58.32 transparent when the 58.26 EFB ref1 type (58.27 EFB
source ref2 type) is set to Transparent.
EFB act2
transparent
source
ACS180 [Link] Page 355 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 355

Setting for
Parameter Function/Information
fieldbus control
58.33 Addressing Mode 0 (default) Defines the mapping between parameters
mode and holding registers in the 400001…465536
(100…65535) Modbus register range.
58.34 Word order LO-HI (default) Defines the order of the data words in the
Modbus message frame.
58.101 Data I/O 1 For example, the Defines the address of the drive parameter
… … default settings which the Modbus master accesses when it
58.114 Data I/O 14 (I/Os 1…6 contain reads from or writes to the register address
the control word, corresponding to Modbus In/Out parameters.
the status word, Select the parameters that you want to read
two references and or write through the Modbus I/O words.
two actual values)
RO/DIO control These settings write the incoming data into
word, AO1 data storage parameters 10.99 RO/DIO control
storage, Feedback word, 13.91 AO1 data storage, 40.91
data storage, Feedback data storage or 40.92 Setpoint data
Setpoint data storage.
storage
58.06 Communication Refresh settings Validates the settings of the configuration
control parameters.

The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time, or when
they are validated by parameter 58.06 Communication control (Refresh settings).

 Setting the drive control parameters

After the embedded fieldbus interface has been set up, check and adjust the drive
control parameters listed in the table below. The Setting for fieldbus control column
gives the value or values to use when the embedded fieldbus signal is the desired
source or destination for that particular drive control signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Setting for
Parameter Function/Information
fieldbus control

CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION

20.01 Ext1 Embedded fieldbus Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
commands and stop commands when EXT1 is selected
as the active control location.
20.02 Ext2 Embedded fieldbus Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
commands and stop commands when EXT2 is selected
as the active control location.

SPEED REFERENCE SELECTION

22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as speed
reference 1.
ACS180 [Link] Page 356 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

356 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

Setting for
Parameter Function/Information
fieldbus control

22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
embedded fieldbus interface as speed
reference 2.

TORQUE REFERENCE SELECTION

26.11 Torque ref1 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
source embedded fieldbus interface as torque
reference 1.
26.12 Torque ref2 EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
source embedded fieldbus interface as torque
reference 2.

FREQUENCY REFERENCE SELECTION

28.11 Ext1 frequency EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
ref1 embedded fieldbus interface as frequency
reference 1.
28.15 Ext2 frequency EFB ref1 Selects a reference received through the
ref1 embedded fieldbus interface as frequency
reference 2.

OTHER SELECTIONS
EFB references can be selected as the source at virtually any signal selector parameter by
selecting Other, then either 03.09 EFB reference 1 or 03.10 EFB reference 2.

SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS

96.07 Parameter save Save (reverts to Saves parameter value changes (including
manually Done) those made through fieldbus control) to
permanent memory.
ACS180 [Link] Page 357 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 357

 Basics of the embedded fieldbus interface

The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit
data words or 32-bit data words (with a transparent control profile).
The diagram below illustrates the operation of the embedded fieldbus interface. The
signals transferred in the cyclic communication are explained further below the
diagram.

Fieldbus network
1)
Cyclic communication EFB profile EXT1/2
Start commands

SEL
EFB CW
CW 0
2) 03.09 EFB reference
REF1 1
2 1 20.01
REF2 3
03.10 EFB reference 20.06
58.25 2
SEL Reference
SW 0 EFB SW selection
2)
ACT1 1 Actual 1
2
ACT2 3 Actual 2
58.25
Groups
Data I/O 22/26/28/40 etc.
selection
I/O 1
I/O 2 Reference
I/O 3 Par. 01.01…255.255 selection
…
I/O 69
58.101
…
58.114 Groups
22/26/28/40 etc.

Parameter
Acyclic communication table

1. See also other parameters which can be controlled through fieldbus.

2. Data conversion if parameter 58.25 Control profile is set to ABB Drives. See section About the control
profiles on page 375.

 Control word and Status word

The Control Word (CW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It is the principal
means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The CW is sent by the fieldbus
controller to the drive. With drive parameters, the user selects the EFB CW as the
ACS180 [Link] Page 358 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

358 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

source of drive control commands (such as start/stop, emergency stop, selection

between external control locations 1/2, or fault reset). The drive switches between its
states according to the bit-coded instructions of the CW.
The fieldbus CW is either written to the drive as it is or the data is converted. See
section About the control profiles on page 375.
The fieldbus Status Word (SW) is a 16-bit or 32-bit packed boolean word. It contains
status information from the drive to the fieldbus controller. The drive SW is either
written to the fieldbus SW as it is or the data is converted. See section About the
control profiles on page 375.

 References
EFB references 1 and 2 are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. The contents of each
reference word can be used as the source of virtually any signal, such as the speed,
frequency, torque or process reference. In embedded fieldbus communication,
references 1 and 2 are displayed by 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10 EFB reference
2 respectively. Whether the references are scaled or not depends on the settings of
58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type. See section About the control profiles
on page 375.

 Actual values
Fieldbus actual signals (ACT1 and ACT2) are 16-bit or 32-bit signed integers. They
convey selected drive parameter values from the drive to the master. Whether the
actual values are scaled or not depends on the settings of 58.28 EFB act1 type and
58.29 EFB act2 type. See section About the control profiles on page 375.

 Data input/outputs
Data input/outputs are 16-bit or 32-bit words containing selected drive parameter
values. Parameters 58.101 Data I/O 1 … 58.114 Data I/O 14 define the addresses
from which the master either reads data (input) or to which it writes data (output).

 Register addressing
The address field of Modbus requests for accessing holding registers is 16 bits. This
allows the Modbus protocol to support addressing of 65536 holding registers.
Historically, Modbus master devices used 5-digit decimal addresses from 40001 to
49999 to represent holding register addresses. The 5-digit decimal addressing limited
to 9999 the number of holding registers that could be addressed.
ACS180 [Link] Page 359 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 359

Modern Modbus master devices typically provide a means to access the full range of
65536 Modbus holding registers. One of these methods is to use 6-digit decimal
addresses from 400001 to 465536. This manual uses 6-digit decimal addressing to
represent Modbus holding register addresses.
Modbus master devices that are limited to the 5-digit decimal addressing may still
access registers 400001 to 409999 by using 5-digit decimal addresses 40001 to
49999. Registers 410000-465536 are inaccessible to these masters. For more
information, see parameter 58.33 Addressing mode.
Note: Register addresses of 32-bit parameters cannot be accessed by using 5-digit
register numbers.

 About the control profiles

A control profile defines the rules for data transfer between the drive and the fieldbus
master, for example:
• if packed boolean words are converted and how
• if signal values are scaled and how
• how drive register addresses are mapped for the fieldbus master.
You can configure the drive to receive and send messages according to one of the
two profiles:
• ABB Drives
• DCU Profile.
For the ABB Drives profile, the embedded fieldbus interface of the drive converts the
fieldbus data to and from the native data used in the drive. The DCU Profile involves
no data conversion or scaling. The figure below illustrates the effect of the profile
selection.

Profile selection

Data
conversion & SEL
scaling
0
58.26…58.29
Fieldbus Drive
5

58.25

Control profile selection with parameter 58.25 Control profile is:

• (0) ABB Drives
• (5) DCU Profile.
ACS180 [Link] Page 360 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

360 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

 Control Word
Control Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the contents of the fieldbus Control Word for the ABB Drives
control profile. The embedded fieldbus interface converts this word to the form in
which it is used in the drive. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown
in State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 381.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 OFF1_ 1 Proceed to READY TO OPERATE.
CONTROL
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp. Proceed to
OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2_ 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
CONTROL
0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Proceed to OFF2 ACTIVE, proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED.
2 OFF3_ 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
CONTROL 0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by drive
parameter. Proceed to OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
Warning: Ensure that the motor and driven machine can
be stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT_ 1 Proceed to OPERATION ENABLED.
OPERATION Note: Run enable signal must be active; see the drive
documentation. If the drive is set to receive the Run
enable signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the
signal. See also parameter 06.18 Start inhibit status word
(page 136).
0 Inhibit operation. Proceed to OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 Normal operation. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
ZERO GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive
ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function. Proceed to RAMP FUNCTION
GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Proceed to OPERATING.
ZERO Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Proceed to SWITCH-
ON INHIBITED.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation.
ACS180 [Link] Page 361 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 361

Bit Name Value STATE/Description

8 JOGGING_1 1 Request running at Jogging 1 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation.
9 JOGGING_2 1 Request running at Jogging 2 speed.
Note: This bit is effective only if the fieldbus interface is
set as the source for this signal by drive parameters.
0 Continue normal operation.
10 REMOTE_ 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
CMD
0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control
Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled. Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT_CTRL_ 1 Select External Control Location EXT2. Effective if the
LOC control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
12 USER_0 Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic
for application-specific functionality.
13 USER_1
14 USER_2
15 USER_3

 Control Word for the DCU Profile

The embedded fieldbus interface writes the fieldbus Control Word as is to the drive
Control Word bits 0 to 15. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Control Word are not in use.
Bit Name Value State/Description
0 STOP 1 Stop according to the Stop Mode parameter or the stop
mode request bits (bits 7…9).
0 (no op)
1 START 1 Start the drive.
0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction of motor rotation.
0 (no op)
3 Reserved
4 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.
0 (no op)
ACS180 [Link] Page 362 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

362 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

Bit Name Value State/Description

5 EXT2 1 Select External control location EXT2. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
0 Select External control location EXT1. Effective if the
control location is parameterized to be selected from the
fieldbus.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable
signal from the fieldbus, this bit deactivates the signal.
0 Run enable. If the drive is set to receive the run enable
signal from the fieldbus, this bit activates the signal.
7 STOPMODE_RA 1 Normal ramp stop mode
MP
0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7…9 are all
0.
8 STOPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp stop mode.
ERGENCY_RAM 0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7…9 are all
P 0.
9 STOPMODE_CO 1 Coast stop mode.
AST
0 (no op) Default to parameter stop mode if bits 7…9 are all
0.
10 Reserved for Not yet implemented.
RAMP_PAIR _2
11 RAMP_OUT_ZER 1 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero. Drive
O ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
0 Normal operation.
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
0 Normal operation.
13 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
0 Normal operation.
14 REQ_LOCAL_LO 1
CK
0
15 Reserved for Not yet implemented.
TORQ_LIM_PAIR
_2
16 FB_LOCAL_CTL 1 Local mode for control from the fieldbus is requested.
Steal control from the active source.
0 (no op)
17 FB_LOCAL_REF 1 Local mode for reference from the fieldbus is requested.
Steal reference from the active source.
0 (no op)
18 Reserved for Not yet implemented.
RUN_DISABLE_1
19 Reserved
20 Reserved
ACS180 [Link] Page 363 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 363

Bit Name Value State/Description

21 Reserved
22 USER_0 Writable control bits that can be combined with drive logic
for application-specific functionality.
23 USER_1
24 USER_2
25 USER_3
26 Reserved
…31

 Status Word
Status Word for the ABB Drives profile
The table below shows the fieldbus Status Word for the ABB Drives control profile.
The embedded fieldbus interface converts the drive Status Word into this form for the
fieldbus. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in State transition
diagram for the ABB Drives profile on page 381.
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.
0 OFF1 ACTIVE.
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.
0 OPERATION INHIBITED. See also parameter 06.18
Start inhibit status word (page 136).
3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT.
0 No fault.
4 OFF_2_STATUS 1 OFF2 inactive.
0 OFF2 ACTIVE.
5 OFF_3_STATUS 1 OFF3 inactive.
0 OFF3 ACTIVE.
6 SWC_ON_ 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
INHIB
0 –
7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm.
0 No warning/alarm.
8 AT_ 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals Reference (is within
SETPOINT tolerance limits, e.g. in speed control, speed error is
10% max. of nominal motor speed).
0 Actual value differs from Reference (is outside
tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).
0 Drive control location: LOCAL.
ACS180 [Link] Page 364 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

364 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

Bit Name Value STATE/Description

10 ABOVE_ 1 Actual frequency or speed equals or exceeds
LIMIT supervision limit (set by drive parameter). Valid in both
directions of rotation. Set by drive parameters: 46.31,
46.32, 46.33. These parameters are indicated by bit
10 of 06.11 Main status word.
0 Actual frequency or speed within supervision limit.
11 USER_0 Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.
12 USER_1
13 USER_2
14 USER_3
15 Reserved

Status Word for the DCU Profile

The embedded fieldbus interface writes the drive Status Word bits 0 to 15 to the
fieldbus Status Word as is. Bits 16 to 32 of the drive Status Word are not in use.
Bit Name Value State/Description
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive the start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal is active.
0 External run enable signal is not active.
2 Reserved for Not yet implemented.
ENABLED_TO_R
OTATE
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive is not at zero speed.
5 ACCELERATING 1 Not yet implemented.
0 Not yet implemented.
6 DECELERATING 1 Not yet implemented.
0 Not yet implemented.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint.
0 Drive is not at setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Drive operation is limited.
0 Drive operation is not limited.
9 SUPERVISION 1 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is above a
limit. Limit is set with parameters 46.31…46.33
0 Actual value (speed, frequency or torque) is within
limits.
ACS180 [Link] Page 365 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 365

Bit Name Value State/Description

10 REVERSE_REF 1 Not yet implemented.
0 Not yet implemented.
11 REVERSE_ACT 1 Not yet implemented.
0 Not yet implemented.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is in local control mode.
0 Panel/keypad (or PC tool) is not in local control mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOC 1 Fieldbus is in local control mode.
AL 0 Fieldbus is not in local control mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 External control location EXT2 is active.
0 External control location EXT1 is active.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is faulted.
0 Drive is not faulted.
16 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm is active.
0 No warning/alarm.
17 Reserved
18 Reserved for Not yet implemented.
DIRECTION_LO
CK
19 Reserved
20 CTL_MODE 1 Vector motor control mode is active.
0 Scalar motor control mode is active
21 Reserved
22 USER_0 Status bits that can be combined with drive logic for
application-specific functionality.
23 USER_1
24 USER_2
25 USER_3
26 REQ_CTL 1 Control is requested in this channel.
0 Control is not requested in this channel.
27 … Reserved
31

 State transition diagrams

State transition diagram for the ABB Drives profile
The diagram below shows the state transitions in the drive when the drive is using the
ABB Drives profile and the drive is configured to follow the commands of the control
ACS180 [Link] Page 366 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

366 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

word from the embedded fieldbus interface. The upper case texts refer to the states
which are used in the tables representing the fieldbus Control and Status words.
See sections Control Word for the ABB Drives profile on page 376 and Status Word
for the ABB Drives profile on page 379.

SWITCH-ON ABB Drives profile

MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
Power ON (CW Bit0=0)

NOT READY TO
SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=0) CW = Control Word
A B C D
SW = Status Word
n = Speed
I = Input Current
(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
RFG = Ramp Function
(CW Bit3=0)
Generator
READY TO f = Frequency
OPERATION SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=1)
INHIBITED (SW Bit2=0)
from any state
operation (CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
inhibited Fault
READY TO
FAULT (SW Bit3=1)
from any state OPERATE (SW Bit1=1)

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) (CW Bit7=1)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111
OFF1 and SW Bit12=1)
ACTIVE (SW Bit1=0)
from any state from any state
n(f)=0 / I=0 Emergency Stop Emergency OFF
(CW Bit3=1 OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
and
SW Bit12=1) OFF3 OFF2
B C D ACTIVE (SW Bit5=0) ACTIVE (SW Bit4=0)

(CW Bit4=0) n(f)=0 / I=0

OPERATION
C D
ENABLED (SW Bit2=1)
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)

D RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
B
(CW Bit6=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)

RFG: ACCELERATOR STATE

ENABLED
C
condition
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)

OPERATION rising edge of the bit

(SW Bit8=1)
D
ACS180 [Link] Page 367 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 367

A control word sequence example is given below:

Start:
• 476h --> NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
If MSW bit 0 = 1 then
• 477h --> READY TO SWITCH ON (Stopped)
• 47Fh --> OPERATION (Running)
Stop:
• 477h = Stop according to 21.03 Stop mode
• 47Eh = OFF1 ramp stop (Note: uninterpretable ramp stop)
Fault reset:
• Rising edge of MCW bit 7
Start after STO:
• If 31.22 STO indication run/stop is not fault/fault make sure that 06.18 Start inhibit
status word, bit 7 STO = 0 before giving a start command.

 References
References for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two references, EFB reference 1 and EFB
reference 2. The references are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit
integer. A negative reference is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference.
ACS180 [Link] Page 368 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

368 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

The references are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling is

in use depends on the setting of 58.26 EFB ref1 type and 58.27 EFB ref2 type (see
page 284).

Fieldbus Drive

46.01 (with speed reference)

20000
46.02 (with frequency reference)

46.03 (with torque reference)

10000
46.04 (with power reference)

0 0

-(46.03) (with torque reference)

-10000
-(46.04) (with power reference)

-(46.01) (with speed reference)

-20000
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)

The scaled references are shown by parameters 03.09 EFB reference 1 and 03.10
EFB reference 2.

 Actual values
Actual values for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The ABB Drives profile supports the use of two fieldbus actual values, ACT1 and
ACT2. The actual values are 16-bit words each containing a sign bit and a 15-bit
integer. A negative value is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive value.
The actual values are scaled as defined by parameters 46.01…46.04; which scaling
is in use depends on the setting of parameters 58.28 EFB act1 type and 58.29 EFB
act2 type (see page 284).
ACS180 [Link] Page 369 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 369

Fieldbus Drive

46.01 (with speed reference)

20000
46.02 (with frequency reference)

46.03 (with torque reference)

10000
46.04 (with power reference)

0 0

-(46.03) (with torque reference)

-10000
-(46.04) (with power reference)

-(46.01) (with speed reference)

-20000
-(46.02) (with frequency reference)

 Modbus holding register addresses

Modbus holding register addresses for the ABB Drives profile and DCU Profile
The table below shows the default Modbus holding register addresses for the drive
data with the ABB Drives profile. This profile provides a converted 16-bit access to
the drive data.
Note: Only the 16 least significant bits of the drive’s 32-bit Control and Status Words
can be accessed.
Note: Bits 16 through 32 of the DCU Control/Status word are not in use if 16-bit
control/status word is used with the DCU Profile.
Register address Register data (16-bit words)
400001 Default: Control word (CW 16bit). See sections Control Word for the
ABB Drives profile (page 376) and Control Word for the DCU Profile
(page 377).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.101 Data I/O 1.
400002 Default: Reference 1 (Ref1 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400003 Default: Reference 2 (Ref2 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
400004 Default: Status Word (SW 16bit). See sections Status Word for the
ABB Drives profile (page 379) and Status Word for the DCU Profile
(page 380).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.102 Data I/O 2.
ACS180 [Link] Page 370 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

370 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

400005 Default: Actual value 1 (Act1 16bit).

The selection can be changed using parameter 58.105 Data I/O 5.
400006 Actual value 2 (Act2 16bit).
The selection can be changed using parameter 58.106 Data I/O 6.
400007…400014 Data in/out 7…14.
Selected by parameters 58.107 Data I/O 7 … 58.114 Data I/O 14.
400015…400089 Unused
400090…400100 Error code access. See section Error code registers (holding registers
400090…400100) (page 390).
400101…465536 Parameter read/write.
Parameters are mapped to register addresses according to parameter
58.33 Addressing mode.

 Modbus function codes

The table below shows the Modbus function codes supported by the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Code Function name Description
01h Read Coils Reads the 0/1 status of coils (0X references).
02h Read Discrete Inputs Reads the 0/1 status of discrete inputs (1X
references).
03h Read Holding Registers Reads the binary contents of holding registers (4X
references).
05h Write Single Coil Forces a single coil (0X reference) to 0 or 1.
06h Write Single Register Writes a single holding register (4X reference).
08h Diagnostics Provides a series of tests for checking the
communication, or for checking various internal error
conditions.
Supported subcodes:
• 00h Return Query Data: Echo/loopback test.
• 01h Restart Comm Option: Restarts and initializes
the EFB, clears communications event counters.
• 04h Force Listen Only Mode
• 0Ah Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
• 0Bh Return Bus Message Count
• 0Ch Return Bus Comm. Error Count
• 0Dh Return Bus Exception Error Count
• 0Eh Return Slave Message Count
• 0Fh Return Slave No Response Count
• 10h Return Slave NAK (negative acknowledge)
Count
• 11h Return Slave Busy Count
• 12h Return Bus Character Overrun Count
• 14h Clear Overrun Counter and Flag
ACS180 [Link] Page 371 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 371

Code Function name Description

0Bh Get Comm Event Returns a status word and an event count.
Counter
0Fh Write Multiple Coils Forces a sequence of coils (0X references) to 0 or 1.
10h Write Multiple Registers Writes the contents of a contiguous block of holding
registers (4X references).
16h Mask Write Register Modifies the contents of a 4X register using a
combination of an AND mask, an OR mask, and the
register’s current contents.
17h Read/Write Multiple Writes the contents of a contiguous block of 4X
Registers registers, then reads the contents of another group of
registers (the same or different than those written) in
a server device.
2Bh / 0Eh Encapsulated Interface Supported subcodes:
Transport • 0Eh Read Device Identification: Allows reading the
identification and other information.
Supported ID codes (access type):
• 00h: Request to get the basic device identification
(stream access)
• 04h: Request to get one specific identification
object (individual access)
Supported Object IDs:
• 00h: Vendor Name (“ABB”)
• 01h: Product Code (for example, “ASCCL”)
• 02h: Major Minor Revision (combination of contents
of parameters 07.05 Firmware version and 58.02
Protocol ID).
• 03h: Vendor URL ("[Link]")
• 04h: Product name: (“ACS180”).

 Exception codes
The table below shows the Modbus exception codes supported by the embedded
fieldbus interface.
Code Name Description
01h ILLEGAL FUNCTION The function code received in the query is not an
allowable action for the server.
02h ILLEGAL ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not an
allowable address for the server.
03h ILLEGAL VALUE The requested quantity of registers is larger than the
device can handle. This error does not mean that a
value written to the device is outside of the valid
range.
04h DEVICE FAILURE An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was
attempting to perform the requested action. See
section Error code registers (holding registers
400090…400100) on page 390.
ACS180 [Link] Page 372 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

372 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

 Coils (0xxxx reference set)

Coils are 1-bit read/write values. Control Word bits are exposed with this data type.
The table below summarizes the Modbus coils (0xxxx reference set). Note that the
references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on the wire.
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile
000001 OFF1_CONTROL STOP
000002 OFF2_CONTROL START
000003 OFF3_CONTROL Reserved
000004 INHIBIT_OPERATION Reserved
000005 RAMP_OUT_ZERO RESET
000006 RAMP_HOLD EXT2
000007 RAMP_IN_ZERO RUN_DISABLE
000008 RESET STOPMODE_RAMP
000009 JOGGING_1 STOPMODE_EMERGENCY_RAMP
000010 JOGGING_2 STOPMODE_COAST
000011 REMOTE_CMD Reserved
000012 EXT_CTRL_LOC RAMP_OUT_ZERO
000013 USER_0 RAMP_HOLD
000014 USER_1 RAMP_IN_ZERO
000015 USER_2 Reserved
000016 USER_3 Reserved
000017 Reserved FB_LOCAL_CTL
000018 Reserved FB_LOCAL_REF
000019 Reserved Reserved
000020 Reserved Reserved
000021 Reserved CTL_MODE
000022 Reserved Reserved
000023 Reserved USER_0
000024 Reserved USER_1
000025 Reserved USER_2
000026 Reserved USER_3
000027 Reserved Reserved
000028 Reserved Reserved
000029 Reserved Reserved
000030 Reserved Reserved
000031 Reserved Reserved
000032 Reserved Reserved
ACS180 [Link] Page 373 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB) 373

Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile

000033 Control for relay output RO1 Control for relay output RO1
(parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control (parameter 10.99 RO/DIO control
word, bit 0) word, bit 0)

 Discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set)

Discrete inputs are 1-bit read-only values. Status Word bits are exposed with this data
type. The table below summarizes the Modbus discrete inputs (1xxxx reference set).
Note that the references are 1-based index which match the address transmitted on
the wire.
Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile
0 RDY_ON READY
1 RDY_RUN ENABLED
2 RDY_REF Reserved
3 TRIPPED RUNNING
4 OFF_2_STATUS ZERO_SPEED
5 OFF_3_STATUS Reserved
6 SWC_ON_INHIB Reserved
7 ALARM AT_SETPOINT
8 AT_SETPOINT LIMIT
9 REMOTE SUPERVISION
10 ABOVE_LIMIT Reserved
11 USER_0 Reserved
12 USER_1 PANEL_LOCAL
13 USER_2 FIELDBUS_LOCAL
14 USER_3 EXT2_ACT
15 Reserved FAULT
16 Reserved ALARM
17 Reserved Reserved
18 Reserved Reserved
19 Reserved Reserved
20 Reserved Reserved
21 Reserved Reserved
22 Reserved USER_0
23 Reserved USER_1
24 Reserved USER_2
25 Reserved USER_3
26 Reserved REQ_CTL
27 Reserved Reserved
ACS180 [Link] Page 374 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

374 Fieldbus control through the embedded fieldbus interface (EFB)

Reference ABB Drives profile DCU Profile

28 Reserved Reserved
29 Reserved Reserved
30 Reserved Reserved
31 Reserved Reserved
32 Delayed status of digital input Delayed status of digital input
DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI DI1 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 0) delayed status, bit 0)
33 Delayed status of digital input Delayed status of digital input
DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI DI2 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 1) delayed status, bit 1)
34 Delayed status of digital input Delayed status of digital input
DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI DI3 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 2) delayed status, bit 2)
35 Delayed status of digital input Delayed status of digital input
DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI DI4 (parameter 10.02 DI
delayed status, bit 3) delayed status, bit 3)
36 Delayed status of digital input Delayed status of digital input
DO1 (parameter 11.02 DIO DO1 (parameter 11.02 DIO
delayed status, bit 4) delayed status, bit 4)

 Error code registers (holding registers 400090…400100)

These registers contain information about the last query. The error register is cleared
when a query has finished successfully.
Reference Name Description
89 Reset Error Registers 1 = Reset internal error registers (91…95). 0 = Do
nothing.
90 Error Function Code Function code of the failed query.
91 Error Code Set when exception code 04h is generated (see table
above).
• 00h No error
• 02h Low/High limit exceeded
• 03h Faulty Index: Unavailable index of an array
parameter
• 05h Incorrect Data Type: Value does not match the
data type of the parameter
• 65h General Error: Undefined error when handling
query
92 Failed Register The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or
holding register) that failed to be read or written.
93 Last Register Written The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or
Successfully holding register) that was written successfully.
94 Last Register Read The last register (discrete input, coil, input register or
Successfully holding register) that was read successfully.
ACS180 [Link] Page 375 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Control chain diagrams 375

10
Control chain diagrams
What this chapter contains
This chapter presents the reference chains of the drive. The control chain diagrams
can be used to trace how parameters interact and where parameters have an effect
within the drive parameter system.
For a more general diagram, see section Operating modes of the drive on page 62.
Note: The panel references in the diagrams refer to ACX-AP-x Assistant control
panels and the Drive composer PC tool.
 >
Selection 28.13 Ext1 frequency function

28.11 Ext1 frequency ref1

ADD

>
Selection
SUB
ACS180 [Link]

MUL
28.92 Frequency ref act 3
MIN Value

28.12 Ext1 frequency ref2 MAX

>
Selection
Page 376

>
28.17 Ext2 frequency function Selection

28.15 Ext2 frequency ref1

ADD
Direction

>
Selection Constant frequency ref
SUB Lock 28.96 Frequency ref act 7
MUL
376 Control chain diagrams

Value
Constant frequency command
MIN
28.16 Ext2 frequency ref2 MAX Value

>
Selection 28.43 Jogging 2 frequency ref

>
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selection
Value
CONSTANT
28.42 Jogging 1 frequency ref
FREQUENCY
SELECTION
Frequency reference selection

>
28.21 Const frequency function Selection

0
03.01 Panel reference Value

>
28.22 Constant frequency sel1 Selection
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

>
28.23 Constant frequency sel2 Selection 06.16 bit 8 Local control Value

>
28.24 Constant frequency sel3 Selection

28.26 Constant frequency 1 Value

28.41 Frequency ref safe Value
28.27 Constant frequency 2 Value

28.28 Constant frequency 3 Value

28.29 Constant frequency 4 Value

28.30 Constant frequency 5 Value

28.31 Constant frequency 6 Value 49.05 Communication loss action = Speed ref safe
28.32 Constant frequency 7 Value Panel comm loss active AND
Panel as local control device Frequency reference safe command
20.27 Jogging 2 start source Value

20.25 Jogging enable Value AND Jogging 2

Jogging 1
AND
20.26 Jogging 1 start source Value
 ACS180 [Link]

>
28.76 Freq ramp in zero source Selection Value
OR
6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value
Page 377

>
28.51 Critical frequency function Selection CRITICAL
FREQ
28.52 Critical frequency 1 low Value

28.53 Critical frequency 1 high Value

28.54 Critical frequency 2 low Value

28.55 Critical frequency 2 high Value RAMP

6.1 bit 5 Ramp hold Value
28.56 Critical frequency 3 low Value

28.57 Critical frequency 3 high Value

30.14 Maximum frequency
Value
28.96 Frequency ref act 7 Value 28.97 Freq ref unlimited
Value

28.01 Frequency ref ramp input

0
Value

Value

30.13 Minimum frequency

Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

28.72 Freq acceleration time 1 Value

28.74 Freq acceleration time 2 Value

Frequency reference modification

28.73 Freq deceleration time 1 Value

28.75 Freq deceleration time 2 Value

28.82 Shape time 1 Value

28.83 Shape time 2 Value

28.02 Frequency ref ramp output
0
Value
>

28.71 Freq ramp set selection Selection

6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value

Control chain diagrams 377
 ACS180 [Link]

>
22.13 Ext1 speed function Selection
Page 378

ADD

>
22.11 Ext1 speed ref1 Selection
SUB 22.86 Speed reference act 6
MUL Value
378 Control chain diagrams

MIN

MAX

>
22.12 Ext1 speed ref2 Selection

>
22.20 Ext2 speed function Selection

ADD
Speed reference source selection I
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

>
22.18 Ext2 speed ref1 Selection
SUB

MUL

MIN

MAX

>
22.19 Ext2 speed ref2 Selection
>

19.11 Ext1/Ext2 selection Selection

 ACS180 [Link]

22.86 Speed ref act 6 Value

Page 379

CONSTANT
SPEED Direction
Lock 22.87 Speed reference act 7
SELECTION
Value
22.43 Jogging 2 ref Value

>
22.21 Constant speed function Selection
0

22.42 Jogging 1 ref Value

>
22.22 Constant speed sel1 Selection

>
22.23 Constant speed sel2 Selection

>
22.24 Constant speed sel3 Selection

3.01 Panel reference Value

22.26 Constant speed 1 Value

22.27 Constant speed 2 Value 6.16 bit 8 Local control Value

22.28 Constant speed 3 Value

49.05 Communication loss action = Speed ref safe 22.41 Speed ref safe Value
22.29 Constant speed 4 Value
Panel comm loss active AND CRITICAL
22.30 Constant speed 5 Value
Speed ref safe command SPEEDS 22.01 Speed ref unlimited
Panel as local control device
22.31 Constant speed 6 Value
Value
>

22.51 Critical speed function Selection

22.32 Constant speed 7 Value
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

22.52 Critical speed 1 low Value

22.53 Critical speed 1 high Value

22.54 Critical speed 2 low Value

Speed reference source selection II

20.27 Jogging 2 start source Value 22.55 Critical speed 2 high Value

20.25 Jogging enable Value AND Jogging 2 22.56 Critical speed 3 low Value

22.57 Critical speed 3 high Value

Jogging 1
AND
20.26 Jogging 1 start source
Control chain diagrams 379
 23.01 Speed ref ramp input Value

>
30.36 Speed limit selection Selection

>
30.38 Max speed source Selection
ACS180 [Link]

MIN
30.12 Maximum speed Value
6.1 bit 8 Inching 1 Value
XOR

>
30.37 Min speed source Selection
MAX Value
6.1 bit 9 Inching 2
30.11 Minimum speed Value

6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value

Page 380

6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value

AND
6.1 bit 5 Ramp hold Value

22.01 Speed ref unlimited Value

6.1 bit 6 Ramp in zero Value
0
380 Control chain diagrams

RAMP
6.11 bit 5 Off 3 inactive Value 6.1 bit 9 Inching 2 Value

23.23 Emergency stop time Value

22.42 Jogging 1 ref

>
23.11 Ramp set selection Selection Value Value

23.02 Speed ref ramp output

RAMP 22.43 Jogging 2 ref Value
23.12 Acceleration time 1 Value Value
ACC TIME
23.14 Acceleration time 2 Value 23.20 Acc time jogging Value ACC TIME

23.13 Deceleration time 1 Value 23.21 Dec time jogging Value DEC TIME
DEC TIME
23.15 Deceleration time 2 Value
SHAPE
23.32 Shape time 1 Value TIME
SHAPE
23.33 Shape time 2 Value 0
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

6.11 bit 5 Off 3 inactive Value

23.20 Acc time jogging Value 0

Speed reference ramping and shaping

23.21 Dec time jogging Value

20.25 Jogging enable

AND
20.26 Jogging 1 start source
OR
20.27 Jogging 2 start source

6.1 bit 4 Ramp out zero Value

AND
Stop command
46.01 Speed scaling Value
 ACS180 [Link]
Page 381

25.06 Acc comp derivation time Value

25.07 Acc comp filter time Value

d TAccCom Value 25.56 Torque acc compensation

dt
Speed error calculation

-1
x Value 24.04 Speed error inverted
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

23.02 Speed ref ramp output Value 24.03 Speed error filtered
+ 24.01 Used speed reference Value
24.11 Speed correction Value - Value

24.02 Used speed feedback Value

24.12 Speed error filter time Value

Control chain diagrams 381
 ACS180 [Link]

30.18 Torq lim sel Value

Page 382

30.20 Maximum torque Value

Speed controller

>
30.22 Max torque 2 source Selection
382 Control chain diagrams

Speed regulator

PID

24.03 Speed error filtered Value Value 25.53 Torque prop reference 25.01 Torque reference speed control

Value 25.54 Torque integral reference Value

Value 25.55 Torque deriv reference

25.02 Speed proportional gain Value Value 25.56 Torque acc compensation
25.03 Speed integration time Value

25.04 Speed derivation time Value

Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

25.05 Derivation filter time Value

25.15 Proportional gain em stop Value

30.19 Minimum torque Value

30.21 Min torque 2 source >

Selection

30.18 Torq lim sel Value

 ACS180 [Link]

26.09 Maximum torque ref Value

MIN
Page 383

Internal torque lim max

>
26.14 Torq ref1/2 selection Selection

26.13 Torq ref1 function Value

26.73 Torque reference act 4
26.72 Torque reference act 3 Value
Value

Ref 1
26.18 Torq ramp up time
26.11 Torq ref1 source ADD Value

>
Selection 26.70 Torque Reference act 1 SUB
Value
MUL
26.12 Torq ref2 source
MIN x

>
Selection 26.71 Torque Reference act 2
Value MAX 26.74 Torque ref ramp out
Value

26.20 Torque reversal

>
Selection
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

1
03.01 Panel reference
-1 Value

6.16 bit 8 Local control Value

26.08 Minimum torque ref Value

MAX
Internal torque lim min Value

26.17 Torque ref filter time Value

26.19 Torque ramp down time Value

Torque reference source selection and modification
Control chain diagrams 383
 ACS180 [Link]

Torque selector

26.22 Torque sel speed in ZERO 26.01 Torque reference to TC

25.01 Torq reference speed control 0
Page 384

SPEED

>
Selection Value Value
TORQUE
Speed
MIN
limitation

MAX
26.21 Torque sel torque in 26.74 Torque ref ramp out Value 26.75 Torque reference act 5

>
19.12 Ext1 control mode Selection Value ADD

>
Selection Value
384 Control chain diagrams

19.14 Ext2 control mode 01.01 Motor speed used Value

>
Selection Value

>
19.11 Ext1/Ext2 sel Selection

Value
19.01 Actual operation mode
19.16 Local control mode Value

>
30.36 Speed limit selection Selection
06.16 bit 8 Local control Value >
30.38 Max speed source Selection
SPEED
MIN
30.12 Maximum speed Value
06.17 bit 6 Last speed active Value
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

>

30.37 Min speed source Selection

SPEED MAX
06.17 bit 5 Safe reference active Value 30.11 Minimum speed Value

SCALAR

99.04 Motor ctrl mode Value

Reference selection for torque controller

SPEED

Safety function active

SPEED

6.01 bit 0 Off1 control Value

AND
6.01 bit 2 Off3 control Value
OR
21.05 Emergency stop source Value
 ACS180 [Link]
Page 385

30.02 Torque limit status

DC voltage Load angle Motor pull-out
limiter Power limiter Torque limiter limitation limitation Current limiter
Torque limitation

To TC
26.01 Torq reference to TC Value 26.02 Torque reference used
Value

30.30 Overvoltagecontrol Value 30.02 Torque limit status

Bit Name
30.31 Undervoltagecontrol Value
0 = Undervoltage
1 = Overvoltage
24.02 Used speed feedback Value
2 = Minimum torque
3 = Maximum torque
30.26Powermotoringlimit Value
4 = Internal current
5 = Load angle
30.27Powergeneratinglimit Value 6 = Motor pull-out
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

7 = Reserved
8 = Thermal
30.17 Maximum current Value 9 = Max current
10 = User current
11 = Thermal IGBT
12 =
13 =
30.19 Minimum torque Value
14 =
15 =

>
30.21 Min torque 2 source Selection

30.18 Torq lim sel Value

30.20 Maximum torque Value

>
30.22 Max torque 2 source Selection
Control chain diagrams 385
 b0

>
40.19 Set 1 internal setpoint sel1 Selection BIN
TO 0
b1 INT
ACS180 [Link]

>
40.20 Set 1 internal setpoint sel2 Selection SEL OUT

Value 0
40.24 Set 1 internal setpoint 0
1
40.21 Set 1 internal setpoint 1 Value 40.62 PID internal setpoint actual
2 Value
40.22 Set 1 internal setpoint 2 Value
Page 386

3
40.23 Set 1 internal setpoint 3 Value

40.18 Set 1 setpoint function Value

Setpoint 1
Value 40.27 Set 1 setpoint max
386 Control chain diagrams

ADD
40.16 Set 1 setpoint 1 source 40.30 Set 1 setpoint freeze enable
SUB 40.89 Set 1 setpoint multiplier

>
Selection Value

>
Value Selection
MUL

DIV
Add RAMP
40.17 Set 1 setpoint 2 source 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual
MIN
Value

>
Selection Value Setpoint
MAX
Mul
Scale
AVE
+
a
a-b
40.26 Set 1 setpoint min Value
a+b
40.28 Set 1 setpoint increase time Value
a+ b
40.29 Set 1 setpoint decrease time Value
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

40.06 Process PID status word: bit 4 PID sleep mode Value Pulse
40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Value 0

>
40.10 Set 1 feedback function Selection 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Value

Feedback 1
40.11 Set 1 feedback filter time Value
ADD

40.08 Set 1 feedback 1 source SUB 40.90 Set 1 feedback multiplier Value

>
Selection Value MUL

DIV
Add

MIN Feedback
Value 40.02 Process PID feedback actual
40.09 Set 1 feedback 2 source Scale
MAX
Mul

>
Selection Value AVE

a
Note! Process PID parameter set 2 is also available. See parameter group 41.
a-b
Process PID setpoint and feedback source selection

a+b

a+ b
 ACS180 [Link]

40.55 Set 1 trim adjust Value

TRIM FUNCTION

>
40.51 Set 1 trim mode Selection

>
40.52 Set 1 trim selection Selection

Off 0
30.20 Maximum torque 1 Value Direct
30.12 Maximum speed Value Proportional
x

>
40.56 Set 1 trim source Selection
Value
Page 387

30.14 Maximum frequency Combined

x
40.54 Set 1 trim mix Value +
1 40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Value
(range 0...1) x 40.05 Process PID trim output act
- x
Value

>
40.53 Set 1 trimmed ref pointer Selection

>
40.38 Output freeze Selection
PROCESS PID FUNCTION
40.40 Deadband delay Value

40.39 Deadband range Value

Compare Delay

40.31 Set 1 deviation inversion Process

>
Process PID controller

Selection 40.81 Set 1 output max source PID

40.06 Process PID status word

>
ABS 40.37 Set 1 output max Value Selection OR status
1
Value
40.15 Set 1 output scaling Value
-1
40.01 Process PID Output actual
>

Value 40.04 Process PID deviation actual Value 40.49 Set 1 tracking mode Selection Value
40.98 Process PID setpoint %
40.50 Set 1 tracking ref selection Value
100% 40.99 Process PID Deviation %
Value
% scaling
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

PID 40.43 Set 1 sleep level Value

Value
40.03 Process PID setpoint actual Input Output
- x Scale Scale
40.02 Process PID feedback actual
Value

40.14 Set 1 setpoint scaling Value

% scaling

40.32 Set 1 gain Value

40.45 Set 1 sleep boost time Value
40.33 Set 1 integration time Value 40.06 bit 3 Sleep mode
40.97 Process PID feedback % 40.46 Set 1 sleep boost step Value
Value 40.34 Set 1 derivation time Value
40.43 Set 1 sleep level Value Sleep
40.35 Set 1 derivation filter time Value
Value
Function
Value 40.44 Set 1 sleep delay
40.07 Set 1 PID operation mode
Value
40.47 Set 1 wake-up deviation Value
40.58 Set 1 increase preventation
Value 40.06 bit 4 Sleep boost
40.59 Set 1 Decrease preventation Value 40.48 Set 1 wake-up delay

40.80 Set 1 output min source

>
40.36 Set 1 output min Value Selection
Control chain diagrams 387
 ACS180 [Link]

b0

>
71.19 Internal setpoint sel1 Selection BIN
TO 0
Page 388

b1 INT

>
71.20 Internal setpoint sel2 Selection SEL OUT

0 0
1
71.21 Internal setpoint 1 Value
2
388 Control chain diagrams

71.22 Internal setpoint 2 Value

3
71.23 Internal setpoint 3 Value

Value 71.27 Setpoint max

71.62 PID internal setpoint actual

Value
71.16 Setpoint 1 source
Value 71.03 Setpoint act value

>
Selection Value

71.26 Setpoint min Value

Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

71.11 Feedback filter time Value

71.08 Feedback 1 source

>
Selection Value Value 71.02 Feedback act value
External PID setpoint and feedback source selection
 ACS180 [Link]

EXTERNAL PID FUNCTION

Page 389

>
71.38 Output freeze Selection

71.40 Deadband delay Value

71.39 Deadband range Value

Compare Delay
External PID controller

OR
ABS

71.37 Output max Value

71.04 Deviation act value Value

Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

PID

71.03 Setpoint act value Value Scale

- x Value 71.01 External PID act value
71.02 Feedback act value Value

71.31 Deviation inversion

>
Selection 71.32 Gain Value

71.33 Integration time Value

1
71.34 Derivation time Value
-1 71.35 Derivation filter time Value

71.07 PID operation mode Value External

71.58 Increase prevention Value PID 71.06 PID status word Value

Value
status
71.14 Setpoint scaling 71.59 Decrease prevention Value

71.15 Output scaling Value

71.36 Output min Value

Control chain diagrams 389
 ACS180 [Link]

20.21 Direction = Request

AND
Page 390

Reference from PID

Direction lock

Reference from Motor potentiometer

Reference from Panel
Reference from AI
Jogging Reference OR
Last/Safe reference
Constant reference
390 Control chain diagrams

20.21 Direction = Request

Reverse command active
AND
Input reference > 0

Reference from Motor potentiometer

Reference from Panel
OR
Last/Safe reference -1
Reference from AI X
Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

Input reference Output reference

MAX
0
-1 X

20.21 Direction = Reverse

OR
20.21 Direction = Request
AND
Reverse command active
ACS180 [Link] Page 391 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

—
Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative,
quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing
of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to
[Link]/searchchannels.

Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to
[Link]/service/training.

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to
[Link]/drives/manuals-feedback-form.

Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the
Internet at [Link]/drives/documents.
ACS180 [Link] Page 392 Monday, October 12, 2020 2:16 PM

[Link]/drives

3AXD50000467860 Rev A (EN) 2020-09-08

© Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved.

Specifications subject to change without notice.